JP7295392B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

Regarding gaming machines.

BACKGROUND ART Game machines are provided with an input device for presentation to enhance the interest of a game, and there is a game machine for the purpose of enhancing the presentation effect by lighting and blinking a presentation lamp as the input device.

JP 2010-99334 A

Deformation, eccentric movement, and breakage of the surface of the push-down portion of the input device occur when the push-down surface is pushed down with a strong blow or an object. It is conceivable that the LED may come into contact with the back side of the depressed portion and the LED may be damaged as a result, but Patent Document 1 does not describe such a countermeasure.

an input device that performs a predetermined effect by vibrating;
A part 1 that engages with an input device, a part 2 that engages with at least two other parts that engage with the part 1,
a door having a display window;
a reel including at least a reel tape, a reel base around which the reel tape is wound, a motor for rotating the reel base, and a motor fixing base to which the motor is fixed;
a reel unit in which a plurality of reels are fixed in parallel;
a plurality of locking parts (locking parts are screws) for respectively fixing the plurality of reels to the reel unit;
The part 2 is a stopping device for stopping the reel,
at least one of the part 1, the other part and the part 2 has at least one portion that engages without the use of a screw;
When the input device vibrates to perform a predetermined effect, the displacement of vibration in the component 2 is smaller than the displacement of vibration in the input device,
A predetermined reel among the plurality of reels and the reel unit are fixed above the reel tape constituting the predetermined reel by a predetermined locking member among the plurality of locking members,
The relationship between the length m in the longitudinal direction of the predetermined engaging part and the vertical distance n from the top of the reel tape constituting the predetermined reel to the upper inner wall of the reel unit is m>n. cage,
The relationship between the length m of the predetermined engaging part in the longitudinal direction and the shortest distance b between the foremost portion of the predetermined reel and the display window when the door is locked is m<b. A gaming machine characterized in that

As a result, it is possible to prevent the light source from being destroyed because the pressed surface is not deformed and comes into contact with the light source.

It is a front view of the pachinko game machine to be assumed. It is a perspective view in the front direction of the pachinko game machine with the frame member opened. It is the perspective view of the back direction of the state which opened the frame member of the said pachinko game machine. It is a perspective view showing a game board attached to the pachinko game machine assumed. It is a functional block diagram of the pachinko game machine to be assumed. It is a diagram showing the transition of the game state of the pachinko gaming machine to be assumed. It is a diagram showing the power-on processing of the main control board of the pachinko gaming machine to be assumed. It is a figure which shows the game stop state setting process during the said power-on process. It is a diagram showing the interrupt processing of the main control board of the pachinko gaming machine to be assumed. It is a figure which shows the success-or-failure lottery table of the pachinko game machine which is assumed. It is a diagram showing a winning symbol lottery table of the premise pachinko gaming machine. It is a diagram showing a variation pattern lottery table during the low base state of the pachinko gaming machine to be assumed. It is a diagram showing a variation pattern lottery table during the high base state of the pachinko gaming machine to be assumed. It is a diagram showing a special variation pattern lottery table that is referred to during a limited period of the pachinko gaming machine that is assumed. It is a diagram showing the power-on processing of the effect control board of the pachinko game machine to be assumed. It is a diagram showing the interrupt processing of the effect control board of the pachinko game machine to be assumed. It is a diagram showing a game effect of symbol variation display (decorative symbol stop display) during normal game (low probability/low base) of the premised pachinko gaming machine. It is a figure showing the game production|presentation of the situation where the ready-to-win production|presentation with high expectation which becomes a big hit of the premise pachinko game machine is performed. It is a diagram showing a game effect in a state in which a jackpot game is being executed in the pachinko gaming machine as a premise. It is a diagram showing a game effect during operation of the electric chew support function, which is a specific game state (high probability or low probability/high base) of the premised pachinko game machine. It is a figure which shows the housing|casing exterior perspective view of a slot machine. It is a figure which shows the back surface of a front panel. It is a figure which shows a housing|casing inner surface. It is a figure which shows a functional block. 4 is a flowchart showing program start processing; 4 is a flowchart showing power-off processing; 4 is a flowchart showing interrupt processing; 7 is a flowchart showing power-off recovery processing; It is a flowchart which shows game progress main. 4 is a flowchart showing setting change processing; FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing advantageous section clear counter management processing; FIG. It is a figure which shows the pattern arrangement|sequence in 1st Embodiment. It is a diagram showing a list of symbol combinations that can be displayed as a result of the combination lottery in the first embodiment. It is a diagram showing a list of symbol combinations that can be displayed as a result of the combination lottery in the first embodiment. It is a diagram showing a list of symbol combinations that can be displayed as a result of the combination lottery in the first embodiment. It is a diagram showing a list of symbol combinations forming a winning combination in the first embodiment. It is a diagram showing a list of symbol combinations forming a winning combination in the first embodiment. It is a diagram showing a list of symbol combinations forming a winning combination in the first embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing numbers set for each winning combination in the first embodiment; It is a figure which shows the RT transition diagram in 1st Embodiment. 4 is a flowchart showing determination of an L mode number in the first embodiment; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the transmission of the light emitted from the reel sheet and the LED attached to the structural house lamp in the house lamp in the second embodiment; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a comparison when a pattern area is provided on the reel sheet in the second embodiment; FIG. 13 is a diagram showing scenario numbers, scenario selection ratios for each set value, and production scenarios corresponding to each scenario in one advantageous section in the third embodiment; It is a figure which shows the pattern arrangement|sequence in 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the list of the symbol combination which can be displayed by the result of the role lottery in 4th Embodiment. It is a diagram showing a list of symbol combinations forming a winning combination in the fourth embodiment. FIG. 20 is a diagram showing numbers set for each winning combination in the fourth embodiment; FIG. It is a figure which shows the RT transition diagram in 4th Embodiment. It is a timing chart diagram showing the end timing of the MB-A game in the fourth embodiment. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the medal|token insertion timing and reel control in this example. FIG. 5 is a diagram showing the relationship between the reel unit and the reel unit upper screw in this example. FIG. 5 is a diagram showing the relationship between the opening on the rear surface of the reel unit and the upper screw of the reel unit in this example. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the relationship between the opening on the rear surface of the reel unit, the central display board protection cover, and the upper screw of the reel unit in this example. FIG. 4 is a rear perspective view of a reel unit having upper and lower reel unit openings in this example. FIG. 4 is a rear perspective view of a reel unit having a reel unit full-surface opening in this example. FIG. 11 is an operation explanatory cross-sectional view part 1 for explaining the operation principle of the effect input button in the fifth embodiment; FIG. 21 is an operation explanatory cross-sectional view part 2 for explaining the principle of operation of the effect input button in the fifth embodiment; FIG. 11 is a first diagram illustrating a problem with the effect input button in the fifth embodiment; FIG. 11 is a second diagram for explaining a defect of the effect input button in the fifth embodiment; FIG. 11 is a first explanatory diagram of countermeasures for preventing the light source destruction defect of the effect input button in the fifth embodiment; It is a figure explaining arrangement|positioning of the light source of the production|presentation input button in 5th Embodiment, and a screw. There is a countermeasure explanatory diagram No. 2 for preventing the light source destruction defect of the effect input button in the fifth embodiment. It is a figure explaining the mechanism of reducing the malfunction (eccentric movement) of the production|presentation input button in 5th Embodiment. It is a figure explaining the irradiation range of the light source of the production|presentation input button in 5th Embodiment. FIG. 20 is an explanatory diagram of light source destruction caused by a failure in the depression mechanism of the effect input button in the fifth embodiment; It is a figure explaining the vibration transmission from the performance button of pachinko in 6th Embodiment. It is a figure explaining the vibration transmission from the performance button of pachinko in 6th Embodiment. It is a figure explaining the vibration transmission from the performance button of pachinko in 6th Embodiment. It is a figure explaining the vibration transmission from the performance button of pachinko in 6th Embodiment. It is a figure explaining the vibration transmission from the performance button of pachinko in 6th Embodiment. It is a figure explaining the vibration transmission displacement from the performance button of pachinko in 6th Embodiment. FIG. 20 is a diagram for explaining vibration transmission from effect buttons of the slot machine in the seventh embodiment; FIG. 20 is a diagram for explaining vibration transmission from effect buttons of the slot machine in the seventh embodiment; FIG. 20 is a diagram for explaining vibration transmission from effect buttons of the slot machine in the seventh embodiment; FIG. 20 is a diagram for explaining vibration transmission from effect buttons of the slot machine in the seventh embodiment; FIG. 20 is a diagram for explaining vibration transmission from effect buttons of the slot machine in the seventh embodiment; It is a figure explaining the vibration transmission displacement from the production|presentation button of the slot machine in 7th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows sectional drawing (a) (b) which shows sensor detection piece operation|movement in 8th Embodiment, and the memory area of RAM. FIG. 22 is a diagram for explaining chattering when high active determination is employed in the eighth embodiment; FIG. 22 is a diagram for explaining chattering when low active determination is employed in the eighth embodiment;

(Prerequisite technology)
Hereinafter, a pachinko game machine (hereinafter referred to as "prerequisite technology") on which the present invention is based will be described with reference to the drawings. 1 and 3 show a pachinko game machine as a representative example of the pachinko game machine according to the base technology, and FIG. 4 shows a game board provided in this pachinko game machine. First, the mechanical configuration of the pachinko game machine will be explained. In the following description, for convenience, the directions indicated by the arrows in FIG. 2 are referred to as the front-rear direction, the left-right direction, and the up-down direction.

[Machine configuration of pachinko machine]
First, the basic structure of the front side of the pachinko game machine P will be described. As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, the pachinko game machine P is configured in a rectangular outer shell, and is configured in a rectangular shape with a size matching the opening of the outer frame P1 in front of the opening of the outer frame P1 fixed in the game facility. The front frame P2 is mounted so that it can be horizontally opened, opened, and detached by means of upper and lower hinge mechanisms (upper hinge portion 10, lower hinge portion 20) disposed on the front left edges of each other.

A game board P5 and a glass frame P3 are detachably set on the front frame P2. The glass frame P3 has a rectangular shape, and is mounted and held on the front side of the front frame P2 so as to be able to open and close and be detachably opened laterally using upper and lower hinge mechanisms (upper hinge portion 10, lower hinge portion 20). The game board P5 is detachably set on the front side of the front frame P2, and configured so that the player can visually recognize the game area P501 provided on the front side of the game board P5 through the glass P301 of the glass frame P3 which is closed and held. It is In addition, the front frame P2 and the glass frame P3 can be rotated in either the left or right direction by inserting a key into the keyhole of the locking portion P30 provided on the front right edge of the pachinko game machine P, depending on the direction of rotation. , the locking of the outer frame P1 and the front frame P2 is released, or the locking of the front frame P2 and the glass frame P3 is released. As a specific example, when the key is inserted into the keyhole of the locking portion P30 and rotated to the right, the locking of the outer frame P1 and the front frame P2 is released, and the key is inserted into the keyhole of the locking portion P30 and rotated to the left. By doing so, the front frame P2 and the glass frame P3 are unlocked.

Under the glass frame P3, upper and lower ball trays P340 (upper ball tray P341 and lower ball tray P342) for storing game balls are provided. Further, the glass frame P3 is provided with an effect lamp P350 that emits light according to the development of the game, and an upper speaker P370 capable of outputting sounds such as sound effects according to the development of the game. At the center of the lower part of the glass frame P3, an effect operation means P380 for performing a predetermined effect operation is attached, and the effect operation means P380 possessed by the pachinko game machine shown as the base technology includes a push input type button P381 and a tilting operation. The button P381 allows the player to operate at all times, while the lever P382 is one of the movable objects (frame movable accessory P360) provided on the glass frame, and the operation means itself. is displaced to an upward projecting state (input permission state), operation input is possible (a plurality of operations are possible with one effect operation means).

A handle P204 is provided at the lower right portion of the front frame P2 for controlling the shooting operation of the game ball and the shooting intensity. A launcher unit P240 is further provided at the lower part of the front frame P2. Although not shown, a ball feeding mechanism P241 (sometimes referred to as a ball feeding unit) feeds game balls stored in the upper ball tray P341 one by one. ), a shooting device P242 having a shooting mechanism (a ball-striking hammer driven by a rotary solenoid) that shoots a game ball sent from the ball sending mechanism toward the game area P501, and the ball sending mechanism P241 and the shooting device P242 are synchronized. A firing control board P243 and the like for controlling the firing are provided.

As shown in FIG. 4, the game board P5 (game board unit) is configured with a base material formed in a rectangular flat plate shape using transparent synthetic resin or wood. 1 is a front view of the pachinko game machine P including the game board P5, and FIG. 4 is a perspective view of the game board unit P5. FIG. 4 shows a state in which the production accessory P560 (also called "movable production device", "movable production body", "movable production accessory", etc.) provided in the game board unit is in operation. On the front surface of the game board P5, an arc-shaped outer rail P502 is arranged from the lower left to the upper right, and a circle is arranged from the lower left to the upper left inside the outer rail P502 from near the lower center of the game board. An arc-shaped inner rail P503 and a rail decoration P504 formed in a curved shape that is arranged between the end of the upper right outer rail P502 and the lower part of the board surface and opens leftward, and the outer rail P502 A substantially circular game area P501 is defined inside surrounded by the inner rail P503 and the rail decoration P504. The game area P501 is divided into a left area P501L (left-handed area), which is an area on the left side of the center role P540, and an area on the right side of the center role P540, which is disposed substantially in the center. and a right area P501R (right hitting area). Further, the outer rail and the inner rail form a guide passage for guiding the game ball launched by the launcher unit P240 to the game area P501.

In the game area P501, along with a large number of game nails P510 and windmills P511 (not shown), there are a first start winning opening P711 (first starting opening), a second starting winning opening P721 (second starting opening), a general winning opening P731, Various ball entry devices (referred to as "winning devices" when prize balls are generated) such as the normal pattern operation port P741 (normal pattern operation gate device), the large winning prize port P751 (attacker), etc. are provided. It should be noted that the number of the big prize winning opening may be one, or it may be configured to have a plurality of openings. Further, in this specification, due to the configuration of the ball entry device, the game ball is ejected after entering the ball entry device, or further flows down the game area P501 after entering the ball entry device (gate type). On the other hand, when a game ball is detected by an internal detection switch, it is called "entering ball" or "winning (especially when a prize ball is generated)", and flows down to the downstream game area like a gate type ball entrance. There are cases where it is described separately from "passing" in particular. Also, the ball entry device is sometimes referred to as a ball entry port, and the prize winning device is sometimes referred to as a prize winning port.

In addition, at the lower right of the game area P501, the main control display device P50 which is lighting controlled by the main control board described later, such as the first special symbol display device P51, the second special symbol display device P52, the normal symbol display device P53, etc. are centrally located. A center accessory P540 is arranged substantially in the center of the game area P501, and the screen of the effect display device P80 is provided so as to be visible through the opening of the center accessory P540. Above the center accessory P540, etc., there is provided a production accessory P560 (movable accessory device) that performs a production operation according to the development of the game. At the lower end of the game area P501, there is provided an out port P790 through which game balls that have flowed down without entering the winning ports of various ball entry devices can pass. A game ball that has entered a prize winning opening of various prize winning devices or a game ball that has flowed into an outlet P790 flows down to the rear side of the game board P5 through a through hole (not shown) formed through the game board P5 in the front and back direction. Then, it is collected in the collection channel (played ball passage) at the bottom of the front frame P2 and passes through the out-ball sensor P792 (shot ball number sensor) provided at the bottom of the front frame for detecting the total number of shot game balls. After that, it is discharged out of the game machine.

The first starting winning device P710 is provided as a starting winning device corresponding to the first special symbol game. This first start winning device P710 is provided with a first start winning opening P711 into which a game ball can enter. The entry of the game ball into the first start winning opening P711 is a trigger for acquiring the random number used for the lottery related to the first special symbol, and is based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting winning opening P711. A lottery related to the first special symbol is executed after the timing immediately after entering the ball or after the holding period has passed.

The second starting winning device P720 is provided as a starting winning device corresponding to the second special symbol game. This second start winning device P720 has a second start winning opening P721 into which a game ball can enter, and a state in which it is easy for a ball to enter the second starting winning opening P721 when winning a normal symbol lottery, which will be described later. A normal electric accessory P770, which is a switching movable body, is provided. The entry of the game ball into the second start winning opening P721 is a trigger for the random number used for the lottery related to the second special symbol, and based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting winning opening P721. A lottery relating to the second special symbol is executed at the timing immediately after entering the ball or after the holding period has passed. The second start winning device P721 has an open state in which a game ball can enter or is easily entered into the second start winning port P721 by the action of a normal electric accessory P770, and a game ball enters the second starting winning port P721. It changes to a closed state that is impossible or difficult to enter. In other words, the second starting winning device P720 has a structure in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second starting winning port unless it is displaced to the open state, and a predetermined opportunity described later (a chance to win the normal symbol lottery) When it becomes an open state at , the ease of entering a game ball increases. In addition, the structure of the normal electric accessory P770 is known in various forms, and there are cases where it is not a structure that changes the ease of entering a ball by opening the movable body P771. ” may be expressed as “easy-entering state (easy-entering mode)” and “difficult-entering state (difficult-entering state)” respectively.

The general winning device P730 has a left general winning device P730L arranged in the left hitting area P501L and a right general winning device P730R arranged in the right hitting area P501R. In the pachinko gaming machine P according to the underlying technology, the left general prize winning device P730L is configured as one unit with three general prize winning ports P731La to P731Lc, while the right general prize winning device P730R is a large prize winning device P750 described later. configured as part of Entry of a game ball into the general winning hole P731 triggers the payout of prize balls as with other winning devices. It should be noted that the number and positions of the general winning openings P731 of the pachinko game machine, which are assumed, are merely an example, and may be configured to be arranged only in the right-handed area P501R.

The normal pattern operation gate device P740 (normal pattern operation port) is provided as a starting entrance ball corresponding to the normal pattern game. This normal figure operation gate device P740 is provided with an operation gate P741 through which a game ball can pass, and the entered game ball is configured to be able to further flow downstream of the game area of the game board. Passage of the game ball to the operation gate P741 triggers a normal symbol lottery for determining whether or not to open the second starting prize winning device P720, that is, whether or not to operate the normal electric accessory P770. . It should be noted that, as a modification, it is also possible to configure the above-described general winning port P731 to have a function that triggers the normal symbol lottery. It is also possible to provide the function of generating as one winning device (normal drawing operation winning port).

The big winning device P750 has a big winning opening P751 (special electric role P755) that opens and closes when the lottery result of the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery results in a big win or a small win. and is sometimes referred to as an “attacker (device)”. The big winning device P750 has an open state in which a game ball can enter the big winning opening P751 or is easy to enter (for example, a state in which a special electric accessory is activated P755), and a game ball cannot enter the big winning opening P751. Or it changes to a closed state where it is difficult to enter (for example, the special electric accessory P755 is inactive). In the jackpot game, a plurality of round games (unit games) accompanied by opening and closing operations of the jackpot P751 are performed. Even when the special electric accessory P755 is activated, a series of activation patterns (also called "open pattern") may cause the movable body P756 that constitutes the big winning opening P751 to be in a closed state in which it is difficult to enter the ball. have

In addition, depending on the specifications of the gaming machine, the big winning device P750 may have a specific area P760 (referred to as "V zone" or "V area" through which game balls can pass). (referred to as "area", "continuation area", etc.) may be provided. As a function related to this "specific area", (a) activating the probability fluctuation function (described later) after the big win game triggered by passing through the specific area during the big win game, (b) passing the specific area during the small win game to activate the accessory continuous operation device (flag for continuously operating the special electric accessory) and grant the right to execute the jackpot game, (c) specified in a specific round during the jackpot game Examples include deterministic or non-execution of subsequent rounds based on whether or not a region has been passed. In addition, an opening/closing member P761 (valve member), which is a structure for changing the ease of passage, may be provided for the "specific area". It may be configured to pass through the specific region P760 or other non-specific regions. Also, during the big hit game or the small hit game, it may have a period during which the passage of the game ball in the specific area P761 is valid and a period during which it is invalid.

Incidentally, in the pachinko gaming machine P as a premise, the big winning device P750 is provided in the right area P501R (right hitting area) in the game area P501. Therefore, in the big-hit game or the small-hit game, when the game ball is shot toward the game area P501, it is easy to enter the big winning hole P751 by hitting the right side area P501R, that is, hitting the right side. It's becoming

Next, the basic structure of the back side of the pachinko game machine P, which is the premise, will be described. On the rear side of the front frame, a back set unit P4 having a front-to-rear communicating window is mounted for mounting the game board unit P5 in the center. The reverse set unit P4 includes a storage tank P401 for storing a large number of game balls supplied from the gaming facility side, a gutter member P402 for flowing down the game balls from the storage tank P401, and a game ball guided by the gutter member. A prize ball payout unit P410 to be put out, a back side passage member P403 for causing the game balls paid out from the prize ball payout unit P410 to flow down to the upper ball tray P341 or the lower ball tray P342, and the like are provided. In addition, on the game ball flow down path from the storage tank P401 to the ball tray P340, there is a ball removal mechanism (ball removal operation lever P405, a valve member that forms a flow path that ejects the game ball from the flow path in conjunction with the operation lever. P406) is provided.

On the back side of the game board P5, there are a main control board P40 for comprehensively controlling the game progress of the pachinko game machine P, and an effect control board for controlling overall effects according to the game progress accompanying the control of the main control board P40. An image control board P41 and an image control board P42 for controlling image display according to game development are attached. Note that, in the pachinko game machine P of the underlying technology, the effect control board P41 and the image control board P42 form an effect display unit in an assembled state integrated with the effect display device P80 (liquid crystal display device). On the other hand, on the back side of the back set unit P4, there are a payout control board P43 for controlling the payout of game balls, and a power supply for receiving power from the game facility side and supplying power to various control boards and electric/electronic parts. A substrate P44 (not shown) and the like are attached. In addition, in order to prevent unauthorized modification, these control boards are housed in a board case made of transparent resin having a caulking structure and a sealing structure. , respectively. These control boards and the electrical/electronic components of each part of the pachinko game machine are interconnected via harnesses (connector cables) to enable the progress of games and the execution of effects in the pachinko game machine P. .

[Function block]
FIG. 5 shows functional blocks of a pachinko game machine as a premise.

The pachinko game machine includes a power supply board P44 that generates power to be used in the game machine based on AC power supplied from the outside of the game machine, and a main control board P40 (main control CPU ), a payout control board P43 (payout control CPU) as a frame control device for controlling payout of prize balls and shooting of game balls, and a performance control board P41 for controlling performance operations and processes. It is constructed in the form of In addition, the arrows shown in the figure indicate upper transmission/reception relationships by solid-line arrows and electrical connection relationships by broken-line arrows.

By operating a power switch P47 provided on the board, the power board P44 is connected to a main control board P40, a performance control board P41, a payout control board P43, and various game devices electrically connected to them. On the other hand, it generates and supplies the power required for operation. Although the details will be described later, since the power-on operation of the power switch P47 is a switch operation that triggers the start of processing of information related to the settings of the gaming machine, the power switch is covered with an opening/closing cover to prevent unauthorized operation. protected in good condition.

The main control board P40 includes a first start winning opening P711 (special figure 1 starting opening switch P712), a second starting winning opening P721 (special figure 2 starting opening switch P722), a large winning opening P751 (large winning opening switch P752), Various detection switches related to game progress such as normal pattern operation port P741 (normal pattern operation port switch P742) and other detection switches general winning port P731 (left side general winning port, right side general winning port), out port P790 It is also connected to switches and sensors such as the setting key switch P49, the vibration detection sensor P72, and the magnet sensor P73, which are used for managing various games and monitoring fraud. The main control board receives input of information related to the occurrence of various game states from these switches, determines control details related to the progress of the game, and is composed of solenoids, etc. A special electric accessory driving means P70 driven to expand the winning opening P751, and a normal electric accessory driven to make the normal electric accessory P770 easy to enter when winning the normal symbol lottery. Information relating to the driving mode is output to a game device such as the driving means P71.

Sensors and the like connected to the main control board P40 are connected to terminals called input ports on the main control board and notify the main control board P40 of the presence or absence of occurrence of various game states based on sensor detection as information, special electric Accessory drive means P70, normal electric accessory drive means P71, and other information output from a terminal called an output port, such as a launch permission signal for the launcher P242, is received to control each device.

In addition, the main control board P40 includes special symbol display devices P51 and P52 that perform variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, a round indicator light P54 that notifies the type (number of rounds) of the big hit and the small hit, and the game state. A main control display device P50 that performs various displays such as a status indicator P55 that notifies the and so on. Regarding the "base value", there are various other calculation methods such as data that excludes the winning of the starting prize opening P711, etc. Details are omitted in the explanation of the pachinko game machine.

In addition to the above, the main control board P40 is configured to be electrically connectable to devices outside the gaming machine through an external information output terminal P77, a test terminal P78, etc., and transmits and receives various control signals to and from each of them. The main control board P40 is also electrically connected to the effect control board P41 and the payout control board P43, which are other control boards in the gaming machine.

The payout control board P43 controls the payout of prize balls by the payout device P410 based on signals indicating the payout of prize balls and the control state of the main control board transmitted from the main control board P40. In response to the operation of , control relating to shooting of the game ball by the shooting device unit P240 is performed. The payout device P410 has, for example, a payout motor P411 and a ball counting sensor P412, and is configured to be able to pay out game balls one by one by the rotation of the payout motor P411. The launching device (shooting device unit) P240 moves the game balls staying in the ball tray P340 (upper ball tray P341) one by one to the position where they can be shot by the ball feeding unit P241, and then hits the game ball with the hitting mallet. It is configured to shoot a game ball by hitting it. The payout control board P43 is provided with a ram clear switch P48, which is mainly used for initializing the game machine and canceling errors that occur during the game. Operation information of the ram clear switch P48 is input to the main control board via the harness and connector used.

The production control board P41 includes the production display device P80, the drive source and position detection sensor (for example, drive motor, initial position detection sensor, production position detection sensor) of the production movable accessory P560, the speaker P83 (upper speaker P370, lower speaker 141), production input device unit P380 (for example, production button P381 which is production operation means P81, production lever P382, cross key P383, etc.), production lamp P82 (“decorative lamp”, “board lamp (P550)”, “frame lamp (P350 )”), and transmits and receives various control signals to and from each of them. Also, the effect control board P42 and the effect display device P80 are connected via an image control board P42 (VDP) or the like that controls the display of the effect display device P80 (for example, a device that displays an image such as a liquid crystal display device). It may be something to do. In addition, in the pachinko game machine on which this assumption is made, the speaker P83 is configured to be controlled by the performance control board P41. may be configured to control

Transmission and reception of data between the main control board P40 and the effect control board P41 is performed by unidirectional data transmission/reception so as to be in one direction from the main control board P40 to the effect control board P41. Since the unidirectionality of data transmission from the main control board P40 to the effect control board P41 is maintained, data cannot be transmitted from the configuration included in the effect control board P41 to the configuration included in the main control board P40. , it is not possible to request data transmission. Therefore, the effect control board P41 cannot refer to the information unless the information generated by the main control board P40 is transmitted. Incidentally, in the pachinko game machine P assumed here, data transmission and reception are performed bidirectionally between the main control board P40 and the payout control board P43. However, as in the case between the main control board P40 and the performance control board P41, it may be configured to transmit and receive data in one direction from the main control board P40 to the payout control board P43.

[Basic game progression]
Next, the basic game progress and game method in the pachinko game machine P as the underlying technology configured as described above will be described for each game state. The "game state" is roughly divided into a "normal game state" and a "special game state" in which game balls are easier to obtain than in the normal game state. The "normal game state" is a state in which the player aims to acquire the right to transition to the "special game state". A plurality of states are provided, and among the plurality of normal game states, the state in which it is relatively easy for the player to acquire the right to transition to the special game state (which is more advantageous for the player than the normal game state (low probability/low base state)) State) is expressed as "specific game state". The ``special game state'' corresponds to so-called ``big win game'' and ``small win game'', and the main control board P40 drives the special electric accessory drive means P70 to open the big winning opening P751, and the game ball is acquired. It means a state in which it is easy to

[Normal game state (low probability / low base state)]
First, the game method and the progress of the game in the normal game state will be explained. It should be noted that the normal game state described here is a description of the "normal game state (low probability / low base state)" (see FIG. 6) excluding the specific game state, and generally in the situation where the player starts the game The game state will be explained, and the game method, the progress of the game, and the meanings of the terms "low (high) probability" and "low (high) base" in the specific game state will be described later.

As a game method in the normal game state (low probability/low base state), first, the player operates the handle P204 to shoot a game ball toward the game area P501 provided on the game board P5. In the premised pachinko game machine P, in the normal game state (low probability/low base state), the player controls the operation amount of the handle P204 so that the game ball is shot toward the left area P501L (left-handed area) of the game area. The game is played by operating so that the

When a game ball is shot to the left area P501L of the game area by the player, the shot game ball flows down the game area P501 and hits a game nail P510 (also called "obstacle nail" or "nail") (not shown) or , While displacing the flow direction by the windmill P511, the first start winning opening P711 arranged at the substantially lower center position in the game area P501 of the game board called "navel" etc., or the general winning opening P731L of the left general winning device A ball enters (wins a prize), or enters an out hole P790 as a game ball that has been played without entering any of the winning holes. When the ball enters the first start winning hole P711 or the general winning hole P731, the main control board P40 sends information (control command ) is output, and the player acquires new game balls by paying out prize balls.

Here, a special figure 1 start opening switch P712 is arranged inside the first start winning opening P711. , When the ball is entered into the first start winning opening P711, the game ball detection information of the special figure 1 start opening switch P712 is input to the main control board P40.

When the main control board P40 receives the input of the game ball detection information of the special figure 1 start port switch P712, in addition to paying out a predetermined number of game balls, the lottery related to the control of the first special symbol is performed. Get a random value to do. Acquisition of the random number is based on the detection of the game ball, the acquisition of the random number generated by the random number generation circuit on the electric circuit (hard latch), or the control device of the main control board P40 by software processing. There are methods such as executing processing to obtain random numbers from the random number generation circuit when detecting information on game balls, or obtaining updated random numbers in software (soft latch). It is possible to use them properly according to the random number value to be obtained, or to use them in combination. It should be noted that when the ball enters the general winning slot, the random number related to the special symbol is not acquired, and only the prize ball is paid out.

A lottery related to the control of the first special symbol is a "special symbol lottery", and the "special symbol lottery" includes a "win/fail lottery", a "winning symbol lottery", and a "fluctuation pattern lottery". The "win/fail lottery" is a process of determining whether the lottery result using the obtained random number value is a "big hit" or a "loss" (depending on the specifications of the gaming machine, the lottery result may include a "minor win"). ). The "hit symbol lottery" (sometimes simply referred to as "symbol lottery") is a process of determining the display pattern of the stop display symbol indicating the winning or failing lottery result in the special symbol display device P51 (P52) of the main control display device P50. It is possible to determine one pattern from a plurality of stop display patterns for one lottery result (big win, small win), and "big win" or "minor win" according to the stop display pattern determined here. It is possible to make the execution mode of the special game in . "Variation pattern lottery" is a process for determining at what timing the stop display pattern indicating the result of the winning lottery is to be displayed in the special pattern display device P51 (P52), and the special pattern in the special pattern display device P51 (P52). It determines the time (referred to as “variation display time” and “variation pattern”) during which variable display indicating that the lottery has been executed is performed. It is common to use different random numbers for the "win/fail lottery", "win pattern lottery", and "fluctuation pattern lottery". called "random number". In addition, the lottery related to the control of the second special symbol, which is performed based on detecting the game ball of the special figure 2 starting port switch P722, is also the same "special symbol lottery". Also, the explanation of the "special symbol lottery" will be given later.

Returning to the description of the game method in the normal game state (low probability/low base state), in the normal game state (low probability/low base state), the player shoots a game ball into the left area P501L of the game area. Then, the game ball is entered into the first start winning hole P711, the lottery (special symbol lottery) relating to the first special symbol is executed, and the special symbol indicating "big win" ("small win") on the special symbol display device. is displayed, a game aiming to acquire the execution right of the special game is performed.

In the process of the player receiving the special symbol lottery, the variable display of the special symbols is performed according to the time determined by the variation pattern lottery. During this special pattern variable display period, when there is a new start winning hole (first start winning hole P711, second start winning hole P721), a special pattern lottery is executed a predetermined number of times. It has a hold function that temporarily stores random numbers corresponding to rights. In the premised pachinko game machine P, as a holding function corresponding to the special symbol lottery based on the winning of the first start winning hole P711, it is possible to suspend the special symbol lottery up to four times. It should be noted that the holding function can be set for each special symbol, and in the pachinko gaming machine P of the underlying technology, apart from the holding of the first special symbol, the holding function of the special symbol lottery for the second special symbol can be set up to four times. It is possible to reserve the random number used for the special symbol lottery.

In this way, in the normal game state (low probability/low base state), the player shoots the game ball to the left area P501L of the game area and causes the special symbol lottery related to the first special symbol to be executed. Then, in the special symbol lottery, when the lottery result of the special game state such as "big win" or "minor win" is won, and the fact that the right to shift to the special game state is acquired is displayed on the special symbol display device. , the game state of the pachinko game machine P shifts to a special game state.

[Special game state]
Next, the game method and progress of the game in the special game state will be explained. The special game state includes "big win (game)" and "minor win (game)". , and the big winning hole P751 is in a state where it is easy to enter the ball. The big difference is that the "small hit" is completed by the operation of the special electric role product once, as opposed to being based on the operation of the operating device. Another difference is that in the operation of the special electric role product (jackpot) based on the operation of the accessory continuous actuating device, it is possible to make the operation mode more advantageous to the player regarding the operation of the special electric role product P755. Specifically, the total opening time of the big winning opening P751 in the operating state (big win) of the role product continuous operating device is allowed up to 30 seconds, while the total opening time of the big winning opening P751 in the small winning is allowed. There is a point that the time is limited to 1.8 seconds. In the following description of the game method and the progress of the game in the special game state, the jackpot will be described as an example.

The game progress of the special game in the pachinko gaming machine P, which is the underlying technology, is chronologically called "special game start demo" (in the case of a big win, it is called "big win start demo", "role combination operation start demo", etc.). In the case of a hit, a performance period called "small win start demo") to inform the player that various special games have been won, and a single time called "round (game)" (also called "unit game") The operation period of the special electric accessory P755 and the “special game end demo” (in the case of a big win, it is called “big win end demo”, “role combination operation end demo”, etc., and in the case of a small win, it is called “small win end demo” ), which is mainly composed of the game results (such as the number of game balls acquired) during the special game and the period for notifying the type of the normal game state (including the specific game state) of the transition destination.

Next, the game method during each special game period described above will be described. First, during the “special game start demo” period, in the pachinko gaming machine P of the underlying technology, the big winning opening P751 is arranged in the right area P501R (right-handed area) of the game area, and the normal game state (low probability/low Even if a game ball is shot into the left area P501L similar to the base state), it is almost impossible to expect the ball to enter the big winning hole P751, so the big winning hole P751 in the special game is in an easy-to-enter state Before the start of the round game In addition, a right-handed notification effect that prompts the player to shoot a game ball to the right side area P501R (right-handed area) of the game area is provided by the production display device P80, speakers (lower speaker P141, upper speaker P370), and production lamps. Execute using P82. The player adjusts the amount of operation of the handle P204 to increase the shooting intensity of the game ball according to the right-handed notification effect, and changes the shooting position so that the game ball flows down to the right side area P501R (right-handed area) of the game area. to (perform a right-handed stroke).

During the “round (game)” period, in the pachinko machine P of the underlying technology, the main control board P40 outputs a driving signal to the special electric accessory driving means P70, thereby causing the large winning opening P751 to enter the easy-to-enter state or It is specified that it is more advantageous for the player to be in a state where it is difficult to enter a ball, and to congratulate the player for winning a big win (minor win) in accordance with the execution period of the special game, or to shift to a normal game state after the special game is over. An effect such as an effect suggesting whether or not the player is in a game state is executed. A player shoots a game ball to the right area P501R (right hitting area) of the game area in order to enter the game ball into the big winning hole P751 and obtain a large number of game balls.

During one "round (game)" period, the opening pattern (operation mode of the special electric accessory) of the big winning opening determined based on the type of big win (minor win) is completed (opening time elapses). Alternatively, the game ends when a predetermined "specified number" (which may be expressed as "count", "C", etc.) of game balls enter the game. Then, according to the type of special game state being executed (type of big win or small win), when all the round games to be executed are completed, the state shifts to the state of "special game end demo".

Subsequently, during the "special game end demo" period, the pachinko machine P, which is the underlying technology, displays the number of game balls acquired during this special game state period, and Acquired in the special game state (acquired without transitioning to the normal game state (low probability / low base state)) to notify the total number of acquired game balls, or normal game that shifts after the special game state Effects such as the notification of the type of state and the notification related to the game method in the game state of the transition destination (such as the above-described right-handed notification effect) are executed. The player operates the steering wheel in preparation for a game corresponding to the type of normal game state to which the game is to be transferred from the effect being executed.

In many pachinko gaming machines P that are assumed, except for some exceptions, when a jackpot game as a special game state is executed, a special game state for the player is called a "specific game state" as a normal game state. The right to transition to is shifted to a state where it is easy to acquire, and the specific game state and the special game state are continuously repeated, so-called "Renso".

[Specific gaming state]
Next, a description of the "specific game state" will be given. As shown in FIG. 6, there are roughly three specific game states in the specific game state. And, there are "probability state" and "base state" as elements for classifying those types, and a specific game state is constituted by a combination thereof.

(probability state)
"Probability state" is a function that changes the probability that the lottery result will be a "big hit" in the winning lottery in the special symbol lottery. If it is expressed as "high probability (state)"("probability change state", "probability change state" when the success or failure lottery in the special symbol lottery becomes a "jackpot" with a higher probability than when it is not activated. There is also), and the state where the probability variation function is not operating is expressed as "low probability (state)". The "high probability (state)" is a game state more advantageous than the normal game state (low probability/low base state) in that the probability of winning a big hit in one special symbol lottery is high.

(base state)
The "base state" is a state related to the "base", that is, the ratio (expected value) of game balls obtained as prize balls when a predetermined number of game balls are fired. The state in which the operation of P770 is easier (advantageous) than the normal game state (low probability / low base state) is called "high base (state)" (also called "electric support (electric support) state"). . In addition, depending on the specifications of the game machine, even if the "electric chew support function" is not activated, the recommended shooting position of the game ball is switched, so that "when a predetermined number of game balls are fired, it is possible to obtain prize balls." If the "proportion of game balls to be played" increases, it may be expressed as "high base state". "High base (state)" means that the number of game balls paid out as prize balls increases (it becomes easier to pay out) during the period until the special game state is acquired, so that the consumption of game balls is suppressed and the special This is a game state that is advantageous to the player in that the player can aim to acquire the game state.

"Electric chew support function" is a state in which the operation of the normal electric accessory P770 is easier than in the normal game state (low probability / low base state), but mainly a combination of three functions (at least one ). The three functions that make up the “electric chew support function” are “normal symbol probability change”, “normal symbol time saving”, and “open extension (of normal electric accessories)”. "Normal pattern probability variation" refers to a state with a high probability of operating the normal electric accessories in the "normal symbol lottery". "Reduced normal symbol time" refers to a state in which the time from executing a normal symbol lottery to displaying the result of the normal symbol lottery is shortened in the normal symbol display means P53 in the main control display device P50. "Extension of opening of ordinary electric role" is, for the type of winning in the ordinary symbol lottery, the ordinary electric role is placed in a manner in which the game ball can easily enter the winning opening related to the ordinary electric role P770. It refers to changing so as to operate, and as an example, it corresponds to extending and lengthening the total time in which the normal electric accessory is in the easy-to-enter state.

"Normal symbol lottery" is that the above-mentioned special symbol lottery is a lottery related to the operation of the special electric accessory P755, whereas the normal symbol lottery is a lottery related to the operation of the normal electric accessory P770. The difference is that the execution trigger is the entry of a game ball to the normal pattern operation gate device P740, but it is almost the same in that the success or failure, the pattern, and the variation pattern are determined by lottery and that it has a holding function. If you want to express the lottery of the normal pattern lottery, the pattern, and the variation pattern, you can say "normal pattern lottery", "normal pattern lottery", and "normal pattern fluctuation pattern lottery" (or "normal pattern lottery"). Ordinary design") is attached to the beginning.

"Probability state" and "base state" have been explained as elements that distinguish the types of "specific game state", but as an element that constitutes the specific game state, there are also "time reduction state" ("fluctuation time reduction state" , a state in which the "fluctuation time reduction function" is activated). In general, the "time saving state" refers to a state in which the variable display time (variation pattern) per special symbol is shortened and the number of times the special symbol lottery is executed per unit time increases. It is an advantageous state in that many special symbol lotteries can be received per unit time. "Time saving state" (fluctuation time shortening state) is often controlled at the same time as the above-mentioned "high probability state" and "electric chew support state", and rarely constitutes a specific game state by itself.

[Specific game state 1: low probability / high base state]
Returning to the description of the "specific game state", first, the progress of the game and the game method in the specific game state 1 (low probability/high base state) shown in FIG. 6 will be described.

The transition to the specific game state 1 (low probability/high base state) is made by the game state transitions shown in (1), (8) and (12) in FIG. As the game state transition conditions of (1), (8), and (12) in FIG. ) only) and so on. Although not shown, there is also a case where the specific game state 1 goes back to the specific game state 1 via a jackpot game. On the other hand, when the conditions for ending the special game state are met, transitions are made as shown in (2), (7), and (11) in FIG. These game state transition conditions (2), (7), and (11) are (c) to obtain a jackpot game of the type that transitions to each game state in the specific game state 1, and (d). The elapse of a predetermined number of games (*(2) only) can be mentioned. It should be noted that the "number of games played" refers to, for example, "the number of times a special symbol lottery is executed".

When shifting to the specific game state 1 (low probability/high base state), in the premise pachinko game machine P, both the above-described "electric chew support function" and "fluctuation time reduction function" are activated. In the arrangement configuration of each winning device on the game board P5 of the pachinko game machine P as a premise, the right side area P501R (right hitting area) of the game area is the normal figure operation gate device P740, and the second start winning relating to the ordinary electric accessory A mouth P721 is arranged, and the player can easily receive a normal symbol lottery and a special symbol lottery by performing "right-handed hitting" in which a game ball is shot to the right side area P501R (right-handed area) of the game area. In addition, the pachinko game machine P, which is assumed, is also controlled in the above-described "time saving state" in the specific game state 1 (low probability/high base state).

To explain the progress of the game in more detail, when the specific game state 1 (low probability/high base state) occurs, the player shoots the game ball to the right side area P501R (right hitting area) of the game area, Entering (passing) the operation gate device P740 is performed as the first procedure, and by entering (passing) the normal pattern operation gate device P740, the normal symbol lottery is received in the main control board P40. The normal symbol lottery in the specific game state 1 (low probability / high base state) is a hit with a high probability (about 1/1) due to the operation of the normal pattern probability variation function, so the game ball is 1 to the normal pattern operation gate device P740. When the ball enters (passes), one operation of the normal electric accessory P770 occurs. When the normal electric accessory P770 operates, the pachinko game machine P on which the premise is, the second start winning opening P721 that triggers the special symbol lottery related to the second special symbol becomes easy to enter, and the player continues the second. As a procedure, a game ball is shot toward the second start winning opening P721. When the game ball enters the second start winning hole P721, the detection information is input to the main control board P40, the special symbol lottery related to the second special symbol is executed, and the execution right of the special game (big win, small win). A lottery related to the acquisition of is executed.

The specific game state 1 (low probability / high base state) is predetermined by the game state transition conditions (for example, if the execution of the jackpot, the type of jackpot executed, etc.) The game ends when the number of games (the number of times a special symbol lottery is received) elapses or when a new jackpot game is obtained (there is a case where the game shifts to this state again after the jackpot game). In the case of winning a small winning game, it is often assumed that the specific game state does not end, but depending on the specifications of the gaming machine, winning a small winning game (or winning multiple small winning games, or In some cases, it is designed to end with the acquisition of a small winning game. When the specific game state 1 (low probability/high base state) ends due to the number of games played, it shifts to the normal game state (low probability/low base state).

[Specific game state 2: high probability / high base state]
Next, the progress of the game and the game method in the specific game state 2 (high probability/high base state) shown in FIG. 6 will be described.

The transition to the specific game state 2 (high probability/high base state) is made by the game state transitions shown in (3), (7) and (9) in FIG. The game state transition conditions of (3), (7), and (9) in FIG. 6 are (A) to obtain a big hit game in each state. Although not shown, there is also a case where the specific game state 2 is transferred to the specific game state 2 again via the jackpot game. On the other hand, when the conditions for ending the special game state are satisfied, transitions are made as shown in (4), (8), and (10) in FIG. These (4), (8), and (10) game state transition conditions are (a) to acquire a jackpot game of the type that transitions to each game state in the specific game state 2, (c) For example, a predetermined number of games has passed.

When moving to the specific game state 2 (high probability / high base state), in the premise pachinko game machine P, the "probability change function" was further activated for the specific game state 1 (low probability / high base state). It differs in that it is "high probability (state)". The progress of the game and the method of playing in the specific game state 2 are the same as those in the specific game state 1, and the difference is that the player can win the big win earlier than the special symbol lottery because the probability of winning the big win is high. do.

The specific game state 2 (high probability / high base state) is predetermined by the game state transition condition (for example, if the big win is executed, the type of the executed jackpot, etc.) The game ends when the number of games (the number of times a special symbol lottery is received) elapses or when a new jackpot game is obtained (there is a case where the game shifts to this state again after the jackpot game). It is common that the specific game state 2 is not terminated in the case of winning a small winning game. If the specific game state 2 (high probability / high base state) ends due to the number of games played, normal game state (low probability / low base state), specific game state 1 (low probability / high base state), specific game state Go to 3 (high probability/low base state).

[Specific game state 3: high probability / low base state]
Next, the progress of the game and the game method in the specific game state 3 (high probability/low base state) shown in FIG. 6 will be described.

The transition to the specific game state 3 (high probability/low base state) is made by the game state transitions shown in (5), (10) and (11) in FIG. As the game state transition conditions of (5), (10), and (11) in FIG. ) only) and so on. Although not shown, there is also a case where the specific game state 3 is transferred to the specific game state 3 again via the jackpot game. On the other hand, when the conditions for ending the special game state are met, transitions are made as shown in (6), (9), and (12) in FIG. These game state transition conditions (6), (9), and (12) are (c) to obtain a jackpot game of the type that transitions to each game state in the specific game state 3, and (d). The elapse of a predetermined number of games (*(6) only) can be mentioned.

When moving to the specific game state 3 (high probability / low base state), in the premise pachinko game machine P, the "probability variation function" is activated "high probability (state)", specific game state 1 and specific game Unlike state 2, the "electric chew support function" and the "fluctuation time reduction function" are not activated. In the arrangement configuration of each winning device on the game board P5 of the pachinko game machine P as a premise, the normal figure operation gate device P740 in the right side area P501 (right hitting area) of the game area, and the second start winning relating to the ordinary electric accessory Although the mouth P721 is arranged, it is assumed that in the specific game state 3 (high probability / low base state), the player hits to the right by shooting a game ball into the right side area P501R (right hitting area) of the game area. Also, the probability of winning a hit in the normal pattern lottery is low, and there is no advantage in hitting right.

Therefore, the player proceeds with the game by shooting the game ball to the left area P501L (left-handed area) of the game area, and since this is a high-probability state, there is a high probability of winning a big hit in the special symbol lottery. The game method and game progress are the same as those in the normal game state (low probability/low base state) except that the jackpot game can be obtained early because of the high value.

The specific game state 3 (high probability/low base state) is predetermined by the game state transition conditions (for example, if the big win is executed, the type of the executed jackpot, etc.) The game ends when the number of games (the number of times a special symbol lottery is received) elapses or when a new jackpot game is obtained (there is a case where the game shifts to this state again after the jackpot game). It is common that the specific game state 3 is not terminated in the case of winning a small winning game. When the specific game state 3 (high probability/low base state) ends due to the number of games played, it shifts to the normal game state (low probability/low base state).

In addition, the specific game state 3 (high probability/low base state) is different from the board arrangement configuration of FIG. The arrangement configuration of the winning device on the game board, such as by arranging the third start winning port of the type that does not have and activating the ``time saving state'' so that many special symbol lotteries can be received in a short time. And depending on the control of the time saving state, there may be a game state where "right hitting" is recommended.

As described above, the premised pachinko gaming machine P progresses through a plurality of game states, but does not necessarily have all the game states described above. Therefore, among game machine specifications constituted by combinations of a plurality of game states, etc., game machine specifications (sometimes referred to as "specs") that can be adopted in the premise pachinko game machine P are exemplified below.

Regarding representative game machine specifications ("specs"), examples of the types of game machine specifications related to the operation of the probability variation function of the special symbol lottery are "(until the next time) probability change", "ST (number of times cut probability change)". , “V probability variation (also called “ball probability” and “attack round system”)”, and “latency probability variation” can be adopted. The difference in gaming machine specifications due to the difference in the probability variation function is sometimes expressed as "this gaming machine is a '○○ machine (eg: ST machine)'". Also, in a gaming machine that does not have a probability variation function, by passing through the specific area P760 inside the big winning opening P751 during the small winning game, the accessory continuous actuating device will then operate (that is, shift to the big winning game). There is also a game machine specification called "small hit V".

[(Until the next time) fixed]
First of all, I will explain “(until the next time) probability change”. "Variable probability until the next time" is generally, among the plurality of specific game states provided in the pachinko game machine P, the most advantageous game state among the above-mentioned specific game states, "Specific game state 2 ( High probability/high base state) will continue until the next jackpot game right is acquired"Pachinko game machine specifications". In other words, the gaming machine with the “probability change until the next time” is configured so that the specific game state 2 (high probability/high base state) continues until the right to the next big hit game is acquired, and does not end depending on the number of symbol fluctuations. It is

It should be noted that depending on the type of jackpot, it may be controlled to the specific game state 1 (low probability / high base state) or the specific game state 3 (high probability / low base state). Also, in the "pachinko machine that continues until the specific game state 3 (high probability / low base state) acquires the right to play the next big hit", the probability variation function continues until the next big hit. It may be called "probability change until next time", but the base state is "low base state", and the same game as the normal game state (low probability / low base state) may be required for the electric chew support function. , Since the probability is variable until the next time when the electric chew support function is not activated, it is expressed separately as "latent probability variable".

[ST (Variable number of cuts)]
Next, "ST (Variable number of cut probability)" will be explained. "ST" is an abbreviation of "Special Time", and generally, "special game state 2 (high probability / high base state) performs a special symbol lottery for a predetermined number of times (predetermined number of times symbol variation is executed) or the pachinko game machine that will continue until the right to win the jackpot game" is shown.

It should be noted that depending on the type of jackpot, it may be controlled to the specific game state 1 (low probability / high base state) or the specific game state 3 (high probability / low base state). Also, in the same way as the above-mentioned "probability change until the next time", the game state is a specific game state 3 (high probability / low base state). For cases to be controlled, it is also possible to configure so as to have a state called "latency probability change (latency ST)".

In addition, even if it is "ST (variable number of cuts)", the period in which the game state is controlled to ST, such as when the special symbol lottery lottery is "until 10000 times", is substantially in a high probability state If it is a gaming machine specification that can be said to guarantee a big hit until the next time, it may be expressed as "until the next time".

As mentioned above, "probability change until the next time" and "ST (number of times cut probability change)" are different in terms of the end of the probability change function of the special symbol lottery, which distinguishes the "probability change state" as a game machine specification is. On the other hand, as in "V probability variation (" ball probability "" attack round system ")" described below, whether or not the probability variation function of the special symbol lottery in the specific game state is activated, that is, regarding the start of execution of the probability variation function, Game machine specifications (“specs”) may be expressed by requiring special conditions.

[V probability change]
Next, a game machine specification called "V probability change" will be explained. "V probability change" is a "specific area P750"("Vzone","Varea", etc.) provided in the big winning opening P751 during the jackpot game before the game state shifts to the specific game state. ), when the passage of the game ball ("V winning") is detected under predetermined conditions (such as during the execution of a specific jackpot round), the probability variation function is activated after the jackpot game The game machine specifications of the pachinko game machine that performs control to shift to the specific game state (specific game state 1 or specific game state 3) are shown. Regarding the “specific region” used for “V probability variation”, it may be particularly referred to as “probability variation function operating region”.

As described above, "V probability variation" is a gaming machine specification that indicates whether or not the probability variation function is activated depends on the game result during the big hit game (depends on whether the game ball passes through the specific area P760). Yes, depending on whether the activated probability variation function ends with the same control as the previously described "probability variation until the next time" or ends with control equivalent to "ST" "V probability variation (V-loop) ” and “V-ST” are used to indicate game machine specifications.

In addition, in the pachinko game machine P that adopts "V probability change" as a game machine specification, if the V prize is not won during the jackpot game, the probability change function does not operate after the jackpot game, and the normal game state and the specific game It is controlled to state 1 (low probability/high base state). In addition, it is possible to switch whether or not the game state in which the probability variation function is activated after the big win game, depending on whether or not the V prize is won, and at the same time, it is possible to change the operation mode of the electric chew support function. As an example, in the "V probability variation (V-loop)" machine, if you win a V prize, the probability variation function and electric chew support function will continue until you win the next big hit, and if you do not win a V prize, the probability variation function will not operate. First, the electric chew support function is limited until the special symbol lottery is performed 100 times.

[small hit V]
Next, a description will be given of a game machine specification (spec) called "small win V" as a game machine specification capable of providing a game state advantageous to a player in terms of winning a big win without having a probability variation function.

"Small hit V" is a "specific area P760" (sometimes referred to as "V zone", "V area", etc.), the game machine specification that activates the accessory continuous operation device following the small winning game, that is, starts the big winning game. be. In other words, it is a game machine specification that allows a big win game to be obtained without obtaining a big win result as a result of a special symbol lottery by passing through the specific area P760 during a small win.

"Small win V" is a "type 1 (pachinko)" game that activates the continuous activation device and special electric accessories as a result of the special symbol lottery, and the special electric accessories while the continuous activation device is not in operation. It is a specification that activates the role continuous operation device when passing through the specific area P760 during operation (during the opening of the big winning hole P751), and is sometimes referred to as "1st class small win V", while the conventional pachinko game It is sometimes referred to as a "mixture of 1 type and 2 types" because it has playability similar to the specifications of so-called "2 types of pachinko" machines.

In general, a pachinko game machine that adopts "small hit V" as a game machine specification does not have a variable probability function (probability variable function), and changes the degree of advantage depending on the presence or absence of an electronic chew support function. That is, when the electric chew support function is activated, the winning opening related to the normal electric role product P770, which is likely to win a prize, becomes a change trigger for a special symbol (for example, winning a small win at 1/2) that makes it easy to win a small win. By constructing a starting winning port, it is easy to win a small win under the condition that an electric chewing support function is operating, and it is possible to aim for a big win by winning a V prize during a small winning game. By doing so, it is possible to increase the possibility of obtaining a big win by a small win instead of increasing the random value range of the big win like the variable probability function.

[Other game machine specifications (specs)]
The game machine specifications described above are typical ones, and since there are several other characteristic game machine specifications known, they will be briefly described below.

(limiter)
"Limiter" is a state in which a specific game state in which the probability variation function and the electric chew support function are activated occurs repeatedly with the execution of the jackpot game (so-called "Consecutive" state). Even if a jackpot game that should originally operate the probability variation function or the electric chew support function is executed when the set number of repetitions (number of consecutive games) is reached, the probability variation function or the electric chew support function It is a function that restricts the operation. As a limiter function, the function that limits the "probability fluctuation function" based on the number of consecutive times is called "probability variable limiter", and the function that limits the "electric chew support function" based on the number of consecutive times is called "time-saving limiter (electric support limiter)". call. A game machine having a limiter function is called a "limiter machine".

(Fall)
"Falling" is a game machine that executes a "falling lottery" that determines whether or not to end the probability variation function every time a special symbol lottery is performed during the period when the probability variation function of the special symbol lottery is operating. Show specifications. In the situation where the electric chew support function is operating along with the probability fluctuation function, if you win the fall lottery, the operation of the electric chew support function will end when the probability fluctuation function ends, or only the probability fluctuation function will end. However, the operation of the electric chew support function may continue.

In addition, it is possible to combine a plurality of game machine specifications described above. 1) Winning the fall lottery, (2) Performing a special symbol lottery for a predetermined number of times, (3) Acquiring the right to play a big hit, If either of these conditions is satisfied, the specific game state 2 (high probability/high base state) ends (shifts to another game state).

Next, the control of the main control board P40 governing the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine P, which is the premise, will be described. It should be noted that the pachinko game machine P, which is the premise of the description of the present embodiment, will be described on the premise of a pachinko game machine that adopts "ST (variable number of cuts)" as the game machine specifications (specs) described above. . In the description of the embodiment, the notation of "P-s ◯◯" indicating the processing step in the figure is described as "step ◯◯" in the text.

[Main control board power-on processing (main control board main loop processing)]
The main control board P40 of the premised pachinko game machine P first executes a power-on process (step 1000) when the power of the pachinko game machine P is turned on. Here, details of the power-on process will be described with reference to FIG.

When the power-on processing is started in the main control board P40 of the pachinko game machine P, which is the premise, the initial setting relating to the operation of the CPU, which is the arithmetic device provided on the main control board P40, is performed (step 1002). The initial setting is to appropriately perform settings necessary for subsequent operation of the CPU, and the details thereof will be omitted.

When the CPU initial setting is completed, input port confirmation processing (step 1004) and power failure information confirmation/checksum processing (step 1006) are executed. ).

More specifically, the input port confirmation process (step 1004) is a "set value ” can be changed, and the flag indicating whether or not the ``setting confirmation process'' for confirming the ``setting value'' is in the state of performing This is a process of generating information for determining whether or not to be established (whether to turn on) in the game stop state setting process to be performed later. In the premised pachinko game machine P, the frame open switch P131 (a switch that detects that the front frame is open with respect to the outer frame, may be called a door open switch, door open sensor, or frame open sensor. ), whether the ram clear switch P48 is being operated by the player, and whether the setting key switch P49 is being rotated is generated as 1-byte data.

In the subsequent power-off information confirmation/checksum processing (step 1006), the pachinko game machine P normally shuts down the power when the power was turned off last time, and the control data related to the game state when the power shut-off occurred normally. This is a process for confirming whether the data is normally saved and stored in the memory area of the CPU of the main control board P40. If the data is not normal, the game is stopped in the game stop state setting process (step 1008) described later as an error. This is the process of setting (turning on) a flag to stop.

In the "game stop state setting process" (step 1008), after the process in the power-on process is completed and the process shifts to the main loop process to start the game, a flag is set to prevent the player from actually playing the game. Based on the results of the input port confirmation process (step 1004) and the power failure information confirmation/checksum process (step 1006), the "setting change status", "setting confirmation status", and "unrecoverable status" are displayed. This is a process of setting a flag for shifting to any game progress disallowed state of "error state". Details of the "game stop state setting process" are described in FIG.

In the game stop state setting process, first, it is determined whether the frame is open based on the 1-byte data generated in the input port confirmation process (step 1004) (step 1100). If the front frame P2 of the pachinko game machine P is open to the outer frame P1 when the power is turned on (YES in step 1100), the specific bit of the 1-byte data is "1" Therefore, the subsequent processing of step 1102 is omitted. On the other hand, if the frame is not open when the power of the pachinko game machine is turned on, it is assumed that some of the essential operations for executing the setting change process are not satisfied, and the 1 generated in the input port confirmation process (step 1004). Operation information of the setting key switch is calculated from the byte data so that it becomes OFF data. Although not shown, whether the result in step 1102 is YES or NO, calculation is performed so that the frame open bit in the 1-byte data is also OFF data.

In the subsequent step 1104, it is determined whether or not the 1-byte data generated in the input port confirmation process (step 1004) is information that allows determination of "there is a setting change operation". In the premise pachinko game machine P, the situation where it is determined that "there is a setting change operation" is (1) the frame opening switch P131 is ON (the frame is being opened when the power is turned on), and (2) the setting key switch P49 is ON. and (3) the ram clear switch P48 is ON. As described above, among the 1-byte data, the information of the frame open switch P131 is set to OFF, and it is determined in this step whether both (2) and (3) are satisfied. For example, if two specific bit data are "1", it is determined that there is a setting change operation (the active data indicating that the two switches are on does not necessarily have to be "1"; One data may be "0"). Then, if it is determined that there has been a setting change operation, that is, if it is determined YES in step 1104, data indicating "setting being changed" is stored as a game stop state flag, and the game stop state setting process is terminated ( step 1106, step 1118). On the other hand, if NO is determined in step 1104 , the process proceeds to step 1108 . In addition, when the setting value information stored in the RAM (RAM=Random Access Memory) of the main control board P40 is abnormal data (in the case of recovery operation from an unrecoverable error state), as the initial setting value The data corresponding to the setting value "1" is set in the setting value storage area (step 1118).

Next, at step 1108, it is determined whether or not a game stop error has occurred. A game stop error is an error that requires RAM clearing and setting (change) processing of setting values when the game cannot proceed, such as checksum abnormality (RAM abnormality) or setting value abnormality. refers to The determination of step 1108 determines whether or not to set the game stop state based on the processing result of the power-off information confirmation/checksum processing (step 1006) and the error information stored during the previous power-off processing. . When it is determined that an error state should be established (when determined as YES in step 1108), the game stop state flag is set to "unrecoverable error state" and the game stop state setting process is terminated (steps 1110 and 1118). If it is determined that no error has occurred, the process proceeds to the subsequent step 1112 .

In the subsequent step 1112, it is determined whether or not the ram clear switch P48 has been operated. In the game stop state setting process, as a state when proceeding to the step,
(a) When an operation to shift to the setting confirmation state is being performed, in other words, in the determination of "there is a setting change operation", (1) the frame opening switch P131 is ON (frame is being opened when the power is turned on). , (2) the setting key switch P49 is ON, and (3) the ram clear switch P48 is ON, is not satisfied,
(a) when the ram clear operation for data clear is performed, in other words, (2) the setting key switch P49 is on, and (3) the ram clear switch P48 is on. when it is sufficient,
(c) When the power is turned on without performing any operations such as "setting change operation", "setting confirmation operation", "ram clear operation",
Either In these states, the 1-byte data generated in the input port confirmation process (step 1004) are: (a) bit data indicating ON/OFF of the setting key switch P49 is "1 (ON data)"; Either the bit data indicating ON/OFF of the operation detection state of P48 is "1 (ON data)" or (C) all 1-byte data is OFF data (for example, all bits "0").

Then, in step 1112, it is determined whether or not the ram clear switch P48 has been operated, and if there has been a ram clear operation (if YES is determined in step 1112), the pachinko gaming machine enters a game ready state after clearing the ram. In order to make the transition, a process of clearing the game stop state flag is performed (step 1114). On the other hand, except when the RAM clear operation is performed, the current 1-byte data is set as it is. If NO), the bit data indicating the operation status of the setting key switch P49 is "1", and the 1-byte data indicating the game stop state flag is stored as data indicating "setting confirmation" ( step 1118). Further, when there is neither a RAM clear operation nor an operation to shift to the setting confirmation state, the 1-byte data generated in the input port confirmation processing (step 1004) is originally data indicating that the game is not stopped as a game stop state flag. It is set as no-game-stop information.

Regarding the game stop state flag set in the "game stop state setting process" (step 1008), if a value indicating some stop state is stored, the main flag which is the game allowable state in the power-on process (step 1000) In the interrupt processing (step 2000) which is the main part of the game progress control executed after the transition to the loop (steps 1028 to 1036), the value indicating the stopped state is referred to, and the progress of the game described as "basic game progress" These controls will be described later in the description of interrupt processing.

Returning to the description of the power-on process in FIG. 7, the following process will be described. When the game stop state setting process (step 1008) ends, it is determined whether or not there is a RAM clear operation (step 1010). The ram clear operation is that the ram clear switch P48 is operated when the power of the pachinko game machine P is turned on. This processing is executed both when the setting key switch P49 is off and when it is on. If it is determined in step 1010 that the ram clear operation has been performed, a predetermined portion of the memory area of the ram of the main control board P40 is initialized.

In the subsequent processing from step 1014 to step 1020, a processing of setting an effect control command (effect command) for recognizing the state of the game machine from the main control board P40 to the effect control board P41 when the power is turned on is performed. More specifically, in step 1014, processing is performed to clear from the storage area the effect control commands that have not been transmitted when the power was cut off last time (when the power was cut off). Then, in step 1016, information about the current game state of the main control board P40 that has returned after power-on is generated as an effect control command. An effect control command indicating the played state is set in an area for storing the transmission data of the effect control command.

When the processing related to the setting of the effect control command at the time of power-on is completed, the necessary data (driving signal ) is output from the output port to the special electric accessory drive means P70 and the normal electric accessory drive means P71. (Step 1022)

Then, when the processing up to step 1022 in the power-on processing is completed, the CPU of the main control board P40 is processed to set the generation interval of the interrupt processing time (step 1024). In the premise pachinko game machine P, the interval at which interrupt processing ( FIG. 9 , step 2000 ) to be described later is executed is set to 4 ms (milliseconds). When this process ends, the game shifts to a cyclic process called a main loop in which the player is ready to play, and the cyclic process in the main loop is repeated until a power failure occurs.

(Main loop)
In the main loop processing of the main control board, as shown in FIG. 7, first, in step 1026, processing is performed to prohibit the occurrence of interrupt processing, and until the processing of the main loop is completed (interrupt is permitted in step 1036). (until) limit the execution of interrupt processing.

When the interrupt is disabled, in the following step 1028, a watchdog timer called a CPU for the main control board P40 runs out of control (such as a situation where the process loops and does not proceed) to monitor the occurrence. Clears (initializes) the area that stores the clock information.

Then, in step 1030, it is determined whether a power failure has occurred (for example, whether a power failure signal sent based on a voltage drop from the power supply board P44 is input to the input port of the CPU of the main control board P40). If a power failure occurs, the current game state is stored, power failure information and checksum information are stored, and power failure processing (step 1032) stops processing of the main control board P40 as a CPU. ). If power failure has not occurred, the process proceeds to the next step.

In step 1034, a process of updating the random number used for the special symbol lottery and the random number value used for the normal symbol lottery is performed. Some of these random values are updated in interrupt processing, which will be described later, and this is processing to prevent the random number update cycle from becoming constant due to random numbers being updated only in interrupt processing. If there are processes that are executed irregularly in the interrupt process, it is possible to prevent the random number update cycle from becoming constant by adopting a method such as updating the random number value according to those processes. Therefore, it is not essential to provide random number update processing in the main loop.

Step 1036 is the final processing in the main loop, and performs processing for enabling interrupts. Immediately after that, the process returns to step 1026, which is the first process in the main loop, to disable interrupts. If the CPU of the main control board P40 receives an input indicating the state of the state that the state has been set, an interrupt process, which will be described later, is executed.

[Interrupt processing]
Next, the interrupt processing (also called "timer interrupt processing") performed by the CPU of the main control board P40 will be described with reference to FIG. In the premised pachinko game machine P, most of the progress of the game is controlled by interrupt processing (step 2000), and the submodule program provided to be changeable according to the game machine specifications (spec) is universally fixed. are configured to be read out and controlled in the order of The processing for these submodules is briefly described below.

(clear watchdog timer)
At the beginning of interrupt processing, watchdog timer clear processing is provided. This process is the same as the watchdog timer clear process in the main loop process (FIG. 7, steps 1026 to 1036) executed by the CPU of the main control board P40. (Step 2002)

(Input port confirmation processing)
In the input port confirmation process, by confirming the information input to the input port of the CPU of the main control board P40, it is possible to identify whether or not there is input information as information necessary for judgment in subsequent processes. This is the process to generate. (Step 2004)

The information input to the input port includes an input signal indicating the operation status of the ram clear switch P48 and the setting key switch P49, and an input signal indicating the operation status (whether touched or not) of the handle P204. , An input signal indicating the game result by detecting a game ball such as a special figure 1 starter switch P712 and a large winning opening switch P752, a magnetic sensor P73, a door open sensor P131, a vibration detection sensor P72, etc. provided for fraud monitoring There is an input signal that indicates the detection status of the sensor.

In the input port confirmation process, the input signals of these input ports are read three times in 10 μs (microseconds), and the data that becomes the same data (same bit) in all readings is the input data ("level data") for this interrupt. ) in the RAM of the main control board P40. Of the data read three times, the data that was determined in the previous interrupt processing (interrupt processing 4 ms before) is adopted as the level data for the portion that is not the same data in all the readings. If the data cannot be read normally in the above, the data stored in the previous interrupt will not be updated.

Then, when the input data (level data) for this interrupt is determined, a comparison operation is performed with the input data for the previous interrupt to generate "rising data" (data specifying the bit where the input data changed from off to on), Stores data specifying the switch that has been switched to ON input by the interrupt this time.

(random number update process)
Random number update process is software This is a process of updating so-called soft random numbers, which are random numbers to be updated (step 2006). In the premised pachinko game machine P, the random numbers used for the special symbol lottery and the normal symbol lottery are those in which the random number generation circuit updates the random numbers at the update cycle on the circuit, and those which are updated at the software cycle. By combining them, it is configured to maintain the randomness of various random numbers when obtaining random numbers.

In the random number update process, as described above, the process of updating the soft random numbers is performed.
(a) A random number is updated by incrementing (+1) or decrementing (-1), and if the upper limit (or lower limit) of the random number range is exceeded, the lower limit (or upper limit) is set;
(b) Subtracting (or adding) an arbitrary prime number to a random number, and adding (or subtracting) the value of the random number range +1 (or random number range -1) when the random number range is exceeded,
(c) Repeatedly increment (or decrement) from the random number set as the initial value, and when one cycle of updating is completed, set the separately updated "initial random number" as the new initial value and perform the same update. Repeated ones (also called initial value updating random numbers),
Various update methods can be exemplified. It should be noted that the update method is not limited to the one exemplified in this embodiment, and any method may be adopted as long as the method can maintain the randomness of random numbers.

(Setting control processing)
The setting control process is performed when the game stop flag set during the power-on process (see FIG. 7) in the CPU of the main control board P40 is "setting changing" or "setting checking". (Step 2008)

In the setting control process, it is first determined whether the bit data indicating that the setting key operation of the data stored as the game stop flag during the power-on process is ON data. If the setting key has not been turned on when the power is turned on, this process is exited.

On the other hand, if the bit data indicating that the setting key is being operated in the game stop flag is ON data, the current interrupt Referring to the input information of the setting key switch P49 in the process (generated in the input port confirmation process described above), when the setting key switch P49 is turned off, the game stop flag is cleared and the game is enabled. An effect control command for returning (or starting) the effect to the effect control board is set depending on whether the return is from the "setting change state" or the "setting confirmation state".

Also, in the power-on process (see FIG. 7), if the game stop flag is "changing settings", the role of the "setting change switch" at this interrupt timing is played until the setting key switch P49 is turned off. Check the operating status of the ram clear switch P48 (switch operated to change the set value). When the game stop flag is "under change of setting", in this interrupt, when the rise data related to the operation of the setting change switch P48 is generated, the "set value" is changed to the next in the predetermined change order. Change the data so that it becomes the set value. For example, in the case of a pachinko game machine P having set value data such that the setting is switched in order from 1 to 6, every time there is start-up data based on the operation of the setting change switch (ram clear switch P48), the setting is set in this setting control process. Perform processing to increase the value by "1" (when the set value before the operation is 6, it is changed to 1 as the next value).

In the premise pachinko game machine P, by providing the processing in the setting change state and the setting confirmation state during the interrupt processing (see FIG. 9), the operation of the setting key switch and the setting change switch is monitored at the cycle of the interrupt processing. A program for periodic monitoring during the power-on process (see FIG. 7) that enables the output of display data to the display device by the LED output process described later, and the interrupt process cannot be set separately (see FIG. 7) can be omitted. Note that, during the power-on process, it may be configured to monitor switches related to setting changes and setting confirmation, control the display device, and update the set values.

(Game stop monitoring process)
In the game stop monitoring process, the CPU of the main control board reads the data of the game stop flag generated during the power-on process (see FIG. 7) executed when the power of the pachinko game machine is turned on, and determines whether the game is stopped. This is a process to confirm whether (Step 2010)

In the game stop monitoring process, if some game stop information (game stop flag) is stored in the read game stop flag data, for example, if the game stop flag data is not 0 but one of the bits is "1 ”, it is determined that the game is in a stopped state (a state in which the game needs to be stopped), and assuming that the game is stopped, part of the processing during the interrupt processing (“timer subtraction processing (step 2014)” in FIG. 9 to “special electric Accessory control process (step 2028)") are omitted.

In the premise pachinko gaming machine P, as a state in which the game needs to be stopped, that is, in a state in which the player cannot play the game, "setting changing", "setting checking", "unrecoverable error" is occurring" can be exemplified.

(Timer subtraction processing)
The timer subtraction process is a process of updating the timer data used for time management regarding the progress of the game (step 2014).

Examples of timer data update processing include management of the variable display time set when the variable display of special symbols is started, operation time of the special electric accessory P755 during the big hit game (open time of the big winning opening P751 ) and other timer data update processing triggered by game progress, timing processing for error determination such as detecting ball clogging, LED lighting pattern in main control display device P50 such as special symbol display devices P51 and P52 and a process for timing a period for outputting information from the external information output terminal P77 or the like to an external device (such as a hall computer).

The timer data to be updated by the timer update process is stored in the storage area (RAM storage area) of the main control board P40, divided by type of timer data such as "1-byte timer" and "2-byte timer", and stored continuously. Each is stored in a storage area.

In the timer update process, processes such as "1-byte timer update process" and "2-byte timer update process" are performed on the storage area that stores the types of individual timer data, and the time values of various timers are updated. I do. In the timer update process, the timer data stored in the storage area is decremented (-1). If the stored timer data is already "0", it will be processed to be "0" even after the processing (if it becomes a negative value, it will be set to "0", Do not decrement if "0", etc.).

In the premised pachinko game machine P, the cycle of one interrupt is 4 ms, so in the case of 1-byte timer data, only the managed object that ends in a maximum of 255 updates (about 1 second) is controlled. It is possible, but if there is no game information managed within one second (when there is little), it is possible to configure only with 2-byte timer data and without 1-byte timer update processing. is. Also, if it is necessary to manage a time value that cannot be managed with a 2-byte timer, it may be configured to have timer data that can manage a longer time than a "3-byte timer".

(Effective period setting process)
Validity period setting processing is a period for controlling the easy-to-enter mode or the difficult-to-enter mode for winning holes that can be changed to the easy-to-enter mode or the difficult-to-enter mode (mainly the big winning hole P751 and the winning hole related to the normal electric accessory P770). And, it is a process of setting the valid period in the valid extension period, and setting the invalid period for the other period (when the winning opening is in the difficult-to-enter state and the valid extension period is not valid). (Step 2016)

In the premise pachinko game machine, the winning of the second start winning opening P721, which is the second starting winning opening P720 provided with the large winning opening P751 as the big winning device and the normal electric accessory P770, is set as the valid period. It becomes the processing to do.

In addition, during the effective extension period, in order to treat the game ball entered at the timing just before the large winning opening P751 or the normal electric role P770 shifts to the difficult entry mode P755) and ordinary electric accessories such as P770 are treated as effective periods even after the control period for executing the opening control has passed. control period.

Further, depending on the specifications of the gaming machine, if the specific area P760 (V area) is provided, an effective extension period for the passage of the game ball with respect to the specific area P760 may be set. The validity period of the specific area is also set.

(Prize monitoring process)
The winning monitoring process determines whether or not the winning is valid based on the winning of game balls to various winning ports (large winning port P751, starting ports P711, P721, general winning port P731) in the pachinko game machine, It is a process of generating information that triggers the process of generating (occurrence of suspension) the right of special symbol lottery for balls and starting entrance balls. (Step 2018)

The contents of the processing are (a) detecting the presence or absence of a winning prize for each of the various winning ports in a predetermined order based on the data generated in the input port confirmation processing (step 2004); If there is a winning during the valid period, and if there is a valid winning for each winning slot, (c) an effect control command indicating winning information for each winning slot to be sent to the effect control board P41. setting, (d) updating a counter value (referred to as a "winning counter") for storing the number of occurrences of operation triggers based on winning for each winning opening (in other words, among operations based on detection of various winning openings); update a counter value that stores the number of unprocessed operations in ).

In addition, in the winning monitoring process, not only the occurrence of winnings to various winning holes, but also the out ball detection switch P792 provided for counting out balls, the operation hole switch P742 that triggers the normal symbol lottery, and the game machine Depending on the specification, it is also determined whether the game ball enters or passes through the specific area P760 (V area), and in addition to the occurrence of the prize ball and the occurrence of the special symbol lottery, the operation of the gaming machine (for example, In this process, presence or absence of detection of the game ball required for the process of transmitting information indicating that the operation port switch P742 or the specific area P760 has passed is performed with respect to the effect control board P41.

(Working opening monitoring process)
In the operation port monitoring process, when the start-up data of the normal pattern operation port switch P742 is generated from the data generated in the input port confirmation process (step 2004), processing related to the occurrence of suspension related to the normal symbol lottery is performed. conduct. (Step 2020)

More specifically, when the normal pattern operation port switch P742 is detected, the number of reservations related to the normal symbol lottery is confirmed, and if the number of reservations is less than the upper limit, a random number is stored as a new reservation. Because it is possible, after incrementing (+1) the data in the storage area that stores the number of reservations and increasing the number of reservations information by 1, the general pattern accuracy random number, the general pattern random number, and the general pattern fluctuation pattern random number Get it from the generator circuit or get the current corresponding soft random number and store it as pending.

(Normal symbol control process)
In the normal symbol control process, normal symbol lottery, normal symbol fluctuation display, and normal electric accessory P770 are processed (step 2022). These processes shift to different submodule processes depending on whether the data indicating the control state of the normal symbol called normal symbol status or the control state of the normal electric accessory is performed, and control is performed according to the state. As the status of the normal design, "0: Normal design waiting", "1: Normal design changing", "2: Normal design stop display", "3: Normal electric accessory in operation", "4: Normal "Demonstrating the end of electric accessories" is available, and processing is performed according to each state.

<<Normal symbol fluctuation start monitoring control process>>
The normal symbol fluctuation start monitoring control process is a sub-module process called from the normal symbol control process when the normal symbol status is "0: normal symbol standby".

In the normal symbol fluctuation start monitoring control process, first, it is confirmed whether or not the number of reservations related to the normal symbol lottery is "0". If it is "0", the right to change the normal symbol has not occurred, so the normal symbol control process is exited. On the other hand, if the number of reservations related to the normal symbol lottery is not "0", it means that the normal symbol fluctuation right has occurred, and it is determined that the normal symbol fluctuation start conditions are satisfied, and the normal symbol fluctuation is started. Execute the process related to start.

When it is determined to start the fluctuation of the normal pattern, after subtracting 1 from the holding number information from the area that stores the holding number information related to the normal pattern lottery, the general pattern success or failure random number, the general pattern random number, and the general pattern fluctuation pattern random number are respectively Call it and perform a general pattern lottery, a general pattern pattern lottery, and a general pattern variation pattern lottery, store the lottery results in the storage area of the main control board, clear the random number information used this time, and save the storage area for the pending number information. While performing a process of shifting so as to be processed in the stored order, the normal design status is updated to "1: during normal design fluctuation". Regarding the normal symbol lottery, different lottery tables are used according to the operation status of the above-mentioned "base state" (normal symbol probability variation function, normal symbol variation time reduction function), and it is easy to win in the high base state. , The variable display time of normal symbols tends to be determined to be short.

《Processing during normal symbol fluctuation》
The normal design changing process is a sub-module process called from the normal design control process when the normal design status is "1: normal design changing".

In the normal symbol fluctuation process, the normal symbol fluctuation display time corresponding to the normal symbol fluctuation pattern determined during the normal symbol fluctuation start monitoring control process elapses, that is, the timer that manages the normal symbol fluctuation display (normal Until the symbol variation display timer) becomes 0 in the timer update process, the normal symbol display device P53 is a process of executing variation display of normal symbols.

More specifically, when the normal symbol fluctuation display timer is not 0, every time this process is executed, the normal symbol display switching counter whose maximum value is "5" is updated, and the normal symbol display switching counter is " 5", a process of storing information on the next light emission pattern is performed in a storage area for storing data for designating the light emission pattern of the LEDs constituting the normal symbol display device P53. It should be noted that the normal map display switching counter is reset to the initial value of "0" at the timing when it reaches the maximum value of "5". That is, the variable display of the normal design is such that the lighting pattern of the normal design display device P53 is switched at intervals of 5 interrupts (4ms×5=20ms). In addition, the switching interval can be set as appropriate, for example, if the maximum value of the normal pattern display switching counter is set to 25, the display pattern of the normal pattern display device P53 is switched at intervals of once every 25 interrupts (once every 100 ms). be done.

When the normal pattern fluctuation display time ends, that is, when the normal pattern fluctuation display timer is "0", in this process, the display pattern of the normal pattern stop display pattern determined by the normal pattern lottery is displayed on the main control display device. The data for designating the LED lighting pattern indicating the stop display mode is stored in the storage area for storing the LED lighting pattern of the normal design display device P53 so as to be stopped and displayed on the normal design display device P53 in P50. Then, the normal symbol fixed time (time for displaying the stop display symbol) is stored in the normal symbol stop display timer, and the normal symbol status is updated to "2: during normal symbol stop display".

<<Normal symbol stop display process>>
The normal symbol stop display process is a sub-module process called from the normal symbol control process when the normal symbol status is "2: normal symbol stop display".

In the normal symbol stop display process, it is confirmed whether the value of the normal symbol stop display timer, in which the symbol fixed time is set at the end of the normal symbol fluctuation process, is "0", and at the timing when it becomes "0" Then, a setting process for moving to the next game operation is performed.

When the normal pattern stop display timer becomes "0", if the result of this normal pattern lottery is "hit", according to the winning pattern and the operating state of the base state (normal electric accessory extension function) , Call the operation pattern of the normal electric accessory P770, set the operation pattern, clear the winning counter related to the normal electric accessory P770, etc., and set the normal symbol status to "3: Normal electric accessory in operation ”.

On the other hand, when the normal symbol stop display timer becomes "0", if the result of this normal symbol lottery is "lost", the normal symbol status is updated to "0: normal symbol waiting". I do.

《Processing during operation of ordinary electric accessories》
The normal electric auditors product operating process is a submodule process that is called from the normal symbol control process when the normal symbol status is "3: normal electric auditors product in operation".

In the normal electric accessory operating process, based on the operation pattern of the normal electric accessory P770 set in the normal symbol stop display process, the opening operation (change to easy entry mode) and closing operation of the normal electric accessory (change to difficult-to-ball mode) and monitor the establishment of the operation end condition of the normal electric accessory. The end of the operation of the normal electric accessory P770 is (a) when the specified number of normal electric accessories winning set as the end condition of the normal electric accessory occurs, (b) the operation of the preset operation pattern ends This is the case (when the opening operation period of the normal electric accessories has ended).

When the condition for ending the operation of the normal electric accessory is established, the timer area for storing the effective extension period of the normal electric accessory is used to measure the extended period of a certain time predetermined corresponding to the structure of the ordinary electric accessory P770. set the time. Then, the time value related to the normal electric accessory operation end demonstration is set to the normal electric accessory operation end demo timer, and the normal symbol status is set to "4: Normal electric accessory end demonstration in progress".

《Demonstration process for ending operation of ordinary electric accessories》
The normal electric auditors product operation end demonstration process is a submodule process called from the normal symbol control process when the normal symbol status is "4: normal electric auditors product end demonstration".

In the normal electric accessory operation end demonstration process, wait until the normal electric accessory operation end demo timer set in the normal electric accessory operation process becomes "0", and the normal electric accessory operation end demo timer becomes "0" When it becomes, the process of updating the normal symbol status to "0: normal symbol standby" is performed.

(Starting door monitoring process)
Starting port monitoring processing, from the data generated in the input port confirmation processing (step 2004), when the rising data of the special figure 1 starting opening switch P712 and the special figure 2 starting opening switch P722 are generated, a special symbol lottery Perform processing related to the occurrence of the hold related to. (Step 2024)

More specifically, when the special figure 1 starter switch P712 and the special figure 2 starter switch P722 are detected, check the number of reservations related to the special symbol lottery, and if the number of reservations is less than the upper limit , because it is possible to store a random number as a new hold, after incrementing (+1) the data in the storage area storing the hold number and increasing the hold number information by 1, the success or failure random number, pattern random number, variation pattern A random number is obtained from the random number generator or the current corresponding soft random number is obtained and stored as pending.

It should be noted that, in the pachinko gaming machine P, as a premise, there are two types of special symbols, a first special symbol (sometimes referred to as special figure 1) and a second special symbol (sometimes referred to as special figure 2). Since the symbols are provided, for each starting port provided on the game board P5, the holding number of the corresponding special symbol and the data of the starting port switch are called, and the pending number is added and the random number is acquired for each starting port. is processed.

In addition, when the starting opening to be processed is composed of the starting opening (electric chew) related to the normal electric accessory, the starting opening winning related to the normal electric accessory P770 is valid in the valid period setting process described above. After judging whether or not it is performed within the period, if it is within the effective period, the above-described processing is performed.

In addition, when storing random numbers, pattern random numbers, and variation pattern random numbers, the acquired random number information is used in advance by using the advance notice judgment value table, and the content of the variation when the variation based on the various random numbers to be withheld is executed in advance. Information that can be guessed is generated, and notified as an effect control command to the effect control board P41 (referred to as "pre-determination command", "pre-determination information", and "pre-reading determination command"). Pre-judgment commands are generated for each of the win/fail random numbers, pattern random numbers, and variation pattern random numbers, and when transmitted to the effect control board P41, the effect control board P41 uses the lottery related to the execution of the "prefetch effect" described later. be done.

(Special symbol control processing)
The special symbol control process (step 2026) includes state information for managing special symbols called special symbol status (also referred to as "special symbol status") and special electric accessory status (also referred to as "special electric game status"). Depending on the state information for managing the operating state of the called special electric accessory, any of the special symbol variation start management (special symbol variation start monitoring control process), special symbol variation process, and special symbol stop symbol display process or

The special symbol status includes "0: waiting for special symbol fluctuation", "1: special symbol fluctuating", "2: lost symbol stopped display", "3: big hit symbol stopped displayed", "4: small hit The status of the special electric role product is "0: Waiting for winning", "1: Special electric role product in operation", "2: Closed big prize opening", "3 : Big win end demonstration in progress", "4: Small win special electric power in operation", "5: Small win closed", and "6: Small win end demonstration in progress". It should be noted that depending on the specifications of the gaming machine, there may be cases where no small win is provided, and in that case, there is no status data related to the small win. Control based on these statuses will be described later.

The special symbol control process is performed based on a predetermined order (priority order) when there are a plurality of special symbols. As a predetermined order, the second special symbol is preferentially controlled, and in the situation where both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are held, the second special symbol is changed first. The game machine specification processed so as to be started (the second special symbol preferentially fluctuates) is called "second special symbol (special figure 2) priority digestion control", and the implementation of the pachinko game machine P as a premise In the description related to the form, the processing related to this type will be illustrated and described.

In the special symbol control process, first, the second special symbol is controlled. When the control of the second special symbol is started, the information of the special symbol status of the first special symbol and the special electric accessary product status is referred to first. If the special electric role product status is data indicating that the big win game or the small win game is in progress (when the special electric role product status is other than "0: waiting for winning"), the first special symbol is fluctuating. If the special symbol status of the special symbol is other than "0: waiting for special symbol variation", the process is completed without performing the process.

When the situation is such that the control of the second special symbol is executed, a process of updating the timer value of the control related to the second special symbol is executed. The timer is updated by decrementing (-1) the data in the storage area storing the timer, and if the result of the decrement is a negative value, "0" is set. Then, when the update of the timer ends, based on the special symbol status corresponding to the special symbol 2, a sub-module process, which will be described later, is called and executed. Although it has a timer subtraction process even during the interrupt process, the timer data updated by the special symbol control process is not included in the timer updated by the timer subtraction process, and in the special symbol control process It manages timer data for control related to special symbols.

<<Special symbol fluctuation start monitoring control process>>
The special symbol variation start monitoring control process is a sub-module process that shifts when the special symbol status is "0: waiting for special symbol variation".

In the special symbol variation start monitoring control process, it is confirmed whether or not the special symbol being processed as a target is reserved, and if there is no reservation, the process is finished, and if there is a reservation, the subsequent process is executed. The subsequent process is a special symbol lottery that is performed when the fluctuation is started. In the special symbol lottery, first, the data stored as set values are read and inspected to determine whether or not the set value information is appropriate. If the set value is appropriate, the data in the area storing each flag indicating the game state etc. is referred to, and the appropriate lottery table is selected. After being stored in the storage area, the special symbol status is updated to "1: during special symbol fluctuation". In addition, the content determined by the special symbol lottery is transmitted to the performance control board P41 as a performance control command (win/fail command, symbol command, variation pattern command), and the content of the variable performance executed in accordance with the variable display of the special symbol. is used as information for determination processing (lottery processing). The details of the special symbol lottery will be described later.

《Processing during special symbol fluctuation》
The special symbol fluctuating process is a sub-module process that shifts when the special symbol status is "1: special symbol fluctuating".

In the special symbol variation process, the timer for managing the variation display time of the special symbol is monitored until the variation time of the special symbol determined by the variation pattern lottery passes, and until the remaining variation time becomes "0", every interruption. With the special symbol display switching timer (maximum value "24") to be updated, the special symbol display device (second special symbol display device P52 (at the time of control of special symbol 1) to show the variable display of the special symbol every 25 interrupts performs switching processing of the lighting display pattern of the first special symbol display device P51)).

When the remaining variable display time of the special symbols becomes "0", it indicates that the variable display of the special symbols has been executed once for an external device (data counter, hall computer, etc.) connected to the pachinko game machine P. Setting of information for outputting an external signal, processing of setting a symbol fixation time for fixed display of a special symbol stop display pattern, and stop display indicating a stop display pattern determined as a result of a win-or-fail lottery and a pattern lottery. Setting of lighting pattern data for displaying the pattern on the special pattern display device P52 (P51) is performed. Then, the special symbol status is set to any one of ``2: Losing symbols are stopped and displayed'', ``3: Big win symbols are stopped and displayed'', and ``4: Small win symbols are stopped and displayed'' according to the result of the lottery.

<<Process during special symbol missing symbol stop display>>
The special symbol lost symbol stop display process is a process that shifts when the special symbol status is "2: during lost symbol stop display".

In the special symbol lost symbol stop display process, it is checked whether the value of the timer for managing the symbol fixing time set in the special symbol fluctuation process has become "0", and if it becomes "0", it becomes a processing target. Update the special symbol status of the special symbol that is currently running to "0: special symbol variation standby", and the remaining game count of the game state (probability variation function, electric chew support function, variation time reduction function) related to the special symbol lottery As well as updating, it confirms whether the end condition is satisfied, and when the game state transition condition is satisfied, it performs control (flag off, etc.) related to the transition of the game state.

<<Processing during special symbol jackpot symbol stop display>>
The special symbol big-hit symbol stop display process is a process that shifts when the special symbol status is "3: big-hit symbol stop display".

In the special symbol big hit symbol stop display processing, it is checked whether the value of the timer managing the symbol fixing time set in the special symbol fluctuation processing has become "0", and if it becomes "0", it becomes a processing target. While updating the special symbol status of the special symbol that is being played to "0: special symbol variation standby", the special electric role product status is updated to "2: large winning opening closed". Furthermore, in order to end the game state (probability fluctuation function, electric chew support function, fluctuation time reduction function) related to the special symbol lottery, the processing of clearing the remaining number of times information storage area and the operation flag storage area is executed. Then, in order to execute a jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot pattern, the information in various storage areas used as data during the previous jackpot game is initialized from the jackpot pattern information, and the special electric role product P755 is controlled during the jackpot game. Set content data.

In the special symbol big hit symbol stop display process, further, a process of transmitting an effect control command for executing a big win game effect (big hit start demo effect) to the effect control board P41 is executed. Along with these processes, a right-handed indicator P56, which is one of the constituent elements of the main control display device P50, indicates a game state in which a right-handed game in which a game ball is shot aiming at the right side of the game area is recommended. Setting of the lighting pattern data for lighting the LED which is lit at times is also performed.

<<Process during special symbol small hit symbol stop display>>
The special symbol small-hit symbol stop display process is a process that shifts when the special symbol status is "4: during small-hit design stop display".

As in the special symbol big hit symbol stop display process, the special symbol big hit symbol stop display process is performed with the end of the symbol fixing time, setting data related to the operation of the special electric accessory P755, and turning on the right hand indicator light P56. Such setting processing is performed. In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine P of the underlying technology, when a small winning game is executed (stop display of small winning symbols), unlike when the big winning symbols are stopped, the game state related to the special symbol lottery (high probability state or High base state) does not have processing to end, and the game state is determined based on the determination result of whether or not the end condition is satisfied for each game state, similar to the processing of the special symbol lost symbol stop display process. Control. In addition, in accordance with these processes, the special electric role product status is updated to "5: Closed for small prizes". Depending on the specifications of the game machine, as a modified example, when a small winning game is executed, the specification is designed to have a process for forcibly ending the game state (high probability state or high base state) in the same way as when the big winning pattern is stopped. is also possible.

When any one of the sub-module processes described above is selectively executed, the process of the first special symbol is performed following the process of the second special symbol. Regarding the processing of the first special symbol, only the information to be referred to is different from the processing of the second special symbol (for example, regarding whether or not the fluctuation can be started, the special symbol status of the second special symbol is not the special symbol status of the first special symbol. , etc.), the description is omitted because almost the same processing is repeated.

《Entrance order digestion control, parallel control》
In addition, in the explanation of the special symbol control process described above, the explanation was based on the process related to the "second special symbol priority digestion control", but in the case of adopting a game machine specification different from the pachinko game machine on which this assumption is made. Alternatively, it is possible to proceed with the special symbol control process in a different process. A brief description of typical examples will be given below.

"Entering ball order digestion control" is a game machine specification in which the reservation information corresponding to each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is processed one by one in the order of occurrence. While one pattern is fluctuating, the other is not displayed, and in a certain game state, both the reserved ball corresponding to the first special pattern and the reserved ball corresponding to the second special pattern are generated. It is a specification that is often adopted when it is expected.

"Parallel control (parallel digestion)" is different from the above-mentioned "second special symbol preferential digestion control" and "entering order digestion", and at the same time both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are variably displayed at the same time. It is a type of game machine specification that can be used. Since two symbols can be digested at the same time, it is possible to increase the number of special symbol lotteries per unit time. In addition, when the special electric accessory P755 is activated along with the stop display of one special symbol (when a big hit or a small hit is executed), the other symbol is forcibly lost and the symbol is stopped, or the variable display is performed. A specification that suspends the subtraction of the remaining time is appropriately adopted. As an example, when one special symbol becomes a big hit, the other special symbol is forcibly removed and stopped and displayed, and when one special symbol becomes a big hit or a small hit, the other special symbol is displayed. It is possible to adopt a specification that temporarily suspends the variable display of special symbols.

(Special electric accessory control processing)
The special electric role product control process executes submodule processing related to the operation of the special electric role product P755 according to the data content (value) of the special electric role product status (sometimes referred to as the special electric role product status). This is the process of managing the operation of the object (step 2028). In other words, when executing the big winning game or the small winning game, each state in the big winning game or the small winning game state is controlled, and the opening and closing of the big winning opening P751 is controlled.

As described above, the special electric role product status includes "0: Waiting for winning", "1: Special electric role item in operation", "2: Closed big prize opening", and "3: Demonstrating the end of big win". , ``4: small winning special electric is in operation'', ``5: small winning closed'', and ``6: small winning ending demonstration in progress''.

Among these special electric role product statuses, if the status is "0: Waiting for winning", it is because the player has not yet acquired the right to execute the big winning game or the small winning game by playing the game. , The special electric accessary product control process ends without performing the process.

Then, when the special electric role product status is other than "0: Waiting for winning", one of the processes described later is executed according to the status.

<<Process during operation of special electric accessories>>
Special electric auditors product in operation process is a process that is executed when the special electric auditors product status is "1: special electric auditors product in operation" or "4: small hit special electric in operation". This process is a process in a state in which a so-called round game (unit game) is being executed in a special game (a state in which the opening of the big winning opening P751 can be controlled).

In the special electric accessary product in operation process, first, a process of determining whether or not the end condition of the round game (unit game) is satisfied is performed. The conditions for ending the round game are (a) whether the specified number of winnings (also called "count") corresponding to the activated special electric accessory has been performed, or (b) the operation pattern of the special electric accessory to be executed. It is determined that the opening time (opening pattern) set as has ended or has ended when either of the following is satisfied. If these conditions are not satisfied, the special electric accessary product control process in this interrupt process is terminated without performing subsequent processes. In addition, among the operation patterns (opening patterns) of the special electric accessory P755, there is a pattern that opens and closes the big winning opening P751 multiple times, and when these patterns are executed, one round While the timer used for the determination of (a) becomes "0" multiple times during the game, after confirming whether or not there is next operation data during one round game, condition (c) " If it is determined that there is no next operation pattern data in the current unit game, it is determined that the above (b) is satisfied.

On the other hand, if either of the round game end conditions (a) or (b) is satisfied, as a subsequent process, the closing time of the big winning opening is stored in the closing time management timer of the special electric accessory. , the special electric role product status is incremented to be "2: Closed big prize opening". Then, the command data for notifying that the round game has ended is set as the effect control command to the effect control board P41, and the process ends.

《Processing while the big winning mouth is closed》
The large winning opening closing process is a process that is executed when the special electric role product status is "2: large winning opening closed" or "5: small prize closed". This process is a process in a state of being controlled "between rounds" between so-called round games in a special game, and before the start of the first round at the start of a big win game or a small win game When the state is controlled by the state of "big win start demonstration (period)" or "minor win start demonstration (period)", or after the round game of the final round is completed, the process during the winning end demonstration, which will be described later, is executed. This is a process related to the state of being controlled during the waiting period until it becomes possible.

In the big winning opening closing process, first, it is determined whether or not the big winning opening closing time set in the special electric accessory operating process has passed, and the closing time management timer is not "0", that is, the closing time If has not elapsed, the special electric accessary product control processing in this interruption is terminated.

When the closing time of the big winning opening has passed, whether the operation (round game) of the special electric role product P755 whose operation has ended first was the final round game in the current winning game (big winning game, small winning game). It is determined whether or not, and different processing is executed at the end of the final round game and at the end of the round game other than the final round (or at the time of winning start demonstration). In addition, to determine whether or not it was the final round game, the cumulative data of the number of times of operation of the special electric auditors P755 operated during this winning game is the maximum number of times of operation of the special electric auditors P755 in this winning game , and the accumulated data of the number of operations of the special electric accessory P755 is "0" at the time of the winning start demonstration.

When it is determined that the final round game is finished in the processing during closing of the big winning opening, the execution pattern of the winning end demonstration according to the type of winning (the type of special symbol that started the big winning or small winning). (mainly winning end demonstration time data) is read and set. Then, the special electric accessory status is incremented to set to ``3: big win end demonstration in progress'' or ``small win end demonstration in progress'', and a performance command for executing the winning end demonstration performance is set in the performance control board P41. to do Furthermore, in order to set the effective extension period of the big winning opening P751, the time value data determined as the effective extending period is stored in the timer that manages the effective extending period of the big winning opening P751, and the process ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined that it is the end of a game other than the final round game (or at the time of a winning start demonstration) in the process during closing of the big winning opening, the effect control command for the effect control board P41 is issued to the effect control board P41. Information that makes it possible to identify whether there is (N round start demo command * N is an integer) and recommended firing position during winning game Sends information to instruct (right-handed command).

Then, the special electric role product status is decremented and updated to ``1: special electric role product in operation'' or ``4: small winning special electric role in operation'', and the number of winning game balls to the big winning opening P751 during the round game. Initialize the data in the data area for counting. Then, the operation pattern data of the big winning opening P751 (special electric accessory P755) in the round game is set as the time value related to the first opening of the big winning opening P751 during the round game (or closing immediately after the start of the round game). and increment the data in the storage area regarding the cumulative number of operations of the special electric accessory P755.

(Prize ball control processing)
The prize ball control process is a process for giving a game ball as a prize ball to the player in response to winning of a game ball in a prize winning hole arranged on the game board P5. The processing contents are configured to execute the following three sub-module processes. (Step 2030)

<<Payment data reception monitoring process>>
The payout data reception monitoring process is a process of confirming the presence or absence of a control command related to execution of prize ball payout transmitted from the payout control board P43 to the main control board P40, and receiving (storing) the transmitted command. . The main control board P0 stores the information transmitted from the payout control board P43 in two registers (storage areas). Register 1 is called a status register, and stores information for determining whether or not there is information transmitted from the payout control board P43 and whether or not the transmitted information has been transmitted normally. It is The other register is called a data register, and stores control content information regarding payout control transmitted from the payout control board P43. If the status register is abnormal, the data in the data register is stored as payout control information. store in the area.

<<Payment command request processing>>
In the payout command requesting process, winning counter data for each winning opening storing data on the number of winnings of various winning openings stored in the winning monitoring process (step 2018) is confirmed to confirm whether or not there is an unpaid winning. In the confirmation process, each winning hole is confirmed in a predetermined order, and if it is determined that the winning counter data for one winning hole is not "0", the number of winning balls of the corresponding winning hole , a process of transmitting a control command for executing the payout of game balls to the payout control board P43. By this process, even if the winning counter data for a plurality of winning holes is not "0", the number of payout control commands transmitted to the payout control board P43 in one interrupt is limited to one.

<<Payout command control process>>
In the payout command control process, it is checked whether or not the payout control board P43 has normally received the information regarding the number of payouts. It will happen. Until the command reception status is determined in the payout command control process (it is determined whether the command has been received normally or an error has occurred), the next payout control command transmission in the payout command request process is performed by the payout command request process. And it is temporarily interrupted by the flag data set to ON/OFF respectively in the payout command control process.

(abnormality detection processing)
The anomaly detection process is a process for confirming whether or not an anomaly has occurred based on information from a sensor provided for fraud detection in the premise pachinko game machine P. FIG. (Step 2032)

More specifically, regarding the input of the sensors such as the vibration sensor P72, the magnetic sensor P73, the radio wave detection sensor P74, and the frame opening sensor P131, the occurrence of an abnormality is detected based on the input information generated in the input port confirmation process (step 2004). This is the process of determining whether or not the In addition to the various sensors, the sensor also detects unplugged harnesses for electrical connection, short circuits on wiring, and the like.

Then, when there is abnormal data for any of the determination information, after storing the corresponding error flag to be turned on, a command for notifying the error information is set as the effect control command for the effect control board P41. do.

(Sensor detection judgment processing)
In the sensor detection determination process, the period during which sensor or switch detection was continuously performed is determined from the sensor or switch detection data (level data) generated in the input port confirmation process (step 2004), and the process is performed. This is processing for establishing a flag. (Step 2034)

In the sensor detection determination process, when the level data of the target sensor and switch detection data information is ON, the data for counting the continuous ON input period of the corresponding switch is incremented and updated, and various processes are executed. It is determined whether or not a start condition is satisfied, and if the condition is satisfied, a process corresponding to the switch to be monitored is executed. When the monitored switch is no longer ON data, the data counting the continuous input period is initialized (updated to "0").

For example, if the winning hole detection switch provided in the winning hole continuously detects that the switch is in the ON state, it is determined that the ball is clogged, and the error state is controlled and produced. Processing of setting command information for performing error notification to the effect control board P41 as a control command, and generation and output request of signal data for notifying the occurrence of an error to an external device (hall computer, etc.).

Switches to be detected in this process include a touch sensor switch provided on the steering wheel P204 and a switch for fraud detection. It also targets sensors that require on-data input for a certain period of time.

(Game state display processing)
The game state display process is a process of generating lighting data for displaying information about the progress of the game on the main control display device P50. Although the name is display processing, output of display contents to the main control display device P50 is performed not by this processing but by LED output processing described later. (Step 2036)

In the premised pachinko game machine P, as an example, an error indicator light (status indicator light P55) indicating that it is in an error state, a special symbol hold indicator light (special figure 1 hold indicator light) that displays the number of reservations related to the special symbol lottery P61, special figure 2 reservation indicator light P62), normal design reservation indicator light P63 that displays the number of reservations related to the normal design lottery, etc. are generated, and the lighting data (lighting pattern) is generated and output in the LED output process. Store.

In addition, in the game state display process, when blinking display is required for the LED indicator lights whose lighting is controlled, the lighting pattern switching process is performed by updating the display switching counter for the corresponding LED and comparing the counter value with the threshold value. done. For example, in the pachinko gaming machine P, which is the premise, the number of pending special symbol lotteries can be held up to four, but two LED indicator lights constitute a special symbol holding indicator light (special figure 1 pending indicator light P61 , Two LEDs are provided for each of the special figure 2 pending indicator lights P62), so if there are 3 or more pending numbers, at least 1 LED is not a continuous lighting display, but a blinking display. It is designed to do so.

(output port output processing)
The output port output process is a process of setting to transmit a signal related to a game operation to an electric accessory, which is an operation device on the game board P5 connected to the main control board P40, or to the payout control board P43. (Step 2038)

More specifically, during normal symbol control processing or during special electric auditors control processing, when the operation pattern of normal electric auditors or special electric auditors is set, by processing during output port output processing, normal electric Signal data for opening (or closing) each electric accessory is output to the accessory drive means P71 and the special electric accessory drive means P72 (solenoids in the pachinko game machine).

Also, to the payout control board P43, a control signal (shooting permission signal) for permitting or prohibiting the shooting of the game ball based on the player's handle operation is generated by the output port output process and output. The output content of the launch permission signal is set according to the state of communication with the payout control board P43 and the occurrence of an error that requires the game to be stopped.

(Production control command transmission process)
The performance control command transmission process is a process of outputting a performance control command to the performance control board P41. It is a specification for transmission (step 2040). Regarding the setting of the effect control command to be transmitted, it is set (set) in a predetermined storage area as an untransmitted effect control command during other processing.

In the premised pachinko game machine P, a storage area called a ring buffer, which cyclically refers to a storage destination, is used as an area for storing unsent effect control commands. In the storage area called the ring buffer, in the next process called "write pointer" and "read pointer", which are updated by each process of writing (setting) the effect control command and reading (sending) the effect control command It is a specification to execute writing and reading of the effect control command using information for calculating the address of the storage area where the command is written and the address of the storage area where the command is read.

Further, in the pachinko game machine P, the structure of the effect control command is composed of two data, MODE data indicating the type of the command and EVENT data indicating the contents of the command.

Returning to the description of the specific processing contents of the effect control command transmission processing, the description will be given. In the performance control command transmission process, first, it is confirmed whether or not the information of the write pointer and the read pointer match, and if they match, it is determined that there is no performance control command to be transmitted, and the processing ends. On the other hand, when the data of the write pointer and the read pointer do not match, it is determined that there is an effect control command to be transmitted, and the process proceeds to the next step.

When it is determined that there is a performance control command to be sent, MODE data and EVENT data are called from the address of the storage area of the main control board P40 calculated from the data of the read pointer, and temporarily stored in the register in the CPU of the main control board P40. After storing and clearing the effect control command in the read destination ring buffer, the value of the read pointer is updated to the value used in the next process.

As effect control commands, MODE data and EVENT data stored in the register of the main control board P40 are transmitted P41 to the effect control board in order. First, the MODE data is set to the effect command output port which is an output port for transmitting the effect control command to the effect control board P41, and the strobe signal for causing the effect control board P41 to perform the reading operation is output. The main control board P40 will subsequently output the EVENT data, but in order to secure a sufficient period until the effect control board P41 receives the MODE data, after performing processing with a waiting time of 26 μs, the MODE data As in the case of transmission, setting of the EVENT data to the output port and output of the strobe signal are performed. When the strobe signal is confirmed, the performance control board P41 generates a performance control command reception interrupt and receives the performance control command transmitted from the main control board P40.

(external information output processing)
In the external information output process, the external information output terminal 77 outputs, as a signal, information related to the game status and information related to security such as the occurrence of an error to an external device (data counter or hall computer) connected to the premised pachinko game machine P. (Step 2042). The signal output from the external information output terminal 77 is output based on the data set to the output port of the main control board P40, and when a signal output trigger occurs, it transmits a pulse signal that is ON potential for a certain period. Others continue to output an on-potential until a condition for terminating signal output is satisfied.

In the external information output process, first, a signal regarding the game state is generated. As a signal related to the game state, in order to be able to identify the type of the specific game state, in the premise pachinko game machine P, the operating state (probability state) of the probability variation function and the operating state (base state) of the electric chew support function By referring to the corresponding information and the information indicating that the special game is in progress (big win or small win), when each game state is controlled, the external output data is transmitted so that the corresponding data is transmitted. Update. Note that depending on the specifications of the game machine, the output signal is generated based on information indicating whether or not there is a variable time reduction function, or information indicating that a particular type of jackpot is being won. There may be cases.

As an output signal output in the external information output process, not only a signal relating to the game state but also information based on the occurrence of a predetermined game result is output. For example, the variable display of the special pattern is executed, a signal (also referred to as a "fixed pattern signal") that is transmitted each time it is displayed stopped, and the starting port switch (special 1 starting port switch P712, special 2 starting port switch 722) or the big winning opening switch P752, or every time a game ball is detected entering each winning opening, or the payout of winning balls based on the winning balls reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10). Each time, data is set in the external output data, and there is a signal that is transmitted to the external device. These signals are mainly composed of pulse signals, and a signal of 1 is transmitted as a pulse signal with a continuous ON potential of 128 ms. After the output of the pulse signal is finished, the pulse signal is output again after outputting an off-potential for a certain period of time.

In the external signal output process, the data in the storage area storing the error flag as a result of the confirmation in the abnormality detection process (step 2032) and comparison data for confirming whether or not an error requiring security notification has occurred. are calculated and compared, and if it is determined that a security signal needs to be output, the output data to be set to the output port is updated so as to turn on the bit corresponding to the security signal in the external output data.

(LED output processing)
The LED output process is a process for outputting data indicating a lighting pattern to a plurality of LEDs constituting the main control display device P50, causing the LEDs to emit light, and displaying the game progress and game status. (Step 2044)

The LEDs that make up the main control display device P50 are the first special symbol display device P51 (8 LEDs), the second special symbol display device P52 (8 LEDs), the first special symbol holding indicator light P61 (2 LEDs), the second Special symbol holding indicator P62 (2 LEDs), normal symbol display device P53 (2 LEDs), normal symbol holding indicator P63 (2 LEDs), round indicator P54, status indicator P55, right-handed indicator (total It has a total of 32 LED display units (8 LEDs).

In addition, the state indicator light P55 is a collective representation of the indicator lights related to a plurality of game states, and in detail, the special figure probability variation indicator light indicating whether or not the probability variation function is operating, and the operation of the normal symbol probability variation function It refers to indicator lights such as the normal map probability indicator light that indicates the presence or absence (whether or not the electric chew support function is activated), and the error indicator light that indicates the error state.

In the LED output process, 1 byte of the lighting data for the display section of the main control display device is set to the output port for each interrupt processing to light the main control display device P50, and is updated for each interrupt processing. LEDs of the main control display device P50 to be lit by this interruption are selected based on the value of the digit counter, lighting pattern data corresponding to the gaming situation is selected, and set as display data to control the lighting of each LED. It's like

That is, in the premised pachinko game machine P, the main control display device P50 is used for 32 LEDs, and the main control display device P50 is controlled by a dynamic lighting method that sequentially outputs lighting data using at least four interrupt processes. controlling.

In addition, in the LED output process, in addition to the LED display to be visually recognized by the player as the main control display device P50, lighting control is performed only when the game stop flag is in a setting change state, a setting confirmation state, or an unrecoverable error state. It also controls the lighting of the LED display.

Incidentally, in the pachinko game machine P on which the assumption is made, if the game stop flag stores a flag indicating some kind of game stop state, the setting of the lighting pattern data for the main control display device P50 is omitted. , during setting change, during setting confirmation, and during an unrecoverable error, the LEDs constituting the main control display device are all extinguished. As a modification, when the game stop flag is set, light emission may be displayed using a fixed lighting pattern set for each state. For example, the main control display device P50 may be configured to light up all the LEDs constituting the .

(Outside area control processing)
Out-of-area control processing includes test signal output processing for outputting signals used for testing pachinko gaming machines (processing for outputting signals used for testing pachinko gaming machines) and performance display device display. It is configured by a process for controlling (step 2046). The meaning of "outside the area" is that it is a process executed by a program in a storage area that is not included in the calculation of the capacity of the program storage area stipulated by the pachinko game machine rules.

In the test signal output process, a process of setting information relating to the game result and game state to the output port from the test terminal P78 of the pachinko game machine P to an external test device is performed. In the performance display process, the game state is confirmed, the number of out balls and the ratio (base) of the number of out balls and the number of prize balls are calculated, updated as display data, and displayed on the performance display device P59. This is the process of outputting.

[Special design lottery]
Next, the special symbol lottery executed by the CPU of the main control board P40 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 10 to 14. FIG. The "special symbol lottery" is mainly composed of "win/fail lottery", "hit symbol lottery", and "fluctuation pattern lottery".

(Lottery drawing)
The "win or fail lottery" is a lottery that determines whether or not the special electric accessory P755 will be activated based on the result of the executed special symbol lottery. , "big win", "minor win", or "lose". Depending on the specifications of the pachinko game machine P, there are some machines that do not have a "minor win" as a lottery result of the winning lottery. In addition, when configured to have the first special symbol and the second special symbol, it has a "small hit" as the lottery result of the win or lose lottery for one special symbol, and the lottery result of the other win or fail lottery is "small hit". It may be configured so as not to have "hit".

Win/fail lottery uses a random number called a "win/fail random number" out of the random numbers acquired and stored when a game ball enters the starting port (first starting winning port P711, second starting winning port P721, etc.). lottery. In the premised pachinko game machine P, the range of possible random numbers (random number range) of the success/fail random number is 65536 from "0" to "65535", which is composed of so-called 2-byte random numbers. When a lottery is performed, the result of the lottery is determined by comparing the value of this random number with a lottery table (called a "lottery table") used for the lottery according to the game state and set values. process.

FIG. 10 illustrates several lottery tables used for lottery. FIG. 10(A) shows a winning/failing lottery table in a setting value of "1" and a low probability state, and FIG. 10(B) shows a winning/failing lottery table in a setting value of "1" and a high probability state. (C) and (D) of FIG. 10 respectively show win/fail lottery tables in a low probability state and a high probability state when the set value is "6".

For example, in the situation where the winning lottery is executed using the winning lottery table of FIG. Assuming that the numerical value is "1500", the flow of the lottery will be explained.

First, it is determined whether or not it belongs to the jackpot random number range ("0" to "327") as the result of the first lottery. Specifically, the process of subtracting the random number value range "328" of the big hit to be determined from the random number value "1500" of the hit/fail random number of this time is performed. At this time, the result of the subtraction is "1172", which is not a negative value. Therefore, it is determined that the hit/fail random number of this time does not belong to the big hit random number range.

As a subsequent process, the random number value "1172" after the calculation of the previous big hit judgment is compared with the random number range ("328" to "65370") as the judgment area for the success or failure lottery result of the success or failure lottery table. . More specifically, the random value range "65043" to be determined is subtracted from the primary data "1172" of the hit/fail random number. At this time, since the calculation result is a negative value, information corresponding to the result of "lost" is stored as the result of the lottery.

Hypothetically, if a special symbol lottery is performed in a high probability state with respect to this random number "1500", the lottery will be made on the win/fail lottery table shown in FIG. Determine whether it belongs to the range (“0” to “1639”). At this time, the result of the comparison operation (subtraction) between the hit/fail random number and the random value range becomes a negative value, so the result of the hit/fail lottery is determined to be a "big win".

The pachinko machine P, which is the premise, adopts a method of judging the lottery result by sequentially comparing the data obtained as random numbers and the random number range according to the lottery result of the lottery table. The same lottery method is adopted for the winning pattern lottery and the fluctuation pattern lottery, which will be described later. In addition, the lottery method is not limited to the above example, and a method of directly determining whether or not the obtained random number matches the random number that will be the big hit may be adopted. may be adopted.

(Hit design lottery)
The "hit symbol lottery" receives the lottery result of the special symbol lottery described above, and the control contents related to the operation of the subsequent special electric accessory P755 and the lottery table of the variation pattern lottery described later (see FIGS. 12 to 14). ) is the process of determining the stop display design of the special design as the lottery result necessary for switching.

FIG. 11 shows a jackpot pattern lottery table (see FIG. 11A) used in the winning pattern lottery when the lottery result is "big hit", and when the lottery result is "small hit". , a small winning symbol lottery table (see FIG. 11 (B)) used in the winning symbol lottery, and a losing symbol lottery table (Fig. 11 ( C)) is shown.

The "symbol random number" used in the winning symbol lottery has a random value range of "1000" ("0" to "999"). 0” to “3”, and the lower 1 byte is represented by “0” to “255”.

To explain the winning symbol lottery with a specific example, for example, when the winning lottery result is a big hit, the first special when the symbol random number is "400" (the upper byte is "1" and the lower byte is "144"). In the case of the winning pattern lottery for the pattern, using the lottery table of the upper 1 byte "1" shown in FIG. is obtained as a result of the lottery, and when the special symbols are changed and displayed, the "5R probability variation 2" symbol is the first special symbol display device P51 (in the case of the second special symbol lottery, the second special symbol display device P52) is stopped.

Then, when the "5R probability variation 2" symbol is stop-displayed on the first special symbol display device P51, the jackpot game corresponding to the "5R probability variation 2" symbol is executed. At this time, when "5R probability variation 2" is displayed as a stop display symbol on the first special symbol display device, and when "5R probability variation 1" is displayed as a stop display symbol, each of the 5 rounds of the jackpot game. The content of the round game (opening pattern and opening time of the big winning hole P751, etc.) may be varied based on the stop display pattern, and control may be performed to vary the control content in the specific game state that shifts after the jackpot game. It is possible. These jackpot games and control assignments in the specific game state are appropriately determined in order to realize game performance according to the specifications of each pachinko game machine P, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine P, which is the premise, the lottery shown in FIG. After determining the type of jackpot such as 5R probability variable 2", the type of jackpot is determined by performing another lottery from a plurality of patterns to determine the stop display pattern for executing the jackpot of the corresponding type. , and determination of the symbols to be displayed to be stopped, and the winning symbol lottery may be executed in two steps.

In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine P as a premise, as shown in FIG. , the types of winning symbols that can be determined are different. More specifically, in the premised pachinko gaming machine P, the possibility of determining "10R probability variation 5" to "10R probability variation 8" is increasing in the second special symbol jackpot, and the first special symbol It can be said that it is easier to win a big win with a large number of rounds than a winning symbol lottery, and it is easy to win a big win that shifts to a high probability / high base state as a specific game state.

FIG. 11B illustrates a small winning symbol lottery table. The small winning symbol lottery table is a table referred to in the winning symbol lottery when the result of the special symbol lottery success or failure lottery is "small win", and the lottery method is the above-mentioned big winning symbol lottery table. is similar to

In the small winning symbol lottery table shown in FIG. 11(B), most of the symbols are "small winning 1" symbols. , a "small hit 2" can be determined. It should be noted that one type of small winning pattern may be used, or three or more types of patterns may be determined.

As an example of the purpose of providing a plurality of small winning symbols like the pachinko game machine P that is the premise, the number of game balls that can be obtained by simply changing the opening mode of the big winning opening P751 during the small winning game For example, in a pachinko game machine P that adopts a small win V as a game machine specification (spec), to separate a small win game that is easy to win a V in a specific area and a small win game that makes it difficult to win a V. The purpose is to perform a mode such as differentiating the small winning patterns and differentiating the small winning patterns in order to separate the type of the specific game to be shifted after the execution of the big winning game after winning the V prize.

FIG. 11(C) illustrates a lost symbol lottery table. The lost symbol lottery table is a table referred to in the winning symbol lottery when the result of the special symbol lottery lottery is "lost", and the method of lottery is the jackpot symbol lottery described above with respect to the first special symbol. It is the same as the time of the table, and has a different method for the second special symbol.

More specifically, FIG. 11(C) shows only the winning symbol lottery table for the first special symbol. Only in this case, lottery processing is performed, and either "lose 1" or "lose 2" is determined as the stop display symbol.

The "lost 2" pattern is a winning design with a probability of about 6.4% when the 1st special pattern is lost. A special lottery table (not shown) is referred to to facilitate determination of the variation pattern (variation time). For this reason, "losing 2" may be referred to as "reaching loosing pattern" or the like.

In addition, the pachinko game machine P, which is the premise, does not have a winning symbol lottery table for the second special symbol, and is designed to determine a winning symbol of 1 regardless of the random number of symbols. The table comparison process itself is omitted, and one missing pattern is stored. It should be noted that it is also possible to use a lottery table that always wins one symbol so that a winning symbol is won.

(fluctuation pattern lottery)
The "fluctuation pattern lottery" is a process of randomly determining the fluctuation display time until the stop display symbol, which is the lottery result of the special symbol, is stopped and displayed. In the premised pachinko game machine P, a special pattern lottery is used as the performance time required for notifying the performance display device P80 whether or not the jackpot is a big hit, and what the type of the jackpot is in the case of a big win. is determined using a variation pattern table, which will be described later.

FIG. 12 mainly shows a normal game state (low probability/low base medium) and a low base state (non-electric chew support state), that is, in the premise pachinko game machine P, a game ball is shot to the left area P501L of the game board. It represents the “low base medium fluctuation pattern lottery table” in which it is recommended that

The "ID" shown in FIG. 12 represents information stored as a result of the variation pattern lottery, and the "variation pattern" is displayed on the effect display device P80 when the same ID is won. It shows a representative example of the mode of production of variation. "Variation time" is the variable display time value of the special symbol in the target variation pattern lottery result (variation pattern ID), and represents the time from when the special symbol is variably displayed to when it is stopped.

"Holding 1 fluctuation" to "Holding 4 fluctuation" in FIG. Then, when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol) is N, the fluctuation pattern lottery is executed using the fluctuation pattern table of "Hold N fluctuation". That is, the variation pattern lottery for the first special symbols in the low base state is configured to vary the variation pattern table to be used depending on the number of reservations. It should be noted that, when the game ball enters the start winning hole in the state where there is no suspension, it is temporarily stored as suspension for processing, so the variation pattern lottery is executed using the variation pattern table of "Hold 1 variation". be.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 12, the variation pattern lottery corresponding to the second special symbol is independent of the number of reservations, and is configured to use a common lottery table regardless of the number of reservations. It should be noted that, although not shown, as a result of the pattern lottery, if "missing 2 (reaching lost pattern)" is determined, even if it is a variation pattern lottery of the first special symbol, 1 variation that does not depend on the number of reservations It is configured to perform a variation pattern lottery using a pattern table (fluctuation pattern table for loss 2).

"10R probability variation", "5R probability variation", "10R normal", and "5R normal" in FIG. is a "big hit", and represents that the lottery is performed by appropriately selecting the variation pattern table according to which symbol the symbol lottery result is. In FIG. 12, since the second special symbol is not the subject of the game in the low base state, the big hit variation pattern table is expressed so as to be determined in a form independent of the big hit symbol, but the big hit of the second special symbol is also expressed. , and may have a plurality of patterns according to the type of the jackpot.

Here, a specific example of the variation pattern lottery in the low base state will be described with reference to FIG. As a specific example, it is a lottery of the first special symbol, the situation where the variation pattern random number is "30000" and the number of pending balls at the start of variation is 3 (situation where the number of pending is 2 after the start of variation). I will explain the situation where the winning or losing lottery result and the winning symbol lottery are "lose 1".

First, since the number of reservations at the start of fluctuation is "3", the fluctuation pattern table of "maintain 3 fluctuations" is used. The lottery process compares (subtracts) the variation pattern random number and the random number range corresponding to the variation pattern ID of each lottery result, similarly to the lottery process in the winning lottery described above, and determines whether the random number belongs to the same range. do. By performing this process, at the timing of normal fluctuation B of ID "2", the result of repeating the comparison operation between the fluctuation pattern random number and the random value range becomes a negative value, and the same ID is determined as a fluctuation pattern lottery, special After the variation display for 7 seconds is performed as the symbol variation display, the missing symbol 1 is displayed on the first special symbol display device P51.

Next, the fluctuation pattern table in the high base state will be explained using FIG. The configuration of the variation pattern table in the high base state has a configuration that is the same as the variation pattern table in the low base state shown in FIG. It is constructed so as to have a table and a table for each jackpot pattern at the time of jackpot. Although FIG. 12 and FIG. 13 are configured so that many fluctuation patterns can be determined in common, this is also for the purpose of simplifying the explanation, and is determined by the low base state and the high base state. It is also possible to configure such that the variation patterns overlap only a few times or do not overlap at all.

In addition, as a feature of the fluctuation pattern table in the high base state, the lottery result of the second special symbol "H3 fluctuation" and "H4 fluctuation" at the time of loss is the shortest fluctuation time of the pachinko game machine P that is assumed. A 2-second variation (variation pattern ID “12”) is configured to be determinable.

Furthermore, as a characteristic point of the variation pattern in the high base state, the 10-second variation of the variation pattern ID "4" is always determined for the lottery of the first special symbol. The reason for configuring the first special symbol with a variation of 10 seconds is that the player's profit in the case of a big hit is large in the big hit symbol lottery table shown in FIG. This is due to the fact that there are many jackpot patterns that shift to the probability fluctuation state as the specific game state), and by performing a large number of variable displays corresponding to the second special pattern with priority, the jackpot that is more advantageous to the player. is intended to make it possible to obtain In addition, even if there is almost no difference in the degree of advantage between the first special symbol and the second special symbol jackpot game, the first special symbol is based on the fact that the second special symbol priority digestion control is adopted. It is easy to hold the hold established in the normal game state (low base state) until the end of the specific game state (high base state), which is an advantageous state, to avoid the variable display. Another object is to avoid requiring a large amount of game balls to cause the first special symbol hold in the low base state, relative to the amount of game balls used to generate the special symbol hold.

FIG. 14 is a diagram showing a special table for a limited period, representing a special variation pattern table that is referred to during a specific period. In FIG. 14, as an example of a special variation pattern table provided in the pachinko game machine P as a premise, special variation pattern tables for three periods are comprehensively described.

More specifically, FIG. 14 shows the period from the 1st to the 4th fluctuation after the big hit (so-called "retained ream" (retained ream), which is a big hit with 4 holds that exist at the time of the big win). period), and the reach variation of 55 seconds, which is referred to in the n-th to m-th variation after the big hit, is likely to be selected. Referred to in the high frequency reach table (IDs "52", "53", "54", "72") and the last variable display in the high base state, the "result effect" described later is mainly executed. It is shown that a different "result variation table" (for IDs "55" and "73") is provided in the premise pachinko game machine P.

Such a special variation pattern table that is referenced for a limited period of time is called a "special variation pattern table" or a "limited frequency (pattern table)".

In the premised pachinko game machine P, the reference period of the limited frequency pattern table can be referred to during a predetermined period after the jackpot game (operation of the special electric role product, in other words, operation of the role product continuous operation device). are doing. Regarding these reference periods, it is possible to change whether or not to refer to them depending on the type of jackpot (jackpot pattern). It is also possible to configure them differently. What kind of special variation pattern table to refer to in what situation can be appropriately set for each pachinko game machine, and the details are not limited to the examples, and if necessary, the details can be explained in a separate description. and

Next, the control of the effect control board P41 that performs control related to the effect operation in the pachinko game machine P, which is the premise, will be described. The operation control of the performance control board P41 is less restricted in the model test of the game machine, and has a higher degree of freedom in design than the control of the main control board P40, so it will be explained in the following explanation. It is not limited only to the processing, and the timing at which the processing is performed can also be changed as appropriate.

[Power-on processing of production control board to main loop processing]
In the premise pachinko game machine P, power-on processing (step 4000) is executed in the CPU of the effect control board P41 when the power of the game machine is turned on. Here, details of power-on processing of the effect control board P41 will be described with reference to FIG.

When the power-on process (step 4000) is started in the effect control board P41 of the pachinko game machine P as a premise, the initial setting process relating to the operation of the CPU, which is the arithmetic device provided on the effect control board P41, is performed. (Step 4002). The initial setting process is to appropriately perform settings necessary for the operation of the CPU thereafter, and details thereof will be omitted. There is a time lag between the completion of the power-on processing (Fig. 7) and the power-on processing of the effect control board (Fig. 15). Since there is a risk of deviation, in the initial processing of the effect control board P41 at the time of power failure recovery, the effect information etc. are often initialized so that the effect that was being executed before the power failure is not executed ("effect called “control board reset” and “sub-reset”).

(Main loop of production control board)
In the premise pachinko game machine P, the main loop process is performed after the initial setting process. In the premised pachinko game machine P, the image control board P42 connected to the effect display device P80 (image display device) is set so that the cycle (frame) for drawing the effect image is drawn 30 times per second. Since the cycle is set to approximately 33 ms (30 FPS), the main loop processing loop is performed once at a cycle of 16 ms, which is approximately half the cycle (steps 4002 to 4016).

In the main loop processing of the effect control board P41, clear processing of the watchdog timer for detecting runaway of the CPU is first performed (step 4004).

Subsequently, a process of updating the effect control random number data (step 4006) is performed, and various effect control random numbers used when an opportunity to execute the effect lottery occurs are updated.

Next, input port monitoring processing is executed (step 4008). The pachinko game machine P, which is the premise, is designed to monitor the input port even during the interrupt processing of the effect control board P41, which will be described later. Therefore, monitoring of inputs such as switches, which are necessary monitoring objects in the system, is limited, and monitoring of inputs such as sensors necessary for controlling the effect of the effect movable accessory P560 is omitted. As a modified example, sensors to be monitored for performance may be checked in the input port monitoring process in the main loop process.

The contents of the input port monitoring process are the same as the input port confirmation process of the main control board, from the input data of various sensors, level data is generated and stored, and rising (falling) data is stored. be done.

Subsequently, the effect control board P41 performs effect device control processing (step 4010), and executes control related to effect operations other than the effect display device P80 (image display). The production devices controlled in this process include lamps P82 ("board lamp (P550)" and "frame lamp (P350)"), speakers P83 (upper speaker P370, lower speaker 141), production movable accessories P560, and the like. An effect operation command corresponding to the content of the effect decided to be executed by a process such as the effect control process (step 4012), which will be described later, is transmitted to each effect device to execute the effect operation.

This is because the output of the effect operation commands to various effect devices in the effect device control process (step 4010) must be executed (started) in synchronization with the effect image displayed on the effect display device P80 (image display device). , the signal transmitted at regular intervals from the image control board P42 controlling the effect display device P80 to the effect control board P41 or the signal for forcibly synchronizing is received (the input port monitoring process described above). ), it synchronizes with the effect switching timing of the effect display device P80, and outputs the effect operation command to various effect devices.

In addition, regarding the operation control of the effect movable accessory P560 among the effect devices, it is necessary to control the driving means of the effect movable accessory P560 in a shorter period, so the effect set in this process Regarding the operation pattern of the effect movable accessory P560 to be executed by the operation command, sensor monitoring and operation switching are executed even during an interrupt process (see FIG. 16) of the effect control board P41, which will be described later.

Next, the effect control processing (step 4012) executed in the main loop processing of the effect control board P41 will be described. Effect control processing is based on the result of analyzing the effect control command received from the main control board P40 in the effect control command analysis process to be described later, and the information of the received effect control command itself (such as the lottery result ID of the special symbol lottery) ), input port monitoring processing (step 4008), interrupt processing (FIG. 16), etc., based on the flags established during other processing, lottery or selection processing to determine the contents of the presentation to be executed by various presentation devices. is.

The effect control process selects the effect determination process to be executed based on each flag information and command analysis information, and calls and executes the corresponding sub-module process for effect determination. As an example of the production content determined here, the process of determining the variation production corresponding to the variation of one special symbol based on the command (win/fail command, symbol command, variation pattern command) related to the execution result of the special symbol lottery (processing to determine the content of notices, reach, and decorative patterns to be stopped), and pre-reading performance (" Based on the information sent as a production control command when executing a pre-reading lottery process that determines whether or not to execute a special game (big hit or small hit), the content of the production during the special game is determined. There is a special game effect content determination process and the like.

In addition, the effect control process is not only the process for the effect control command transmitted from the main control board P40, but also the determination process of the error display content when an error is detected by the effect control board P41 (error transmitted from the main control board). (including determination processing of error display content based on information), adjustment of the volume output from the speaker P83 based on the player's input operation such as the effect button P381 and the cross key P383 which are the effect operation means P81, and the lamp P82 It also executes the determination of the effect contents such as the light amount adjustment for changing the light emission luminance of the display and the customization of the effect contents and the effect content determination tendency.

It should be noted that the processing for determining the contents of various effects performed in the sub-module processing called in the effect control process is often subject to the invention, since the specifications unique to each gaming machine are often used. When the pachinko game machine P executes a characteristic process, the details will be explained in the explanation of the embodiment of the pachinko game machine P which is the object of the invention.

Returning to the description of the main loop processing of the effect control board, the effect control command analysis processing (step 4014) will be described as the last processing of the main loop processing.

The effect control command analysis process is based on the information stored as the effect control command transmitted from the main control board P40. and set flags. In this process, it is necessary to determine the processing contents according to the command transmitted from the main control board P40. process is executed.

Since there is a possibility that one command (MODE data and EVENT data) will be transmitted for each interrupt processing (every 4 ms) of the main control board P40, the effect control command can Until the cycle (16 ms) of the main loop processing of the board P41 elapses, the analysis of the effect control command is repeatedly executed as long as it can be processed (step 4016).

[Interrupt processing of production control board]
Next, the interrupt processing executed in the CPU of the effect control board P41 will be described. Interrupt processing in the effect control board P41, unlike the interrupt processing of the main control board, has a plurality of interrupt processing that is started at different execution timing (see Figure 16 (A) and (B)). In addition, priority is set for these multiple interrupt processes, and if an interrupt with a higher priority occurs, even if the interrupt process is being executed, the higher interrupt process will be executed. controlled by In this description, the production control timer interrupt process (FIG. 16(A)) and the production control command reception interrupt (FIG. 16(B)) will be described as representatives.

(Production control timer interrupt processing)
Effect control timer interrupt processing (FIG. 16(A)) is interrupt processing executed at a 1 ms cycle in the CPU of the effect control board P41.

Port input/output processing (step 5002) is input from the input port of the effect control board P41 to the sensor provided for detecting the position of the effect movable accessory P560 and other sensors (input sensor of the effect operation means P81). From the output port, the drive means (solenoid, stepping motor, etc.) of the movable accessory P560 is driven according to the operation pattern set in the production device control process. A process for outputting a signal is executed. Also, when data is output from the output port, the data in the counter (storage area) for counting the number of times of output is updated if necessary.

The timer update process (step 5004) is a process of subtracting or adding a timer for measuring the switching timing of the effect operation. When the update processing for each timer is completed, a comparison operation is performed with a comparison value, and it is determined whether or not the switching condition for the performance operation has occurred, and information necessary for determining the content of the performance in the performance control processing (step 4012) A process for storing the flag in the storage area is performed.

The sensor monitoring process (step 5006) is based on sensor detection data generated in the port input/output process to obtain sensor detection information related to the switching of the effect operation, such as whether or not the condition for switching the effect operation of the effect movable accessory P560 is met. is determined, and processing for switching the operation pattern table is performed, and processing for setting a condition flag for determining the content of the performance in the performance control processing (step 4012) is performed.

The production button monitoring process (step 5008) is a process for determining whether or not the production switching condition is established based on the inputs of the production button P381, the lever P382, the cross key P383, etc., which are the production operation means P81. In the effect button monitoring process, the level data indicating the input state of each input device generated in the port input/output process (step 5002) and the rising data (data indicating that the level data has changed from OFF last time to ON this time) are used to generate effects. It determines whether or not the operating means P81 is operated and how it is operated.

For example, when start-up data is generated as input information for the effect operating means P81, it is assumed that the player has operated the effect operating means P81, and information such as a flag for executing the corresponding effect is stored. . In addition, if the input is judged only by the rise data, there is a possibility that the effect operation will be switched due to erroneous detection due to electrical noise. It may be determined that the player's operation (sometimes expressed as "single push (single pull) operation" or "single blow operation") on the effect operation means P81 is triggered by the continuation.

Further, when the ON input level data is continuously detected 500 times, that is, when it is determined that the effect operation means P81 has been operated for 0.5 seconds, it is determined as a "long press (long draw)" operation, It is configured to handle as a special operation. In addition, the falling data (data indicating that the level data has changed from the previous ON to the current OFF) may be electrically detected as noise when judging whether or not there is a "long press (long pull)" operation. , In this case as well, similar to the measures to prevent false detection described above, after detection of falling data, based on the detection of input of level data (off data) multiple times, input of "long press (long stretch)" operation It is also possible to determine the end.

Then, in the premised pachinko game machine P, depending on the content of the effect being executed, the effect operation means is executed once at a constant cycle (for example, every 0.3 seconds) by executing the "long press" operation on the effect button P381. It is possible to repeat the processing that assumes that there is a "single press (single pull)" input operation on P81. Execution of repetitive processing assuming that a "single-press" operation has been performed is called an "automatic repeated-press" operation. It should be noted that the "automatic repeated hit" operation is not limited to the operation contents illustrated, but by operating a plurality of effect operation means P81 at the same time or by turning on and off a DIP switch provided as a switch different from the effect button, It is also possible to adopt a method of assuming that the "automatic repeated hitting" operation has been executed based on the input of the effect button P381.

Note that the input to the effect operation means P81 has a period treated as a valid operation (“operation valid period”) and a period treated as an invalid operation (“operation invalid period”) depending on the execution status of the effect.

Multitasking process (step 5010) is, depending on the value of the task counter (updated between the value "0" ~ "15") that is updated each time the effect control timer interrupt process is executed, effect control generated this time This is a process performed by changing the contents of the process to be executed during the timer interrupt process. The task counter is configured to circulate at a cycle of 16 ms, and the processing for each counter value is executed substantially in synchronization with one cycle of the main loop processing. As an example of processing in each task, whether or not the operation of the image control board P42 can be executed is determined based on a signal (input information is generated by port input/output processing) transmitted from the image control board P42, and the image is displayed. A process of monitoring the operation status of the control board P42 is performed.

The image control command transmission process (step 5012) sends an image control command ("inter-sub command") to the CPU of the image control board P42 to display an image corresponding to the content of the effect determined in the effect control process P41. ) to the CPU of the image control board P42. Although the image control board P42 and the performance control board P41 may be configured by the same board, they are referred to as the image control board P42 for the sake of convenience in this specification.

In the premised pachinko game machine P, the effect control board P41 consists of a first command indicating the type of display content and a second command designating the pattern of the display content as the image control command. It is configured to send.

In addition, the pachinko game machine P, which is assumed, is configured to transmit image control commands in the effect control timer interrupt process. It is also possible to configure such that transmission and reception are performed by providing interrupt processing.

(Production control command reception interrupt)
In the effect control command reception interrupt (FIG. 16(B)), a strobe signal is output in the effect control command transmission process (step 2040) in the interrupt process (FIG. 9) of the main control board P40, and the strobe signal is transmitted to the effect control board. This is an interrupt process that occurs when P41 receives.

When the effect control command reception interrupt is started, the effect control board P41 reads the effect control command (MODE data or EVENT data) transmitted from the output port of the main control board P40, and updates and stores the temporary buffer data (step 5502, step 5504).

When the update of the temporary buffer data ends, it is determined whether or not the reception of one effect control command (a combination of MODE data and EVENT data) has been completed (step 5506). It should be noted that the effect control command transmitted from the main control board P40 has specific bits of "1" and "0" in the 1-byte data.

When updating the temporary buffer data (2-byte data storage area) in step 5504 described above, processing is performed to store the content of the effect control command received this time in the normal lower 1-byte storage area. At this time, if the part of the specific bit in the lower 1-byte storage area of the current temporary buffer data before update indicates that it is MODE data, the storage data of the temporary buffer data is shifted to the upper 1-byte storage area. After that, the EVENT data received this time is stored in the lower 1-byte storage area of the temporary buffer data.

Then, in the determination of completion of reception of the effect control command in step 5506, it is determined whether or not a specific bit in the lower 1 byte of the temporary buffer data is data indicating EVENT data, and it is determined that it is EVENT data. In the case, the reception of the effect control command of 1 is completed (step 5506 YES) and proceeds to the next process, and when it is determined that it is MODE data (step 5506 NO), the transmission of EVENT data from the main control board P40 Until receiving the strobe signal based on, it exits the effect control command reception interrupt, performs other processing and waits.

In step 5506, when it judges that reception of the production|presentation control command was completed, it judges whether the sent production|presentation control command was normal (step 5508). This process is determined, for example, based on whether or not matching data exists in the list data of the effect control commands that can be transmitted from the main control board P40. Then, when it is determined that the command is normal, it is stored in a storage area for storing the effect control command received so as to be analyzed by the effect control command analysis process during the effect control timer interrupt process, In the case of abnormal data, the temporary buffer data is discarded.

[Example of basic image display effects]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 17 to 20, the basic effects in the pachinko game machine P as a premise will be described. FIG. 17 is a diagram showing symbol variation display (during display of decorative symbols stopped) during normal game (during low probability/low base), and FIG. It is a figure showing the situation where it is. FIG. 19 is a diagram showing a state in which a jackpot game is being executed, and FIG. 20 shows a game performance during operation of the electric chew support function during a specific game state (high probability or low probability/high base). It is a diagram of

(Example of effect display in normal game state)
《Decorative pattern》
FIG. 17 is a diagram showing symbol variation display (decorative symbols are stopped) during a normal game (during low probability/low base). Three numbers are displayed in a substantially central area of the screen in such a manner that the player can clearly see them. These three patterns are called "decorative patterns (P801)" (also called "design"), and are dramatic display objects displayed corresponding to the results of the special pattern lottery, and the fluctuation of the special patterns. The display is changed according to the display. Although only numbers are shown in FIG. 17, each number may be displayed with a decoration image such as a character image. Also, in the case where each number is displayed with a decoration image, the display mode of the decoration image and each number may be changed according to the game state. Such a configuration makes it easier for the player to determine the current game state.

The decorative pattern P801 is variably displayed as one effect for one variable display of the special pattern (one special pattern lottery), except when a special effect is performed. Although not shown, when the decorative pattern P801 is variably displayed, the decorative pattern is variably displayed at high speed (transparent display or non-display depending on the case), and animation and production effect images are displayed. By the production called "notice", the production that raises the expectation of acquiring the right of the big hit game is performed.

The decorative pattern P801 shown in FIG. 17 is displayed by scrolling in the vertical direction (from top to bottom) when the variable display is started, and then the left pattern (P801a), the right pattern (P801c), and the middle pattern (P801b) in this order. The stop display symbols determined by the effect control board P41 are stopped and displayed for each symbol row. In general, when the three decorative patterns P801 are stop-displayed in the same manner (striped pattern), a big hit is reported in a dramatic manner. In addition, while one symbol is displayed in a variable manner, other symbols are displayed. The state in which the right and left symbols are displayed in the same pattern (temporary stop display) is called "reach" ("reach state", "reach mode").

The variable display of the decorative pattern P801 is often displayed in a form of scroll display in the vertical direction (from top to bottom), but the form of the variable display is not limited to the vertical direction, and can be scrolled forward and backward using the horizontal direction and depth ( It is also possible to perform a scroll display operation in a diagonal direction, or to perform a rotation operation on the spot without scrolling and to switch the display in order.

Also, the decorative symbol P801 may be stopped and displayed a plurality of times during one time of variable display of the special symbol. At this time, when the stop display is performed a plurality of times, the stop display showing the result of the special lottery is a stop display displayed at the same timing as the stop display pattern of the special pattern is stop-displayed on the special pattern display device. A stop display at a timing other than this is called a "temporary stop (display)." In addition, the stop display of the special symbol and the stop display at the same time may be expressed as "main stop".

When the decorative pattern P801 is temporarily stopped, the decorative pattern P801 is not completely fixed in order to distinguish it from the final stop display of the pattern (main stop). It is configured to rotate, move in directions such as up and down or left and right, and swing around one rotation axis. Such a state may be expressed as "shaking fluctuation" in addition to temporary stop.

After the decorative pattern P801 is temporarily stopped and displayed, the variable display may be repeated again, and generally, the re-fluctuation from the state where the symbols other than the jackpot pattern are temporarily stopped is called a "pseudo-variation (pseudo-run)" effect. , The re-fluctuation that may change the jackpot pattern that is stopped and displayed after the jackpot pattern is stopped is called "promotion (fluctuation)" effect. In addition, when the promotion performance is executed, it may be configured not to change to a jackpot pattern that is more disadvantageous than the stopped jackpot pattern, or to not change to a losing pattern.

In addition, when the decorative pattern P801 is stopped and displayed, there is a kind of special decorative pattern that is not displayed during normal variable display and is displayed only when a part of the effect is executed. (P804)” (special symbol). The special design has a meaning in each pattern, for example, suggesting that a specific jackpot is executed, suggesting that the above-mentioned pseudo-fluctuation effect is performed, or a specific reach effect (reach mode) Examples include those that suggest that the advance notice effect displayed in the case) will be executed. When a special symbol is used, the special symbol may be temporarily stopped as the decoration symbol (middle symbol P801b) to be temporarily stopped at the end. A special pattern may be temporarily stopped as a decorative pattern.

《Simple layout (mini layout)》
Three numbers displayed in the same manner as the decorative pattern P801 are displayed on the upper right of the screen. This design is also called "simple design (P802)"("simpledesign") or "mini design", and shows the lottery result of the special design according to the variable display of the special design, similar to the above-mentioned "decorative design". It is displayed as a display object.

Unlike the "decorative design", the simple design P802 (mini design) is different from the "decorative design". In accordance with the display on the display devices P51 and P52, one stop display is always performed for one special symbol lottery.

In addition, the variable display of the simple design P802 may be configured to form the same ready-to-win state when the decorative pattern P801 described above is in the ready-to-win state, or to notify the result of the special design lottery. In order to achieve the minimum purpose, it is possible to adopt a simple variable display method such as performing constant display switching until the variable display of the special symbol is in a stopped display state regardless of the decorative symbol P801. good.

《Reserved display area》
A pending display area P810 is provided in the lower area of FIG. In the reserved display area P810, a reserved object P811 corresponding to the reserved (random number) corresponding to the unexercised right is displayed as the special symbol lottery right acquired by the player. The example of FIG. 17 shows a state in which three special symbol lottery rights are reserved.

In the example of FIG. 17, the earlier the execution timing of the special symbol lottery is (that is, the earlier the hold is), the closer the position is to the center of the lower part of the screen, and the hold display area P810. The display position of the reserved object located on the rightmost side of the screen is called "H1 (display area)", and as it goes to the left side of the screen, it is "H2 (display area)", "H3 (display area)", and "H4 ( display area)”.

Further, in the vicinity of the right side of the reserved display area P810, an object having substantially the same form as the reserved object P811 of the reserved display area P810 is displayed at a higher position and larger in size than the reserved object P811. This display area continues to display the pending display corresponding to the random number value that triggered the current special symbol variable display from the pending display area, and is called the "variable object display area (P812)". . In addition, the object displayed in the variable object display area P812 is called "the variable object (P813)", but it may also be called "the pending display" or the like, and is differentiated from the pending object P811 in the pending display area P810. Therefore, the acronym “applicable” is used.

The display mode of the changing object P813 in the changing object display area P812 does not have to be completely the same as that of the suspended object P811. In some cases, the shape may change or disappear (hidden). Further, the variable object P813 may also be configured so that the display mode can be changed in the same way as the pending display in the pending change look-ahead described later (for example, the shape and color of the object change at the timing during the variable display). ).

《Simple hold display》
Two numbers are displayed side by side in the vertical direction at the substantially central position in the height direction on the left side of the screen. These two numbers represent the current number of reserved first special symbols and the number of reserved second special symbols, and are called "simple reserved display (P814)". In the example in FIG. 17, the reserved number of the first special symbol is indicated by the numerical value "3" displayed above, and the reserved number of the second special symbol is indicated by the numerical value "4" displayed below. .

(Look-ahead effect)
《Pending change lookahead》
Also, in FIG. 17, the reserved object P811 in the H3 display area in the reserved display area P810 is displayed in a different manner from the reserved objects P811 in the H2 and H1 display areas. The premised pachinko game machine P is configured such that the display mode of the 3rd retained object P811 has a higher possibility of winning a big hit than the display mode of the 2nd retained object P811. In this way, the effect of changing the display mode of the pending object P811 and displaying it for a specific pending is called "holding change (prefetching)".

It should be noted that it is not limited to the mode illustrated in FIG. may be changed.

In addition, not limited to "suspension change (prefetch)", when it is determined that the random value stored as suspension is to be executed, the variable display corresponding to the suspension that is the execution target of the production is started. The production that suggests that there is a high possibility that the pending jackpot, which is the target of execution of the production ahead of time, is called the “pre-reading production” (sometimes referred to as the “pre-judgment production”). I'm in.

Then, when executing the "prefetching effect", the hold determined as the hold that is the execution target of the effect may be referred to as "prefetch target hold", "trigger hold", "criminal hold", etc. , The variable display of special symbols based on prefetch target suspension is referred to as "prefetch target variation", "trigger variation", "culprit variation", and the like.

Here, some representative examples that can be adopted in the premise pachinko game machine P are exemplified as "prefetching effect".

《Foresight of Opportunity》
In the "chance eye look-ahead", the stop display pattern of the decorative pattern P801 according to a predetermined rule is displayed as a stop display (or a temporary stop display) in the variation display of the decorative pattern P801 until the variation of the prefetch target variation is started. It is a production that will be done. As an example of the rule of the stopped display mode of the decorative pattern P801 predetermined as the chance eye, (a) when only patterns with the same hue of the number portion of the decorative pattern are combined, the lost pattern is stopped and displayed, and (b) When displayed in a regular stop display mode such as ``1'', ``2'', ``3'', ``5'', ``4'', ``3'', etc. (c) A special number such as "7" or a pattern different from a number such as "first" is stop-displayed as a stop-display pattern of medium symbols.

《Direction movable role-reading》
"Effective movable accessory look-ahead" reads ahead the effective movable accessory P560 or the frame movable accessory P360 (such as the lever P382 of the premise pachinko game machine P1) provided on the game board P5 or the frame (glass frame P3). This is an effect that makes a lively action from the start of the change until the change display of the target change starts or straddles the look-ahead target change according to the effect operation pattern.

《Zone Transition Look Ahead》
"Zone transition look-ahead" moves to a special production mode (called "zone") in the variable display of special symbols before the look-ahead target variation starts, and until the look-ahead target variation is displayed, special This is a look-ahead effect suggesting that the possibility of a big win is high by executing a notice lottery for executing a notice effect corresponding to a special effect mode. For example, "normal background display -> look-ahead background display -> big hit", or "normal background display -> look-ahead background display -> winning pattern stops and returns to normal background".

(Display example when executing reach effect)
Next, FIG. 18 is a diagram showing a situation in which a ready-to-win effect with a high expectation of a big hit is being performed. As described above, the "ready-to-win effect" is a situation in which decorative patterns (left pattern P801a, right pattern P801c) other than one decorative pattern (middle pattern P801b) are displayed in the same manner, and one more pattern is displayed. It means an effect in a state in which it is announced that a big win will be achieved if the game is stopped in the same mode.

In many cases, the pachinko game machine P, which is the premise, has a specification for notifying a big hit by displaying three decorative patterns P801 in the same stop display mode via a ready-to-win effect.

In the example of FIG. 18, the left pattern P801a and the right pattern P801c of the decorative patterns are displayed as "5", and "4", "5", and "6" are displayed as the patterns in the middle pattern row during fluctuation. It shows a situation in which the "4" symbol vibrates violently, and if it switches to "5", it will be a big hit.

Here, in the example of FIG. 18, the left and right decorative symbols "5" are displayed in a smaller size than the decorative symbols P801 during stop display in FIG. The row decorative pattern P801b is displayed in a larger size than the decorative pattern P801 during stop display, and is highlighted. At this time, the decorative symbols displayed in small sizes corresponding to the left symbol P801a and the right symbol P801c may be called "retreat symbol (P803)" or "reach symbol". In the ready-to-win effect, in addition to the example shown in the figure, whether or not a big hit will be announced depending on how the animation of the advance notice effect (ready-to-win effect) displayed with the variable display of the decorative pattern will end. In some cases, the left pattern P801a and the right pattern P801c, which have already been temporarily stopped and displayed, are displayed (or hidden) in a reduced size in the retracted pattern P803 so as to enhance the visibility of the effect that the player wants to pay attention to. ing.

Also, there is a game machine that does not display three decorative symbols P801, and there is also a multi-line reach that simultaneously forms a reach mode of multiple lines, but the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As an exception to the ready-to-win effect, there is a ready-to-win effect called “full-rotation ready-to-win” in which all three decorative symbols P801 are synchronously and variably displayed in the same manner. What is the standard for ready-to-win performance, ``a situation in which decorative symbols other than one decorative symbol are displayed in the same manner, and a state in which it is notified that a big win will occur if one more symbol stops in the same manner''? Depending on the context, a full spin reach is also recognized by those skilled in the art as a reach performance.

Also, in FIG. 18, an "effect setting display area (P850)" is displayed in the lower right area of the screen, and in the example of FIG. 18, a volume setting display P851 is displayed as the effect setting display.

The production setting display area P850 has a volume setting function for adjusting the volume level output from the speaker P83 of the game machine P, a light amount adjustment function for adjusting the emission brightness of the decoration lamp P82 of the game machine P, and a production mode. This is an area for displaying the setting status and change status of the presentation mode change function for changing the type of notice presentation to be called and for changing the frequency of occurrence of notice presentation.

The effect setting display area P850 is not always displayed, but is temporarily displayed when the player performs an operation related to the above-described various effect settings (volume adjustment function, light amount adjustment function, effect mode change function). For example, by operating the cross key P383 in the left/right direction, it is possible to display an effect setting display (volume setting display P851) related to the volume adjustment function shown in FIG. In the situation of FIG. 18, when the player further operates the right button of the cross key P383, the set volume level (black area in the figure) increases, and the volume setting value changes from "3" to It is designed to change to "4".

In addition, in the pachinko game machine P, which is the premise, when adjusting the light amount, it is configured so that the change operation is performed by operating the cross key P383 in the up and down direction, and the effect mode change function is performed according to the operation of the effect button. An example of switching the production mode in a predetermined order is given. It should be noted that the operations related to these effect settings may adopt different operation modes in relation to the execution of effects during the game, and can be appropriately adopted other than the exemplified method of changing the settings.

In addition, regarding the display of the effect setting display area P850 and the use of various effect setting functions, it is possible to set a period during which the player's effect setting operation is valid and a period during which it is invalid. When executed, the effect setting display area P850 is hidden and the use of various effect setting functions is disabled.

(Example of effect display during jackpot game)
Next, based on FIG. 19, a description will be given of the display mode of the effect in a state in which a jackpot game is being executed in the premised pachinko game machine P. FIG.

《Production display indicating the type of jackpot》
At the bottom left of the screen and the top right of the screen in FIG. 19, the decoration pattern P801 that triggered the execution of the big hit game is displayed. At the lower left of the screen, similarly to during execution of the ready-to-win production described above, 1 decorative pattern P801 (also called "big hit design (P805)") is displayed in a display mode smaller than the decorative pattern being displayed in a variable display, and the upper right of the screen is displayed. , the simplified design P802 that was displayed when the variable display of the special symbols was completed is still displayed.

In the premised pachinko game machine P, the type of the jackpot executed by the player and the number of game balls that can be obtained during the jackpot are determined by the type of the decorative pattern P801 that triggered the jackpot (stopped and displayed when the jackpot occurred). and the game state after the end of the jackpot (normal game state). Therefore, by displaying the decorative patterns (jackpot design P805, simple pattern P802) that triggered the execution of the big win, the type of the big win and the number of game balls expected to be obtained can be determined even during the big win game. It makes it possible to suggest

Further, as a display indicating the type of jackpot, in FIG. 19, an icon image P821 imitating a pentagonal shield is displayed below the character string "ROUND6" (referred to as "round display (P820)"). The letter "MAX" is written in the center of P821. An icon P821 in the figure indicates a jackpot suggested by the character string "MAX", and indicates that a jackpot game of the maximum round of the premise pachinko gaming machine P is executed. This icon P821 is called a "jackpot icon" or a "consecutive (display) icon", and every time the specific game state and the jackpot game are repeatedly executed, the display increases cumulatively, and the so-called "consecutive game" is displayed. This is an effect display for informing the player how many times and what kind of jackpot he has won in the state so that the player can understand.

Although not shown in the figure, the pachinko machine P on which the premise is assumed, "00 bonus!" An effect of informing the player of the type of the big win is executed by making a display such as "△△ Chance" (suggesting a big win other than the maximum round).

In addition, for example, even if it is suggested that it is a big hit such as "△△ chance" in which the number of rounds to be executed is small, the execution round of the big hit will be performed as "Extra bonus! + 0 rounds" during the big hit round. In fact, it is also possible to execute a "jackpot promotion effect" such as notifying that the jackpot is the maximum round.

It should be noted that the "jackpot promotion effect" is also used when suggesting that a jackpot game is being executed in which a transition to a specific game state that is more advantageous to the player than the previously notified jackpot type is performed. There is something. For example, from the production of a jackpot game that suggests that the probability fluctuation function does not operate after the jackpot game (referred to as "non-probability variation jackpot" and "normal jackpot"), the probability fluctuation function will operate after the jackpot game (" There is an effect display such as switching to the effect of "probable variable big hit", "specific big hit").

<<Production display showing the progress of the jackpot game>>
Next, when executing the big win game, the effect display showing the progress of the big win game will be described. In FIG. 19, as an effect showing the effect display of the big hit, "round display (P820)" executed by displaying the character string "ROUND_〇" at the upper left of the screen, and displaying the character string "TOTAL_○○pt" at the lower right of the screen. "Acquired ball number display (P822)" executed in , and "Count display (P825)" displayed with 10 circular image objects substantially in the center of the right side of the screen. Although not shown, during the jackpot game, in addition to these displays, an image display such as an animation called "round effect" is displayed.

《Round display》
"Round display (P820)" is a display indicating what round the round game (unit game) being executed is during the jackpot game. The numerical value on the right side of "ROUND" is updated at the timing when the round game is started. The example of FIG. 19 shows a situation in which the sixth round game is being played.

It should be noted that the "round display (p820)" does not necessarily need to be synchronized with the actual number of rounds executed during the jackpot game. For example, in the specifications of the "small win V" mentioned above, the small win game is counted as the first round, and the first round of the big win game executed after the V winning is treated as the second round. In another example, when the opening pattern of the large winning opening P751 in the round game ends with a transition to the easy ball entry state for a short period of time, the value of "round display" is not updated and the large winning opening P751 is closed. There may be a case where the substantially executed round is treated as a “substantial round” only when the open pattern of is in a state of easy ball entry for a long period of time.

《Acquired number of balls display》
"Number of winning balls display (P822)" is a special game sandwiched between "Number of winning balls display (P823 * not shown)" that displays the cumulative number of game balls that have been acquired in one big hit game during execution. There is a type such as "accumulated winning ball number display (824)" that displays the number of game balls cumulatively acquired in multiple jackpots. FIG. 19 shows an example in which a 5-digit display of the number of acquired balls, ie, "accumulated number of acquired balls display (P824)" is displayed. It should be noted that "display of the number of winning balls (P823)" and "display of the accumulated number of winning balls (P824)" may be simultaneously displayed in parallel.

In the premised pachinko game machine P, the "number of won balls display (P822)" displays the cumulative number of prize balls paid out based on the balls entering the big winning hole P751 during the big win game. However, as the accumulation target of the prize ball payout of the acquired ball number display P822, the payout based on the ball entry into the general winning hole P731 and the second start winning hole P721 arranged in the right area P501R of the game board P5 is accumulated and added. may

In addition, as another modification, the display period of "display the number of acquired balls (P822)" may be displayed not only during the jackpot game but also during execution of a specific game, or "display the number of acquired balls (P822)" , may be extended not only during the big win game but also during the specific game or the small win game.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P on which the assumption is made, in addition to the "display of the number of winning balls (P822)", the number of accumulated prize balls paid out is divided into "2500 balls", "5000 balls", "10000 balls", etc. Only in a special situation such as when the number of payouts has been reached, it is possible to execute an effect of ``display of the number of obtained balls'' to emphasize and notify the player in addition to the ``display of the number of obtained balls'' (for example, ``GET 10000! !”).

《Count display》
"Count display (P825)" indicates how many more balls can be entered up to the number of game balls set as the closing condition of the big winning hole P751 in one round game, or how many game balls can be entered in this round game. This is a display showing whether the ball has entered the big winning hole P751. The former is displayed as a circular object that is shaded in FIG. 19, and the latter is displayed as a white circular object in two columns at the approximate center position on the right side of the screen.

In the example of FIG. 19, as the sixth round of the game, five balls have already been entered into the big winning slot (indicated by white circular objects), and five more balls can be entered (indicated by shaded circular objects). display) is indicated by the count display P825. The count display P825 is reset to its initial state each time a new round is started.

During the execution of the round game of the jackpot game, the number of game balls exceeding the closing condition of the big winning hole P751 is consecutive to the game balls that satisfy the closing condition of the big winning hole P751 depending on the flow of the game balls. Winning may occur, and the occurrence of winning with the number of game balls exceeding the closing condition is called "over winning".

Although not shown, when an "over winning" occurs, a special effect is performed using the object display of the count display P825, special light emission of the effect lamp P82, and special effect sound is emitted from the speaker P83. You may notify Further, with respect to the above-described winning ball number display P822, the number of winning balls paid out based on the winning of "over winning" may be added or may be excluded from addition.

<<Other production display during jackpot game>>
Next, another effect display that is executed in FIG. 19 will be described.

First, the two numbers displayed at the substantially center position on the left side of the screen are the aforementioned simple hold display P814.

The display "Sound_2" displayed on the right side of the decoration pattern (jackpot layout P805) at the bottom left of the screen is the "Selected Music Display (P854)" indicating the title of the song being played during the current jackpot game. . In the premise pachinko game machine P, the player can arbitrarily select a piece of music to be reproduced by operating the production button P381 or the cross key P383 during the first round or the second round during the jackpot game. have specifications. As for the selected music display P854, when the music can be changed, an image of "can be changed with (up) and (down) keys" is displayed near the selected music display P854 as shown in FIG.

In addition, the selection of the production during such a jackpot game is not limited to the selection of music, but it is also possible to change the round production and select the production (production mode) during the specific game after the jackpot game (generally (referred to as “effect customization display (P853)”), and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Finally, the "Right shot" and the right arrow symbol displayed at the bottom of the simplified layout P802 on the upper right of the screen are image displays related to "Shooting division notification (P830)" (also called "recommended firing position notification" etc.) is. In the premise pachinko game machine P, during the jackpot game, it is a game state in which it is recommended to shoot the game ball to the right side area P501R of the game area, so "Right shot notification (P832)" ("Right shot" , and the right arrow symbol display) are being executed.

The "beating notification" is displayed not only during the jackpot game, but also during the game in the specific game state or during the game in the normal game state. In particular, in a situation where the game state changes (occurrence/end of a big win or occurrence/end of a specific game state), a display of a size larger than the split notification P830 shown in FIG. 19 is displayed so that the player can easily recognize it. is temporarily displayed in the center of the screen, etc., an effect is executed to inform the player of the recommended firing position in the next game state.

It should be noted that in the "beating division notification (P830)", the one that is temporarily displayed in a large size at the timing of the transition of the game state is the "first division notification image" ("right hitting large display (P831)", " left-handed large display (P833)"), and during the jackpot game or during the specific game state, the recommended firing position in the game state is displayed almost all the time during which the game state continues. It may be expressed as "announcement image" ("right shot small display (P832)", "left shot small display (P834)").

In addition, as another type of effect of "beating split notification (P830)", when detecting a situation in which the game ball is shot at a position other than the recommended shooting position, for example, during a big hit, the left side area of the game area ``Left-handed warning notification'' (``Right-handed attention alerting notification (P835)'' for alerting the player that the game ball should be shot to the right side area P501R of the game area when the game ball is shot to P501L) ) to display a message such as "Please hit right"). In addition, in a situation where the recommended firing position and the player's actual firing position are opposite to each other, "Right-handed warning notification" ("Left-handed attention calling notification (P936)") is executed.

(Example of effect display during specific game state)
FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a game effect during operation of the electric chew support function during the specific game state (high probability or low probability/high base). There are a wide variety of effects displayed in the figure, but the explanation of what was explained in the previous explanation is omitted, and the effects that have not been explained so far, and the differences from the above explanation A description will be given regarding the effect display having.

First, as an effect display that has not been explained so far, as an explanation of the effect display during the specific game state, the "production mode display (P840)" and the "remaining number of games display (P841)" will be explained.

<<Production mode display>>
The "effect mode display (P840)" is a display that indicates the state of the current effect display mode, and is a display that indicates that an advance notice effect corresponding to the corresponding mode is being drawn according to the state information called the effect mode. . When the presentation mode display is different, it is common that the type of announcement presentation visually recognized by the player is made so that the visual impression is greatly different, although there are some announcement presentations that are partly common. . In FIG. 20, "RUSH_MODE" is displayed, indicating that the game state of the pachinko game machine P as a prerequisite is "ST (variable number of cuts)" (high probability/high base state). ing.

It should be noted that the "production mode display (P840)", in addition to notifying the production mode in the specific game state, may be displayed in the normal game state (low probability / low base state), or may be displayed in one game When the state has a plurality of production modes, the display may be performed temporarily or continuously until the production mode ends each time a condition for switching the production mode is established.

《Remaining number of games display》
"Remaining number of games display (P841)" is the number of times the special symbols are displayed variably until the specific game state ends (the number of special symbol lotteries), and the number of times the special symbols variably displayed until the current production mode ends. It is a display showing the number of times. In FIG. 20, the display "remaining _56" is executed in the upper center of the screen, and the game state of "ST (number of cut probability variable)" is executed until the special symbol lottery is executed 56 more times. people are notified.

Next, in the example of the effect display in the specific game state shown in FIG. 20, the display that is different from the example of the effect display in the other game states described above will be described.

《Decorative pattern (specific game state)》
At the center of the screen in FIG. 20, a variable display of the decorative pattern P801 is displayed. In the example of the effect display of the decorative pattern P801 in the specific game state of FIG. 20, the display of the decorative pattern P801 is displayed smaller than the decorative pattern P801 of the example of the effect display in the normal game state of FIG.

In the premised pachinko game machine P, as the effect display of the specific game state, the effect mode display P840, the remaining game count display P841, and the jackpot icon display P821 are performed in the upper part of the screen, and the selected music is displayed in the lower part of the screen. P854 and display of the number of balls acquired P824 are performed. In the specific game state, such additional display that is not displayed in the normal game state (low probability/low base state) is performed. In the case of the pachinko game machine P as a premise, there is a risk that the display of some symbols overlaps a part of each display, and the visibility of the stop display symbols is reduced. The display of the decorative pattern P801 is made small and simplified so that it is difficult for the display to occur. Further, as an example of simplifying and displaying the decorative pattern P801, it is possible to adopt a method of reducing the size and not displaying a character image or the like that is displayed along with the number indicating the pattern.

《Reserved display area (specific game state)》
In the premised pachinko gaming machine P, as shown in the lower left of the screen in FIG. A display area is provided for the pending object of "H4". Note that the display of the variable object display area P812 (and the variable object display P813) is omitted in the "RUSH_MODE" rendering mode state.

When the change display shown in FIG. 20 ends and a new change starts in the state, the display of the pending object P811 positioned at the bottom in FIG. The display is controlled so that the display is enlarged.

In addition, although not shown, a description will be given of the "result display effect", which is an important effect displayed during the specific game.

《Result display performance》
The "result display effect" is mainly used when the final variation of the specific game state (high base state) is executed in the premise pachinko game machine P, or when the hold that occurred during the specific game state disappears. This is a performance that is performed at the timing when the player recognizes that the “Renso” state has ended, and in the so-called “Renso” state, information on how many times the jackpot game has been won, and how many game balls have been played in total. This is an effect for informing the player whether or not the ball has been acquired (corresponding to display of the number of acquired balls).

[First embodiment]
The pachinko game machine P of the first embodiment has various characteristic configurations in addition to the basic configuration of the base technology described above. In the following, differences from the underlying technology will be mainly described, and descriptions of common points will be omitted. Among the elements constituting the pachinko game machine of the first embodiment, the elements identical or corresponding to the elements explained in the underlying technique are given the same reference numerals and explained.

(Description of the housing (slot machine 1))
Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 21 shows the appearance of the slot machine 1 according to this embodiment. The slot machine 1 is roughly divided into the front panel 2 side and the cabinet 3 side, and necessary parts and substrates are attached respectively. The front panel 2 of the slot machine 1 and the side of the cabinet 3 are joined by a hinge device and a locking device, and a lock key is inserted into the locking device provided on the front panel 2 and rotated in a specific direction. The locking device side can be opened.

The constituent elements on the front panel 2 side of the slot machine 1 will be explained below.

(Front panel 2)
The front panel 2 is composed of a plate member with a design, and on the front side (player side) is a display window 4, an operation instruction lamp 24, a bet amount display lamp 25, a credit amount display 26, and a winning number display 27. , operation panel 11, lower panel 5, upper or both side effect lamps, etc. are provided. A setting display LED (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a setting value display LED, a setting display, a setting value display, a setting display device, or a setting value display device) is provided on various substrates and the like.

(Display window 4)
The display window 4 is printed on the outer peripheral surface of the reel tape fixed to each reel rim portion of the left reel 8a, the middle reel 8b, and the right reel 8c, which are vertically rotatable with the front panel 2 closed. The drawn pattern is configured to be visible through the display window 4 from the front side (player's side). When the reels are stopped, 3 consecutive symbols out of 21 symbols (21 symbols in this embodiment, but may be freely designed such as 20 symbols or 16 symbols according to specifications) One pattern is visible. That is, 3 [symbols]×3 [reels]=9 symbols in total are displayed on the display window 4 . Here, among the stop positions where the left reel 8a, the middle reel 8b, and the right reel 8c each stop three symbols, the uppermost stop position is the upper stage, the center stop position is the middle stage, and the lowest stop position is the lower stage. and

(Valid line)
The active line is a symbol combination line that is subject to winning determination processing (to be described later) when the left reel 8a, middle reel 8b, and right reel 8c are stopped. The effective line in this embodiment is composed of a symbol combination line (middle horizontal line) passing through the middle of each reel in the display window 4 . When it is determined that the symbol combination stopped on the activated line corresponds to any winning combination by the prize determination process, the process corresponding to the stopped symbol combination is performed. For example, when it is determined that the combination of symbols corresponding to the bell has stopped, game medals (hereinafter may be referred to as medals, game media, or game value) payout processing and credit addition processing are executed, and replays are performed. When it is determined that the symbol combination corresponding to has stopped, automatic bet processing is executed.

Depending on the slot machine 1, the effective lines may be set to five lines, namely, an upper horizontal line, a middle horizontal line, a lower horizontal line, an upward right line, and a downward right line. (upper stage, lower stage of right reel 8c), approximately valley type (upper stage of left reel 8a, lower stage of middle reel 8b, upper stage of right reel 8c), approximately L-shaped (upper stage of left reel 8a, lower stage of middle reel 8b, lower stage of right reel 8c) It can be freely designed according to the specifications of the slot machine 1, such as setting 6 lines or more, or setting the effective line so that it changes depending on the number of bets. A straight line other than the valid line may be called an invalid line.

(Operation instruction lamp 24)
The operation instruction lamp 24 is provided around the display window 4, and instructs the player to operate the stop switch 13 (described later) when the left reel 8a, middle reel 8b, and right reel 8c are rotating. It indicates the order. That is, the left stop switch 13a is turned on when the left operation instruction lamp 24a is lit, the middle stop switch 13b is turned on when the middle operation instruction lamp 24b is turned on, and the right stop switch 13c is turned on when the right operation instruction lamp 24c is turned on. Each indicates that it should be operated.

(Bet number display lamp 25)
The number of bets (number of bets) display lamp 25 is provided on the operation panel 11 and has a function of displaying the number of bets operated by the player. Also, it is composed of a 1-bed bet number display lamp 25a (not shown), a 2-bed bet number display lamp 25b (not shown), and a 3-bed bet number display lamp 25c (not shown). When one medal is betted, the one bet number display lamp 25a lights up, when two medals are betted in total, the two bet number display lamp 25b is lit up, and when three medals are betted in total, three bets are bet. A number display lamp 25c is lit. Also, although not shown, after the symbol combination relating to the replay is displayed, when the automatic betting process is executed, the bet number display lamp 25 corresponding to the bet number used in the game in which the replay was won is lit. At the same time, the replay lamp is turned on. The lighting timing of the bet number display lamp 25 and the lighting timing of the replay lamp may be the same, or one of them may be lit first.

(Credit number indicator 26)
The credit number display 26 is provided on the operation panel 11, and is composed of 7 segments and dot points (DP). It is composed of a segment display 26b (not shown) which mainly displays the lower digits of the credit amount, which is composed of segments and dot points (DP). The number of credits means the number of medals credited (electrically stored) in the slot machine 1 . Also, when a normal game cannot be played, such as when an error is detected, the error may be displayed.

(Acquisition number indicator 27)
The acquired number display 27 is provided on the operation panel 11, and is composed of 7 segments and dot points (DP). It is composed of a segment display 27b (not shown) which mainly displays the lower digits of the number of acquired sheets composed of 7 segments and dot points (DP). The number of won medals means the number of medals paid out to the player according to the game result in the slot machine 1 (including the number of medals stored in the credit number display 26). Also, when a normal game cannot be played, such as when an error is detected, the error may be displayed.

The credit number display 26 and the acquired number display 27 display respective information by means of segment indicators 26a, 26b, 27a, and 27c. It is also conceivable to display different information. For example, information indicating that the user is staying in an advantageous section (to be described later) or information indicating that a predetermined external signal is being output can be notified by lighting the DP of one of the segment displays. mentioned. In addition, it may have the capability of notifying the pressing order by using the upper digit display section and the lower digit display section of the acquired number display 27 . When the winning number display 27 is used to notify the pressing order, the winning number display 27 may be referred to as an instruction monitor.

(Operation panel 11)
The operation panel 11 is provided substantially in the center of the front panel 2 . The operation panel 11 is configured substantially horizontally, and includes a start switch 12, a stop switch 13, a medal slot 17, a plurality of bet switches (MAX bet switch 18, 1 bet switch 19), a sub switch 20, and a sub cross key, which will be described later. A switch 21, an eject switch 22, and a settlement switch (to be described later) are provided.

(Start switch 12)
A start switch 12 (also called a start lever) is provided on the operation panel 11 . It consists of a lever-shaped operation part, and the start switch sensor is ON when not operated, and when the start switch sensor is turned OFF when operated, it is determined that the start switch has been operated. The operation of the start switch 12 becomes valid when the number of bets reaches a specified number, and the operation starts an internal lottery process (described later), an AT lottery process (described later), a reel rotation process (described later), and the like. Further, in this embodiment, since the input signal is low active, when the start switch sensor is ON during non-operation, the start switch input signal is OFF, and when the start switch sensor is ON and OFF during operation. When this occurs, the start switch input signal is turned ON. The configuration is not limited to this, and the start switch input signal may be turned on when the start switch sensor is turned on.

Hereinafter, simply referring to "the start switch is ON" or "the start switch is operated" means that the start switch sensor has changed from ON to OFF, and that the start switch input signal has changed from OFF to ON. represents what happened.

(Stop switch 13)
A stop switch 13 is provided on the operation panel 11 . In this embodiment, the left stop switch 13a corresponds to the left reel 8a, the middle stop switch 13b corresponds to the middle reel 8b, and the right stop switch 13c corresponds to the right reel 8c. Also, when the stop switch 13 can be operated, the color of the lamp provided in the main body of the stop switch 13 or the lamp around it is changed to suggest that the stop switch 13 is effective. For example, when the stop switch 13 can be operated, it lights up in blue, and when it cannot be operated, it lights up in red.

(Medal slot 17)
A medal slot 17 is provided on the operation panel 11 . It has an opening for inserting medals into the medal insertion slot, and restricts the insertion of medals of a standard size or larger. A plurality of types of medal insertion slots 17 are manufactured according to the standard sizes of a plurality of types of medals. are the same.

Regarding the input of game media, the game media are not limited to the insertion of the medals described above. The game machine reads the information on the number of game media stored in the electrical storage medium, and updates and saves the information on the number of game media in the electrical storage medium at the timing of setting the number of bets and winning prizes. obtain.

(Bet switch (MAX bet switch 18, 1 bet switch 19))
A bed switch is provided on the operation panel 11 . When the bet switch is operated when there are stored medals in the credits, the betting number setting process equivalent to the act of inserting medals into the medal slot 17 is performed (betting number setting means 158). However, even if the bet switch is operated when there are no stored medals in the credit, it will be invalid (not accepted). In addition, it is composed of a MAX bet switch 18 with which the maximum number set for each slot machine 1 can be bet, and a 1 bet switch 19 with which one bet can be made, and the 1 bet switch 19 can be operated multiple times. , the same number of bets as the number of operations can be bet within the range of the maximum number of bets. In addition, if the 1-bet switch 19 is operated while the maximum number of game media has been bet, the state may shift to a state in which 1 bet is placed, or the operation of the 1-bet switch 19 may be invalidated (1 bet). is not shifted to a bet state). Note that the maximum number of bets in this embodiment is three. It should be noted that the maximum number of bets may be configured to differ depending on the gaming state.

In addition to the bet switches described above, it is conceivable to provide an n-bet switch that allows an arbitrarily set number of n (n is a positive integer) to bet in one operation. Further, the MAX bet switch 18 is invalidated (not accepted) even if the MAX bet switch is operated when the currently set number of bets is three. In addition, when the number of accumulated medals of the current credit and the currently set number of bets are less than 3, and the sum of the number of accumulated medals of the current credit and the currently set number of bets is less than 3 is invalidated (not accepted) even if the MAX bet switch is operated, or the number of bets that can be set as the number of bets is set as the number of bets.

(Sub switch 20)
A sub switch 20 is provided on the operation panel 11 . It is a switch that is operated mainly according to an instruction screen displayed on a display device 32, which will be described later. In addition to the sub switch 20 as input means, sub cross key switches 21 (sub cross key upper switch, sub cross key lower switch, sub cross key left switch, sub cross key right switch) and performance switches (specified during the game) A switch that is operated using Also, the sub-switch 20 can function as a trigger for activating an interlocking system with a portable terminal, which will be described later. Although the sub-switches 20 are used for the menu display function and the effect switches are used for operation during the game, they may be used as common switches.

(Payment switch)
A settlement switch is provided on the operation panel 11 . By being operated after the game is over, the number of game media that has been bet or the number of game media that has been stored in credits is paid out (settlement) to the player. note that. In this embodiment, when the settlement switch is operated in a situation where a bet has been made and game media are stored in the credits, the betted game media are first paid out and then stored in the credits. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the process of paying out the game media stored in the credits may be executed only when the number of betted game media is zero. In other words, when the settlement switch is operated in a state where a bet is placed, only the game media that are bet are paid out, and when the settlement switch is operated again after that, the game media stored in the credits are paid out. may

(bottom panel 5)
The lower panel 5 is provided below the front panel 2 . A design sheet is sandwiched between two sheets of transparent resin, and the design sheet is printed with a characteristic color of each slot machine 1.例文帳に追加

(Medal payout port 43)
A medal payout port 43 is provided below the lower panel 5 . This is an exit for ejecting medals paid out from a hopper 44 (also referred to as a hopper) to the outside of the slot machine 1 (receiving tray 28). It also serves as a return port for releasing medals removed from the medal selector 34 (to be described later) to the outside of the slot machine 1 .

(Receptacle 28)
A receiving tray 28 is provided below the lower panel 5 . It has a substantially concave structure to receive and store the medals discharged from the medal payout port 43, and protrudes toward the player side so that the player can check the stored medals.

In addition, the receiving tray 28 has other functions such as a cigarette ashtray 29 and a resin sheet to which a union license seal, a patent certificate seal, and a model seal are attached. A housing 30 is also provided.

(Speaker S)
Speakers S are provided above and below the front panel 2 . It is connected to the sub-control board unit 42 by a harness (not shown), and the speaker S outputs an error sound and a warning sound to inform that an error has occurred, in addition to sound effects in accordance with the performance.

(Display device 32)
The display device 32 is provided above the front panel 2 . It is a device capable of displaying images, and various devices such as liquid crystal displays, plasma displays, organic EL displays, and projectors can be used. It is electrically connected to the sub-control board unit 42 and displays various performance images, a game instruction image for instructing the pressing order of the stop switch 13 and the position of the eyes during the game, an error image when an error occurs, and the like. Further, there are slot machines 1 that do not have the display device 32 depending on the model.

(Other production devices such as dot displays and movable accessories)
Other production devices such as dot displays and movable accessories are provided at arbitrary positions on the front panel 2 such as the periphery of the display window 4 and the upper and lower panels. It is electrically connected to the sub-control board unit 42 and displays various performance images and performance operations, as well as game instruction images and operations for instructing the pressing order and position of the stop switch 13 during the game, and an error image when an error occurs. display and operate. Other production devices such as a dot display and movable accessories are optionally installed in accordance with the model of the slot machine 1.例文帳に追加Various devices such as a liquid crystal display, a plasma display, an organic EL display, and a projector can also be used as other rendering devices. In particular, in a game machine having a liquid crystal as an additional effect device, the display device 32 may be referred to as a main display device, and the liquid crystal as another effect device may be referred to as a sub display device. In this case, the display area of the main display device is larger than that of the sub display device.

(Medal selector 34)
The medal selector 34 is located inside the gaming machine behind the front panel 2 and is provided in the downflow passage below the medal slot 17 . In addition to a medal count function of counting the number of medals inserted by a player with a sensor provided on the flow passage, the inserted non-standard medals are guided out of the flow passage and ejected out of the slot machine 1.例文帳に追加A medal exclusion function is generally provided. In addition, by operating the switch provided on the front of the front panel 2, there is an eject function that ejects medals stuck in the medal selector 34, and a blocking member that electrically drives the inserted medals other than when accepting medals. has a blocker function to remove foreign matter from the downflow passage, and a foreign matter detection function to physically detect foreign matter that has entered the medal flow path 35 . If the medals inserted at the time of receiving the medals are normal, they are discharged to the hopper 44 located downstream.

Various sensors in the medal selector are composed of a path sensor, an insertion sensor 1, an insertion sensor 2, and a shoot sensor. The path sensor is a sensor that first detects medals inserted from the medal slot, and is provided to count the number of inserted medals and ejected medals. The throw-in sensor 1 and the throw-in sensor 2 are positioned downstream of the path sensor and the blocker, and are used to determine the passing time of the medals passing through the throw-in sensor 1 and the throw-in sensor 2 to determine normal or abnormal passage. is provided. Note that the input sensor 2 is located downstream of the input sensor 1 . The shoot sensor is located downstream of the throw-in sensor 2, and is provided to count the number of thrown-in medals and ejected medals. Since the passage sensor and the shoot sensor have overlapping functions, only one of them may be provided.

Components of the slot machine 1 on the side of the cabinet 3 will be explained below.

(Cabinet 3)
The cabinet 3 has a rectangular box shape with an opening on one side, and contains reel units 6, a hopper 44, an auxiliary tank 46, a setting key switch 37, and a reset/setting switch 38 (hereinafter simply referred to as "reset switch"). or a "setting switch"), a power supply device 39, a main control board unit 41, an external output terminal board 47, and the like.

(Main control board unit 41)
The main control board unit 41 is composed of a main control board case base, a main control board case cover, and a main control board 100 . The main control board 100 is accommodated by the main control board case main body and the main control board case cover, and is not easily opened and closed by caulking (sealed). The main control board unit 41 is fixed to the main control board case bracket inside the cabinet 3 .

The main control board 100 is provided with a main IC that controls the functions of the main CPU, main ROM, and main RAM (hereinafter also referred to as main RWM). Under the control of the main IC, general games (hand lottery process, reel control process, payout process, etc.), which will be described later, are realized.

(reel unit 6)
The reel unit 6 mainly includes a reel frame, a left reel 8a, a middle reel 8b, and a right reel 8c. The reel unit 6 is attached to a reel base 7 inside the center of the cabinet 3 and fixed by a locking member (to be described later).

The reels (left reel 8a, middle reel 8b, and right reel 8c) have reel tapes on which a plurality of types of patterns are drawn, and each reel has a different pattern arrangement. When the start switch 12 is operated by the player, it starts rotating and accelerates to a speed of about 80 rpm (acceleration processing). After reaching a constant speed, after maintaining a constant speed rotation state in which the stepping motor moves one step for each interrupt (constant speed rotation), each operation of each reel is performed according to the operation of the stop switch 13 by the player. The reel is moved at a constant speed to the stop position determined by the reception position, and after moving to the stop symbol position, the brake is applied (four-phase excitation is applied) to stop the rotation of the reel.

In addition, each reel is provided with an index, and an index sensor provided on the spoke portion of each reel detects the index to determine which symbols are passing during rotation. The number of steps of the stepping motor, which is the driving source of the reel in this embodiment, is 336 steps. becomes 180, it is determined that the rotation is faulty. The rotation failure detection counter is set to 0 when the index is detected, so that the rotation failure detection counter becomes 0 before it reaches 180 if the constant speed rotation process is normal.

In addition, a back lamp unit is provided inside each reel, and after the reel stops, it is lit to emphasize the stopped pattern, or it is lit to improve the visibility of the pattern while the reel is spinning. are doing.

(Hopper 44)
The hopper 44 is placed in engagement with a rail structure provided on the bottom plate of the cabinet 3, and can slide back and forth along the rail structure. The hopper 44 has a storage tank portion for receiving and storing medals guided into the game machine from the medal selector 34, and a hopper motor driving means 156 that drives the hopper motor and rotates the rotating disk to store the stored medals one by one. It is composed of a medal aligning mechanism for aligning medals to be discharged to the receiving tray 28 and a medal dispensing part 45 provided with a discharging mechanism for discharging the medals to the receiving tray 28 through the medal dispensing port 43. - 特許庁

(Auxiliary tank 46)
The auxiliary tank 46 is configured to be able to store medals, and the medals stored in the storage tank portion are stored in the auxiliary tank 46 through the downwardly inclined rail portion provided in the storage tank portion. . The auxiliary tank 46 has a rectangular box-like structure, and when installed in the cabinet 3, two full detection electrodes attached to the cabinet 3 through through holes provided on at least one side face the auxiliary tank. 46 is exposed, and when a certain amount or more of medals inserted from the medal insertion slot are stored, two full detection electrodes are energized through the medals, and the hopper 44 and the auxiliary tank 46 are full. We judge that it is. The number of fullness detection electrodes is not limited to two, and the number of fullness detection electrodes may be changed, such as providing three. Further, the method of fullness detection is not limited to the method of using the fullness detection electrode, and a sensor provided at a predetermined position may detect medals to enable fullness detection.

(Setting key switch 37)
The setting key switch 37 is provided in a setting key switch unit provided inside the slot machine 1 and provided with an opening/closing door on the front surface thereof. After opening the front panel 2, access is made possible by opening the opening/closing door of the setting key switch unit. To turn on the setting key switch 37, insert the setting key and rotate it to the right. When the setting key switch 37 is turned on while medals can be accepted, the current set value can be confirmed. Execute.

(Power supply device 39)
The power supply device 39 is provided on the lower left side of the cabinet 3 when viewed from the front. It has a rectangular box shape, is provided with a power switch 40 on the outside, and is provided with a power supply board for generating a voltage inside. The rotary drum device board and the sub-control board unit 42 are individually connected via harnesses (not shown). ing.

When the switch is turned on, the power supply device 39 receives power from the outside of the slot machine 1 and then generates a predetermined voltage for each of the main control board unit 41 and the sub control board unit 42 . When the switch is turned off, the slot machine 1 is configured not to take in power from outside.

(External output terminal plate 47)
The external output terminal board 47 is generally mounted inside the cabinet 3 of the slot machine 1, and converts the signal relating to the game results output from the main control board unit 41 into a signal of a predetermined format, and outputs the signal to the slot machine 1. send outside of Contents of game results include the number of coins inserted, the number of coins paid out, the number of bonuses (the number of big bonuses, the number of regular bonuses), the door open signal, and the like. Other conditions for transmitting a signal to the outside are when the main control board 100 is controlled by the AT state, when a specific symbol combination is displayed, when the value of the game-related counter reaches a predetermined value, etc. It can be set based on the information determined in advance.

(Functional block diagram)
The electrical schematic configuration of the slot machine will be described with reference to the functional block diagram shown in FIG. 25 of this embodiment.

<Main control board>
The slot machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a main control board 100 (also called main control board) that controls general game flow, a sub control board 1000 (also called sub control board), a door relay board (also called central display board). ), rotary drum device board, reset/setting switch 38, setting key switch, etc., thereby enabling data communication. However, bidirectional communication between the main control board and the sub control board is disabled, and data communication is enabled by unidirectional communication from the main control board to the sub control board. A main control chip is mounted on the main control board. In the main control chip, a main control CPU, a main control ROM, a main control RAM, etc. are capable of data communication with each other via a bus. Under the control of the main control chip, the winning lottery (also called internal lottery), reel drive control (also called reel control), payout control, etc. are appropriately communicated to various boards. In addition, for the sub-control board, as a result of the internal lottery, the selected role (AT role, AT target role, pushing role, pushing role, and operation procedure role including both pushing and pushing roles) , and when information (push order, operation timing) regarding the display of the selected role is notified on the main control means side, the selected role information (chosen group information, selected role group information, By transmitting the information regarding the display, it becomes possible for the sub-control means to notify the information regarding the display of the winning combination. It should be noted that all the processes related to AT, such as shifting to AT, extending the number of AT games, and notifying the pressing order, may be referred to as processes related to (related to) the instruction function. It should be noted that the push order role is a conditional device in which the combination of symbols to be stopped and the game medals given to the player are different depending on the order of the reels to be stopped (push order), and the push order role is the operation of the stop button. This is a condition device in which the combination of symbols to be stopped and the game medals given to the player are different depending on the timing of acceptance.

<Sub control board>
A sub-control chip is mounted on the sub-control board. In the sub-control chip, the sub-control CPU, sub-control ROM, sub-control RAM, etc. are capable of data communication with each other via a bus. The sub-control board is capable of two-way communication with the effect control board, and transmits data designating effects to be output to the speaker S, the LED lamp, the sub-switch 20, and the like. Information to the display device 32 is transmitted to the image control board. Also, the sub-control board is directly supplied with power from the power supply board.

<Rotor device substrate>
The reel device board is a relay board that performs data communication between the reel motor, reel sensor, door switch, payout sensor, external output terminal board 47 (also called an external collective terminal board), etc. and the main control board. A reel motor controls the drive of the reel. The reel sensor is a sensor that determines whether the reel is operating normally, and transmits data to the reel device board when the projecting piece (also called an index) passes the sensor. A door switch is a sensor that determines whether or not the front door is opened. The payout sensor is a sensor that determines whether or not medals are properly passing when they are paid out from the hopper. The external collective terminal board is a relay board for transmitting data to a hall computer outside the game machine. Further, power is supplied directly from the power supply board to the rotary drum device board.

<Door relay board>
The information input to the door relay board includes various sensor information in the selector (insertion sensor 1, insertion sensor 2, aisle sensor, chute sensor), bed switch information, stop switch information, and settlement switch information, and information to be output. These include blocker information, credit number information, bet number information, replay symbol combination display information, and payout number information. The door relay board includes a selector, bed switch, stop switch, checkout switch, credit number display 26, payout number display, replay lamp, 1 bed lamp, 2 bed lamp, 3 bed lamp, start lamp, medal insertion possible lamp, It is electrically connected to the advantageous section ramp.

<Production control board>
The production control board includes a sub switch 20, a sub cross key switch 21, a production switch, a speaker S, a back lamp, an LED lamp provided on the front panel 2, an image control board for controlling the display contents of the display device 32, and an electric connected

<Image control board>
The image control board is provided with an image control ROM, a sound ROM, a cooling fan, and the like for specifically displaying the effect content on the display device 32 .

<Power board>
In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, power is supplied from the power board to the reel device board and the sub-control board based on the operation of the power switch. The power supplied to the reel device board supplies power to the main control board and the door relay board. Then, the supplied electric power is supplied to each component to establish an electrical connection. The power supplied to the sub-control board supplies power to the performance control board, and supplies power to the image control board. The supplied electric power is supplied to each component and electrically connected.

I will explain the control of the main board that controls the game of the game machine.
(main memory)
The main CPU 105 has a built-in ROM and a RAM, and the built-in RAM that is cleared by the clearing process will be described. The memory area of the RAM includes the ON/OFF state of the stop switch 60, the memory area of the switch state flag indicating the ON/OFF state of the automatic settlement switch 62, and the setting indicating any value from 1 to 6 to be set. A storage area for value information, a storage area for RT status information indicating which RT status is in a plurality of RT statuses, a storage area for a specific condition device indicating the winning status of a specific condition device such as a bonus, etc. Game information storage area where information necessary to progress is stored, unused unused storage area, stack area storage area where data saved from registers is stored, temporary stack set when power is turned on There is an area storage area.

(interrupt processing)
In the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, non-maskable interrupts and maskable interrupts are provided as interrupt processing. A non-maskable interrupt is an interrupt that occurs when a signal is input to a specific terminal (NMI terminal) of the main CPU 105, and is executed with priority over a maskable interrupt.

When a non-maskable interrupt occurs, it executes power-off processing. Unlike non-maskable interrupts, maskable interrupts are processes that are executed periodically (2.235 milliseconds). When a maskable interrupt occurs, processes such as operation switch input check and timer measurement are executed. In the following description, interrupts that are not specifically described are maskable interrupts.

(RAM initialization processing)
The RAM is initialized at the time of setting change processing by the setting change means 112, at the time of power failure recovery processing, and at the start of each game. .

During the setting change process, if power-off recovery cannot be performed normally, or if recovery is not possible, data 0 is set (initialized) in the RAM area excluding the switch status flag storage area. In other words, only the switch state flag is taken over the state before the setting change. For example, the RT state and the condition device flag are cleared and not taken over.

Also, during the setting change process, either when the power failure recovery can be performed normally or when it is not in a non-restorable state, that is, when the setting change process is performed normally, the storage area of the switch status flag , set value information storage area, RT status information storage area, and the storage area of the specific condition device are stored. In other words, the RT state, the set value data, and the condition device flag are inherited so that the game can be played with the set values after the setting change while maintaining the game state before the setting change. The setting value data inherits the information before the setting change, and new setting values are set in subsequent setting change processing.

In addition, during power-off recovery processing, at the start of each game, data is stored in the stack area storage area excluding the unused storage area of the RAM area and the maximum use area at the time of power-off recovery when the RAM is initialized. Set to 0.

(power off recovery, power on)
In the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, when an event occurs in which the supply of power is interrupted, such as when the power switch 40 is turned off, or when the operating voltage for operating the slot machine 1 cannot be maintained due to a power failure or the like, the event is stored in the RAM. stored data is retained by the backup power supply. Then, when the power is turned on next time, the main control board 100 determines whether or not the data held in the RAM is normal. In this case, control is performed so that the state before the power failure is restored based on the data stored in the RAM.

When the setting is changed at power-on, the state before power-off is not restored, but only part of the information is retained and restored as another state (initialization). It should be noted that, although part of the information is retained at the time of setting change, all the information may not be retained.

(power-off interrupt processing)
In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the operating voltage of the slot machine 1 drops due to the occurrence of an event in which the power supply is interrupted. is detected, the power-off interrupt process is executed. When the voltage monitoring circuit 110 detects a power cutoff, a power cutoff signal is input to the NMI terminal of the main CPU 105, a non-maskable interrupt is generated, and power cutoff interrupt processing is executed by the non-maskable interrupt.

In the power-off interrupt processing, the state at the time of processing is retained, and when the power is turned on again, the processing to restore the state before the power-off includes clearing the output port, stopping interrupts, and registering saves the data stored in it, saves the interrupt status and stack pointer, calculates and saves the RAM checksum data, prohibits writing to the RAM, waits for reset, and so on. Without using non-maskable interrupts, it is determined whether a power-off signal is input from the voltage monitoring circuit 110 each time an interrupt process is executed periodically, and the signal is detected in successive interrupt processes. If a signal is detected twice in one interrupt process, it may be determined that a power failure has occurred, and power failure processing (power failure interrupt processing) may be executed.

(Recoverable error handling)
Recoverable errors include selector-related errors (medal retention error, medal backflow error, medal passing time error), hopper-related errors (hopper error, hopper empty error), door open error, harness missing error, etc. If the operation of the reset switch is accepted after removing it, the game can be resumed without turning on the power again. During the restorable error, in order to notify the player of what kind of error has occurred, the display device 32, payout number indicator, and various lamps display information about the error that has occurred. By stopping the progress of the game even during a recoverable error, damage to the manager of the game parlor can be suppressed even if an illegal operation is performed. The condition for recovering from a recoverable error may be other than acceptance of reset switch operation after removing the cause of the error, and an error recoverable without turning on the power again is called a recoverable error.

(Unrecoverable error handling)
In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when an unrecoverable error occurs, interrupts are prohibited, the progress of the game is restricted by clearing the output from the output port, etc., and the credit number indicator 26 displays a display corresponding to the type of error. It notifies that it is in a non-restorable state.

Also, if a recoverable error is set, the error will be cleared when the reset switch (not shown) is operated. Unrecoverable errors are not canceled just by turning them on. In this case, the unrecoverable error is canceled by performing the setting change process. When the power is turned on again in the event of an unrecoverable error, after a part of the power-on process is executed, the display of the unrecoverable error is repeatedly executed so as not to execute subsequent game processes.

As non-recoverable errors, if the number of bets at the lottery is out of the specified number, if the value is not within the normal range in the setting value error check, it is determined that the power supply shutdown processing was not performed normally when the power supply was restored. In some cases, when it is determined that there is a random number abnormality such as an abnormality in the frequency of the crystal oscillator 114, and in the winning determination process, the symbol combination corresponding to the combination that has not been won on the activated line is stopped.

(Game method, game flow)
In order to play a game on the slot machine 1, first, medals are inserted from the medal slot 17, or pre-stored medals are betted (MAX bet switch 18, 1 bet switch 19). Set the number of medals to bet. In this embodiment, three sheets are set as the prescribed number of sheets. By setting the number of medals to be bet, the activated line is set to be effective and the game becomes possible.

When medals are inserted from a new medal insertion slot in a situation where the number of medals to bet is set to the upper limit, the number of game medals (game value) stored in the credit increases. The maximum number of cards stored in the credit is 50. If medals exceeding the upper limit of the number of bets (3) and the upper limit of the accumulated amount (50) are inserted from the medal slot (54th medal), the blocker of the medal selector is turned off (when medals are inserted into the gaming machine) in a state to prevent it) and returned to the receiving tray. That is, the blocker is turned off when the number of bets is the upper limit and the number of accumulated credits is the upper limit.

When the sum of the number of bets (3) and the number of tokens stored (50) is less than 53, the game is in standby mode (from the end of the game to the next game). period until the start). For example, a symbol combination related to replay is displayed, and the requirement that medals can be inserted even during game standby after automatic betting processing is executed is satisfied.

Next, when the operation of the start switch 12 is accepted, the combination lottery process is executed, and after determining one combination lottery result (also referred to as a condition device number) as a result of the combination lottery process, the reels start rotating. The reel rotates downward within the display window 4, accelerates until the rotational speed of the reel reaches a predetermined speed (approximately 80 rpm), and then rotates while maintaining the speed (constant speed rotation). ).

Next, when the operation (stop operation) of any stop switch of the stop switch 13 (left stop switch 13a, middle stop switch 13b, right stop switch 13c) is accepted, according to the timing of accepting the combination lottery result and the stop operation The reel corresponding to the stop switch 13 operated by is stopped. When all the reels are stopped, it is determined whether or not each stop symbol determined at the time of receiving the stoppage of each reel is normal or not, and if not abnormal, a search is made for which symbol combination the stopped symbol combination is, and the search result is displayed. Depending on the relevant symbol combination, medal payout (including addition to credits), replay setting (automatic bet processing), bonus state setting, bonus state end, RT state setting, RT state end, etc. process.

(Freeze processing)
The freeze processing (also referred to as freeze effect) that delays the progress of the game by pausing it for a predetermined period of time includes, for example, acceptance of game media and acceptance of operation of a bet switch for determining the number of pre-credited game media to bet. , the function related to acceptance of the operation of the start switch 12 for starting the game or acceptance of the stop operation of the reels is temporarily stopped. The freeze process (freeze effect) is a process controlled by the main control board.

As the freeze effect, all the functions related to the progress of the game may be temporarily stopped, or only some of the functions may be temporarily stopped.

Modes for pausing the progress of the game include control processing based on the operation of the player (detection of insertion of game media by a passing sensor, processing for setting the number of bets based on operation of the bet switch, operation of the start switch 12, Based reel rotation processing or role lottery processing, reel stop processing based on the operation of the reel stop switch) is not performed.

When an input signal based on the player's operation is issued during the period in which the progress of the game is paused by the freeze effect, control processing based on the input signal is not performed, the input signal is not accepted, or the input signal is not received. By performing processing such as delaying the transmission until a predetermined period elapses, the end timing of one game is delayed as compared with the case where the freeze effect is not performed.

Regarding the freeze effect performed based on the operation of the start switch 12, when the start switch 12 is operated, the reels are not rotated for a predetermined period and the reels are rotated after a predetermined period. When is operated, the combination lottery and reel rotation are not performed for a predetermined period, and the combination lottery and reel rotation are performed after the predetermined period elapses, or when the start switch 12 is operated, the combination lottery is performed for a predetermined period. However, the reels are not rotated and the reels are rotated after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, or a predetermined period is set after the start switch 12 is operated and the winning lottery is performed, and the reels are rotated or stopped during the predetermined period. is performed.

Regarding the freeze effect performed based on the operation of the stop switch 13, as a result of the freeze effect performed based on the reception of the operation of the stop switch 13 and the operation of the stop switch 13, a specific symbol is stopped and displayed on the reel. In the freeze effect performed based on this, the control processing of the freeze effect is different.

The control processing of the freeze effect performed based on the reception of the operation of the stop switch 13 includes not performing the stop control processing of the spinning reels. As a result, the player cannot stop the spinning reels for a predetermined period of time. It is possible to delay the timing until the stop.

As a result of the operation of the stop switch 13, the control processing of the freeze effect performed based on the stop display of the specific symbol on the reel is that the specific symbol is displayed on the reel by operating the stop switch 13 other than the last stop switch 13. When the next stop switch 13 is stopped and displayed, the stop control of the next stop switch 13 is not performed, and when the specific pattern is stopped and displayed on the reel by the operation of the last stop switch 13, the next game is started. For example, the bet number setting process based on the operation of the bet switch, the insertion detection process of the game media by the passing sensor, or the control process based on the automatic bet process performed when the replay stops on the activated line are not performed.

During the predetermined period during which the freeze effect is performed, the game progress control based on the player's operation is temporarily stopped, but the gaming machine operation irrespective of the progress of the game can be executed. For example, the stop control processing based on the operation of the stop switch 13 is not performed, but the rotation mode of the reels can be set arbitrarily.

As the rotation mode of the reels during a predetermined period, the reels are rotated in a direction opposite to the normal rotation, the reels are rotated a predetermined number of symbols and a specific symbol combination is stopped, and a predetermined reel out of a plurality of reels is stopped. to bring another reel into a spinning state, change the rotation speed of a reel, or change the action of a reel due to the player's operation.

The predetermined period during which the freeze effect is performed can be changed according to predetermined conditions (player's operation, lottery, etc.). Here, the predetermined condition includes the detection of a signal based on the player's operation (the start switch 12, the bet switch, the stop switch 13, and the settlement switch) and the predetermined result of a lottery. Also, changing includes shortening or lengthening the suspension period.

Control processing for shortening the suspension period includes forcibly ending the suspension period or rewriting the suspension period to a period shorter than the suspension period. As control processing for lengthening the suspension period, adding another period after the suspension period, or rewriting the suspension period to a longer period. Further, the temporary stop period based on the freeze effect is not limited to a maximum time, but may be continued until a certain result is obtained based on the player's operation.

The pause period during which the freeze effect is performed may be set after the wait period has elapsed, or may be set including the wait period. If the wait period is included, determine whether the freeze effect will end during the wait period, and if it ends, set the freeze effect period after the wait period or the remaining wait period after the end of the freeze effect. An aspect of restarting is mentioned. Alternatively, such determination processing can be omitted by providing a freeze effect period longer than the wait period in advance.

As the freeze effect, a pseudo-game freeze effect as if a normal game is progressing can be mentioned. In the pseudo-game freeze performance, a freeze performance period is set from the start switch 12 reception processing based on the operation of the start switch 12 to the reel rotation start processing, and during the freeze performance period, the game starts like a normal game. Based on the operation of the switch 12, reel rotation control is performed, and based on the operation of the stop switch 13, reel stop control is performed. However, the combination lottery process based on the operation of the start switch 12, the winning determination process or the payout control process based on the operation of the stop switch 13 are not performed.

In the pseudo-game freeze effect, the motion of swinging up and down may be performed at the timing when the stop switch 13 is operated, the timing when a specific reel rotates, or the timing when all the reels are stopped. As a result, it is possible to suggest whether it is a normal game or a pseudo-game freeze effect.

(Setting changing means 112)
The setting change means 112 monitors whether or not the setting change mode is set, and determines one of the set values 1 to 6 (set values 1 to 6 on the display) when the setting change mode is set. A combination lottery table is provided in which the odds of winning a combination differ for each set value. After any setting value is determined, the winning probability combination lottery table corresponding to the determined setting value is continuously set until the setting value is changed by the setting change means 112 next time.

The setting change means 112 rotates the setting key used for setting change by the manager of the game arcade while the power of the slot machine 1 is not turned on, and rotates the setting key to a rotational position at which the setting key switch signal is turned on. When the power of the slot machine 1 is turned on in the held state, the setting key switch signal is turned on with the turning on of the power of the slot machine 1 as a trigger. In this embodiment, turning on of the setting key switch signal means rising on (turning from off to on). Since the rising on state is not detected, it is configured not to shift to the setting change mode. If the setting key is on when the power is turned on again, the setting change mode may be entered.

When the setting change means 112 determines that the setting key switch signal is on, the door opening signal is on, and the setting changeable flag is on, the setting value of the slot machine 1 can be changed. Invoke change mode.

The setting changeable flag switches between ON and OFF according to the game state. For example, when a bonus game or RT game is started, or when the start switch 12 is operated and medal reception becomes impossible, the setting changeable flag is turned off, and the bonus game or RT game is ended. When it becomes possible to receive medals, the setting changeable flag is turned on.

In this embodiment, the setting changeable flag is turned off at the start of the bonus game. The setting changeable flag may be kept ON only when

When the setting change mode is activated, a blocker provided in the medal selector 34 is turned off so that the game cannot be started by inserting medals. There are six levels of setting values that can be changed in the setting change mode, ie, "1", "2", "3", "4", "5" and "6". Set a role lottery table. As a result, the higher the set value, the higher the ratio (distribution rate) of the number of medals paid out to the number of medals bet in the entire game, so that the winning combination lottery table is advantageous to the player.

After activating the setting change mode, the current set value is determined. If the current set value is determined to be within the normal range, the set value is set, and if the current set value is determined to be out of the normal range, the set value is set to "1".

After starting the setting change mode, the segment indicator 64 and the LED are turned on to indicate that the setting change mode is set. Then, setting value display data for displaying the set values are set, and a credit amount indicator 26 arranged on the front surface of the front panel 2 of the slot machine 1 and a credit number indicator 26 arranged on the rear surface of the front panel 2 of the slot machine 1 are displayed. A setting display LED (not shown) is turned on to display the setting value. When the set value data is set to 6 levels from 0 to 5, the set value display when the set value data is "0" will display "1", and the set value display when the set value data is "1". will display "2", the set value display will display "3" if the set value data is "2", the set value display will display "4" if the set value data is "3", When the set value data is "4", the set value display displays "5", and when the set value data is "5", the set value display displays "6".

After starting the setting change mode, it continues to determine whether or not the start switch 12 sensor signal is on. is determined and the current set value is displayed on the setting display LED. On the other hand, when it is determined that the setting switch signal has turned on while the start switch 12 sensor signal has not been determined to be on, the setting switch start-up data is cleared and the current set value changes to the maximum set value ( If it is determined that the current set value is greater than or equal to the maximum set value (set value data "6"), the set value data is cleared (set value data "6") or more. data "1"), and if it is determined that the current set value is less than the maximum set value (set values "1" to "5"), the current set value is incremented. As for the processing of the setting change mode when the set value data is set in six stages from 0 to 5, it is determined whether or not the current set value is equal to or greater than the maximum set value (set value data "5"), When it is determined that the current set value is greater than or equal to the maximum set value (set value data "5"), the set value data is cleared (the set value data is set to "0") and the current set value becomes the maximum set value. When it is determined to be less than the value (set value "0" to "4"), the current set value may be incremented.

After that, the set value display data for displaying the set value data is set again, and the credit number indicator 26 arranged on the front of the front panel 2 of the slot machine 1 and the back of the front panel 2 of the slot machine 1 are arranged. The current setting value is displayed by lighting the setting display LED.

When it is determined that the start switch 12 sensor signal is on and the setting value is determined, it is continued to determine whether or not the setting key switch signal is turned off by rotating the setting key. When it is determined that the setting key switch signal is OFF, the determined setting value is stored in the main RAM 56, the obtained number display 27 and the setting display LED are turned off, and the blocker provided in the medal selector 34 is turned on. to end the setting change mode.

After activating the setting change mode, setting is changed without ending the setting change mode even if the setting key is rotated and the setting key switch signal is turned off in a state in which it is not determined that the start switch 12 sensor signal is on. maintain mode. When it is determined that the start switch 12 signal is on in this state, unrecoverable error processing is performed.

After starting the setting change mode, if the setting key is rotated without determining that the start switch 12 sensor signal is on, the setting key switch signal is turned off, and the setting switch is operated in this state. Perform normal set value change processing. After that, the setting key is rotated before the signal of the start switch 12 is turned on, the signal of the setting key switch is turned on, and when the signal of the start switch 12 is turned on, normal setting change mode end processing is performed.

Further, if it is determined that the setting key switch signal is on while the door open signal is off, there is a possibility that the slot machine 1 is malfunctioning or that a malicious third party is tampering with the setting key switch signal. When determining the value, by changing the setting value from the setting value after the change operation to "1" ("0" when the setting value data is in six stages from 0 to 5) and setting the setting value, the game A combination lottery table that is the most disadvantageous for players is set. When it is determined that the setting key switch signal is on when the door open signal is off, unrecoverable error processing may be performed.

The most disadvantageous combination lottery table is preferably the most disadvantageous combination lottery table among settable set values, but may be a special set value that is not normally set. At that time, the combination lottery table with special set values includes a combination lottery table that does not transition to an advantageous state (does not transition to a bonus game state) such as setting the winning probability of the bonus to 0, and a combination lottery table that does not shift to a bonus game state. An example is a combination lottery table set to the number of coins.

In this embodiment, in order to activate the setting change mode, it was necessary to turn on the setting key while power was not supplied. good. In this case, it is conceivable that the setting key switch is turned on when the power is on, the door open signal is on, and the reset/setting switch 38 is on. The condition is not limited to this example, and the setting key switch may be turned on under the condition that the power is on and a predetermined switch that can be operated only when the door is opened is turned on. This is because the door of the slot machine 1 is rarely in the open state during normal operation at the game arcade, and it is unlikely that the setting key switch inside the slot machine 1 is turned on when the door is closed. By adding the condition of turning on a switch that can not be operated at times, the purpose is to prevent accidental transition to the setting change mode during business of the game hall or unauthorized transition.

(Role lottery means 120)
The combination lottery means 120 is a means for performing a combination lottery that determines a combination or a loss as a lottery result from a combination lottery table using random numbers. A combination lottery is performed using a random number generated by a random number generator 122, and a flag corresponding to the combination determined in the lottery result of the combination lottery is set.

(type of role)
The types of wins provided in the slot machine 1 are roughly classified into bonuses, small wins, and replays.

A bonus means a feature that is activated in a predetermined case. Generally, it is activated when the symbol combination of "7-7-7" or "7-7-bar" is stopped and displayed on the effective line of the display window 4. FIG. Depending on the operation of the bonus-related accessory, the number of symbol combinations related to winning for each specified number is changed, or the conditional device activation probability of the symbol combination related to winning for each specified number is changed.

<RB>
RB is an abbreviation for regular bonus, and is also called a first class special bonus. RB is generally set as an end condition of obtaining 8 small wins or 12 game results, and during RB, RB middle win set higher than normal win lottery table winning probability of small win. A role lottery is performed using a lottery table.

<BB>
BB is an abbreviation for Big Bonus, and is also called a continuous operating device related to a first class special accessory. BB is set as a termination condition of paying out more than 285 game medals related to winning a small role, and during BB, a BB medium role lottery table in which the probability of winning a small role (to be described later) is set higher than that of a normal role lottery table. Perform a role lottery using In addition, it is not necessary to provide the BB middle winning lottery table during the BB. For example, the BB middle winning lottery table that continuously operates the RB middle winning lottery table described later until the end condition of the BB is satisfied may be called the BB middle winning lottery table.

<CB>
CB is an abbreviation for challenge bonus, and is also called a second type special accessory. The CB can be set in such a state that at least all minor winning combinations have been won regardless of the result of the winning combination lottery. Further, during CB, stop control different from normal stop control is performed for a predetermined reel. For example, it is conceivable to control the left reel 8a to stop within 190 milliseconds to 75 milliseconds.

<Control of PB≠1 in CB>
Since the CB is in a state where at least all of the small wins have been won as described above, the symbol combination that can be displayed according to the operation procedure may not be displayed (also referred to as a dropout). For example, during CB, by controlling the left reel 8a to stop within 190 milliseconds to 75 milliseconds, if it stops within 190 milliseconds, a specific pattern is placed on the effective line at any operation timing Although it could be displayed, if it stops within 75 milliseconds, there may be a case where a specific pattern cannot be displayed at a specific operation timing.

<MB>
MB is an abbreviation for middle bonus, and is also called a continuous operating device related to the second type special bonus. The MB is set as ending conditions such as payout of more than 153 medals associated with winning a small winning combination, winning of RB, or winning of SB, which will be described later.

<SB>
SB is an abbreviation for a single bonus, and is also called an ordinary accessory. The SB is set as an end condition that the result of one game is obtained. During the SB, the combination lottery is performed using the SB medium combination lottery table in which the winning probability of the small combination is set high for the common combination lottery table.

In the present embodiment, the BB uses the BB medium combination lottery table to perform the combination lottery, but the invention is not limited to this. A game may be played using a BB general role lottery table in which the winning probability of RB is increased together with the RB and a RB medium role lottery table in which the probability of winning a minor role is set higher than that of the normal role lottery table. Even in this case, the BB still sets a payout exceeding 285 medals for winning a small winning combination as an end condition. In addition, the special game control means 151 is a general term for those that control the bonuses.

A small combination is a combination of symbols based on the winning minor combination that is stopped and displayed on the active line, and when the winning determination means 140 (to be described later) determines that a prize has been won, medals are paid out based on the combination of symbols that have been stopped and displayed. is.

A replay is a combination in which a symbol combination based on a winning replay is stopped and displayed on an effective line, and the next game can be played without inserting medals when a winning determination means 140 determines winning.

In the lottery result of the combination lottery, when none of the bonus combination, the minor combination, and the replay combination are won, the winning process is not performed as described later. When the player loses, the combination of symbols that does not relate to any combination is stopped and displayed on the effective line.

Of the hands drawn by lottery, if the combination of symbols for BB, RB, and MB is not stop-displayed on the active line in the winning game, the winning flag can be carried over to the next game or later. It is possible (special role carry-over means 146). While the winning flag is being carried over, the combination lottery may be performed using the combination lottery table before the winning flag is carried over, or the combination lottery may be made using the carryover medium combination lottery table corresponding to the winning flag. When the combination of symbols based on the winning BB, RB or MB is stop-displayed on the active line while using the carryover middle role lottery table, it is determined that the shift condition of the role lottery table is satisfied, and the carryover middle role is determined. The lottery table is shifted to the combination lottery table corresponding to the winning flag.

(role lottery table)
Winning probabilities for a plurality of types of roles are determined in the winning combination lottery table, and a plurality of types of winning combination lottery tables are provided according to the game state. For example, it corresponds to a BB middle winning lottery table used during BB, an MB middle winning lottery table used during MB, and the like.

In the combination lottery table, there are lotteries for single winning combinations in which one type of symbol combination can be stopped and displayed on the activated line, and multiple winning combinations in which multiple symbol combinations can be stopped and displayed on one or more activated lines. Set according to the result.

A plurality of symbol combinations set as overlapping winning hands may be set so that one winning hand can be stopped and displayed according to the operation mode of all the symbol combinations, or some of the symbol combinations cannot be stopped and displayed. can be set to Of the multiple winning combinations, the combination corresponding to a part of symbol combinations that cannot be stopped may be referred to as a control combination.

As for the role of the control service, even if the same symbol combination can be stopped and displayed on the active line as a result of multiple lottery wins, the display will be stopped according to the type of control service set as a duplicate winning combination. It plays the role of being able to control the effective line to be different.

(Winning flag control means 148)
The winning flag control means 148 turns on a flag corresponding to the winning combination when any combination is won in the lottery result of the combination lottery. Then, when all the stop switches 13 are operated by the player to end the winning process for the winning combination, the flag corresponding to the winning combination is turned off.

In addition, regarding BB, RB and MB mentioned above, the flag is turned on in the winning game, but when all the stop switches 13 are operated, the winning BB, RB or MB symbol combination is the valid line. If it is not stop-displayed above, the flag is carried over from the next game onwards, the above-mentioned carry-over middle role lottery table is set, and the symbol combination of BB, RB or MB that wins is stop-displayed and won. The flag corresponding to BB, RB, or MB is turned off by completing the winning process for the role.

(RT)
In addition, an RT combination lottery table is provided in the combination lottery table. RT is an abbreviation for replay time, which is a gaming state in which the probability of winning a replay is different in a role lottery than in a normal role lottery table.

As a specific usage example of RT, the winning probability of replay may be increased by replacing the losing area of the normal combination lottery table with replay, or the replay area of the normal combination lottery table may be replaced with losing and replayed. You may make it reduce the winning probability of.
Further, although the area of the normal combination lottery table and the replay are the same, the types of replays to be won in the area of the replay may be made different.
The slot machine 1 is provided with a plurality of RT combination lottery tables, each of which is configured to shift to another RT state when a predetermined shift condition is satisfied.

The transition conditions for the RT combination lottery table are as follows.
1: When a specific symbol combination (symbol combination related to bonus, RT transition symbol combination) is stopped and displayed 2: When bonus is won 3: When BB, RB, or MB ends among bonuses 4: Specific symbol combination When the prescribed number of games have been played after (RT transition symbol combination) is stopped and displayed 5: When the prescribed number of games have been played after BB, RB, or MB is completed These RT role lottery table transition conditions can be appropriately set according to the playability.

In this embodiment, there are five RTs in total (non-RTs and RTs 1-3, during bonus operation: see FIG. 42). Non-RT, RT1, and RT2 can stay in a state where the bonus is not carried over (MB flag is off), and RT3 can stay in a state where the bonus is carried over (MB flag is on), and the bonus is activated. The inside can be stayed when the MB flag is ON and the symbol combination related to the MB is displayed. Hereinafter, non-RT, RT1, RT2 states are non-internal (also referred to as bonus non-internal, 2 type BB non-internal, or MB non-internal), RT3 state is internal (bonus internal, 2 type BB (also referred to as "inside" or "inside MB"), the state in which the bonus is in operation is described as "bonus", but this is not limiting and other cases may be provided. In this embodiment, the process of changing the state of the bonus or RT in the period from when all reels are stopped until the next game is started is described. can be In other words, it may be possible to directly shift to the bonus without going through the inside. In addition, when a type 1 BB is provided, the above-mentioned inside may also be referred to as a bonus inside, a BB inside, or a 1 type BB inside, and the above-mentioned non-inside may be called a bonus non-inside, or a BB non-inside. It may also be called internal medium or 1 type BB non-internal medium. Also, the state inside the bonus does not necessarily have to shift the RT, and the RT state in which the bonus was won may be continued. Hereinafter, unless otherwise specified, the inside of the bonus will be described as an expression with RT transition.

Each RT state can be shifted by satisfying any one of the conditions 1 to 5 described above.
For example, when the pattern symbol 01 (FIG. 42-1, FIG. 50) is stop-displayed in the non-RT and RT2 states, it is controlled to shift to RT1, and in the RT1 and RT2 states, the replay 05 (FIG. 42-2, FIG. 46) is stop-displayed, control is made to shift to non-RT, and when replay 06 (Fig. 42-3, Fig. 46) is stop-displayed in the RT1 state, control is made to shift to RT2, and non-RT , RT1 and RT2 states, when the lottery result is MB and the symbol combination regarding MB is not displayed (4 in FIG. 42, FIG. 46), control is made to shift to RT3, and the symbol combination regarding MB is displayed. (5 in FIG. 42, FIG. 46), control is made to shift to the bonus operation, and when the payout exceeds a predetermined number of payouts (here, 9) in the bonus operation state (Fig. 46) In 6) of 42, it is controlled to shift to non-RT.

In addition, not limited to conditions 1 to 6, it may be controlled to shift to non-RT by turning off the MB flag stored in the main memory. The flag may be turned off, or a combination of these may be used.

(set number)
The lottery placement numbers by the combination lottery means 120 will be described with reference to FIG.
Conditions for changing the lottery number include when the number of bets is different, when the set value is changed, and when a bonus game is in progress. The different numbers of bets refer to the three-bet game and the two-bet game, and all lottery numbers can be changed according to the bet number. The set value is a value for setting the total medal payout expected value determined by the hall manager in the business policy of the game machine, and is mainly provided in six stages from 1 to 6 (value of set value display data). . During the bonus game means that the lottery number can be changed by shifting to the bonus game. In addition, (*) described in RT2 in FIG. 44 is written as (*) in this embodiment because MB and replay-A condition device are elected at the same time, but even in RT2 There is no change in the winning probability of It is described that the MB and the replay-A condition device are simultaneously won during RT2. You may choose to be elected.

(Replay number change)
As for the lottery numbers, only the lottery numbers related to replay can be changed when the above-described conditions 1 to 5 are satisfied. For example, while the replay probability for non-RT and RT1 is 1/7.3, the replay probability for RT2 and RT3 is set to 1/1.5. As a result, it is possible to suppress the reduction of medals by playing the game in a state where the replay probability is high, and to add interest to the game.

(Reel control means 130)
The reel control means 130 controls to start rotating all (three) stopped reels (rotation control means 132) when the start switch 12 is operated, or the stop switch 13 is operated. is controlled to stop all rotating reels (stop control means 134). Furthermore, after the lottery result is determined by the role lottery means 120, the symbol control number corresponding to the lottery result of the game is referred to, the stop table corresponding to the symbol control number is selected, and at the operation timing of the stop switch 13 By determining the stop position of the corresponding reel and driving and controlling the stepping motor 66, each reel is controlled to stop at the determined stop position. Further, when the start switch 12 for the game is operated before a predetermined time (4.1 seconds in this embodiment) elapses immediately before the start of rotation of the reels in the previous game, the reel control means 130 determines that the predetermined time has elapsed. After that, the stepping motor 66 is controlled to rotate the reel.

(accelerated processing)
Acceleration processing is processing that is executed from a state in which reel rotation is stopped to a constant speed rotation processing. In the constant-speed rotation process, the stepping motor is moved one step for each interrupt process, but if the constant-speed rotation process is suddenly executed while the reel is stopped, there is a possibility of stepping out due to insufficient torque. get higher Therefore, an acceleration process is required to gradually rotate the reels. In the acceleration process of this embodiment, the stepping motor is first moved by one step after 50 interrupt processes, then the stepping motor is moved by one step after 30 interrupt processes, and then stepping is performed after 10 interrupt processes. Move the motor one step, then move the stepping motor one step after processing five interrupts, move the stepping motor one step after processing two interrupts, and turn the stepping motor after one interrupt processing. Move one step. After that, it is connected to a constant speed rotation process in which the stepping motor is moved by one step for each interrupt process.

(Constant speed rotation, stop control activation time)
The reel control means 130 performs constant speed rotation processing for maintaining the rotation speed of the reel at a constant speed, and deceleration preparation processing (also referred to as slip control) for moving to the stop symbol position when the stop switch 13 is operated. The reel is stopped at a predetermined stop position by performing deceleration control when the reel is moved to the stop symbol position. In this embodiment, the time during which the reel rotates at a constant speed is set to 80 rotations per minute, and control is performed to stop the reel within 190 milliseconds after the stop switch 13 is operated. In this embodiment, it is possible to pull in up to four symbols including the symbols existing in the display window 4 area when the operation of the stop switch 13 is accepted. For example, if the number 3 replay symbol is displayed on the active line corresponding to the first main reel, when the left stop button is operated to stop, a maximum of number 6 watermelon symbols including the number 3 replay symbol will be displayed. can be stopped.

(Slip control, kicking, retraction)
The slip control is control to rotate the reels to a stop position predetermined by the symbol control number based on the winning combination and the operation timing when the stop switch 13 is not stopped at the timing when the stop switch 13 is operated. The sliding control includes kicking control and pull-in control. Kicking control means that when there is a winning symbol not based on a winning combination on the effective line when the stop switch 13 is stopped, unlike the symbols related to the winning combination, medals are awarded. Since a payout is required, it is a control to rotate the reels so that symbols different from the winning combination do not stop on the activated line. For example, if there is a winning combination that is determined only by the stop display of the symbols attached to the left reel 8a, and the winning combination is not won, if the stop reception is performed on the effective line according to the stop reception position, it will be on the effective line. It refers to controlling so that the symbol is not stopped and displayed. The pull-in control means that when there is no symbol associated with winning based on the winning combination on the activated line when the stop switch 13 is stopped, and when it is possible to stop and display the symbols related to the winning combination on the activated line, the player wins. It refers to the control of rotating symbols related to a winning combination to a predetermined stop position. For example, when there is a winning combination whose winning is confirmed only by the stopped display of the symbols attached to the left reel 8a and the win is won for that winning combination, the symbols related to the selected winning combination exist outside the display window 4 and are valid from the stop acceptance position. When it is possible to stop-display on the line, it is controlled to stop-display on the effective line. note that. The rotation speed of the reel during the slip control is the same as that during the constant speed rotation process, and the process of moving the stepping motor by one step is executed for each interrupt process.

(symbol combinations that do not require technical intervention)
A symbol combination that does not require technical intervention means that even if the stop switch 13 is operated at an arbitrary timing while the reels are rotating, the symbol combination of the winning combination can always be stopped and displayed on the active line. It means possible. For example, when there is always a symbol related to the winning combination within the drawing range, even if the stop switch 13 is operated at an arbitrary timing, the symbol related to the winning combination can always be stopped and displayed on the effective line. It can be said that a symbol combination consisting of symbols relating to a winning combination is a symbol combination that does not require technical intervention. Hereinafter, the pull-in rate that does not require technical intervention is referred to as PB=1. For example, replays and bells are arranged at intervals of 3 frames for each pattern, so you can always draw them on the effective line.

PB≠1 means that when the stop switch 13 is operated at an appropriate timing while the reels are rotating, the symbol combination of the winning combination can be controlled to stop on the effective line without fail. means. For example, if there is a place where there is no pattern related to the winning combination within the drawing range, the symbols related to the winning combination cannot be stopped and displayed on the effective line unless the stop switch 13 is operated at an appropriate timing. It can be said that the drawing-in rate of symbols related to the winning combination is PB≠1. In other words, if the symbols related to the winning combination are separated from at most four symbols including the corresponding symbols in the display window 4 after the stop switch 13 is operated, it cannot be drawn. For example, watermelons and cherries that are not arranged at intervals of three frames cannot be pulled in, and therefore cannot be stopped and displayed on the effective line.

(Small win priority control, bonus priority control)
Priority control is to control so that when a plurality of conditional device flags are ON in the game, symbols related to predetermined conditional device flags are preferentially stopped and displayed on the active line. As a kind, there are small combination priority control and bonus priority control.

The minor combination priority control means that when the special combination carry-over means 146 is in the ON state of the condition device flag relating to the minor combination that cannot be carried over to the next game and the condition device flag relating to the bonus that can be carried over to the next game, To control to stop and display a pattern related to a small combination on an effective line when both a pattern related to a bonus and a pattern related to a small combination can be drawn onto an effective line at stop operation timing.

The bonus priority control is stopped when the condition device flag related to the minor combination that cannot be carried over to the next game and the condition device flag related to the bonus that can be carried over to the next game are in the ON state by the special combination carryover means 146. To control to stop and display a symbol related to a bonus on an effective line when both a symbol related to a bonus and a symbol related to a small win can be drawn onto an effective line at operation timing. For example, when the conditional device flag for a small win of PB=1 and the conditional device flag for a bonus of PB≠1 are on, if the stop operation timing is the timing at which the symbols related to the bonus can be drawn, the symbol combination related to the bonus is valid. Control to stop display on the line.

For priority control, when the conditional device flags for replay and small win, replay and bonus, or replay, small win and bonus are turned on at the same time, the relationship of stop priority is defined as follows. It is also possible to
Replay > Small role ≧ Bonus (Small role priority control)
Replay > Bonus ≧ Small win (Bonus priority control)
In this embodiment, since the minor winning combination priority control is adopted, when a small winning combination (winning-A1 to C6 conditional device) is won in the bonus, control is performed to preferentially display the symbol combination related to the minor winning combination. However, when the prize A1-condition device is won during the bonus, and the left stop switch 13a is first stopped at the position where the bell or BAR can be pulled in, the symbol combination BAR related to the small combination and the bonus is displayed. By controlling to pull in, even if the operation is performed in the correct operation order, it is possible to draw in either a bonus or a winning combination according to the operation timing, so that the game progresses without getting bored. can be made This is because the number of payouts for the symbol combination including the bell and the symbol combination including the BAR are the same, and therefore the priority for the minor combination is the same.
Not limited to this, even when a bonus and a small combination are won at the same time, the symbol combination related to the small combination may be preferentially displayed.

(Stop position determination table)
The stop position determination table is provided corresponding to the symbol control number determined by the result of the combination lottery by the combination lottery means 120, and predetermines the stop position of the reel corresponding to the operation timing of the stop switch 13. . The stop position determination table corresponds to a stop position determination table for BB winning, a stop position determination table for RB winning, an SB stop position determination table, a stop position determination table for winning a minor combination, and a stop position determination table for winning a replay.

The stop position determination table at the time of BB winning is when BB is won as a result of the winning lottery and only the condition device flag related to BB is on, or when BB is won as a result of the winning combination lottery before the game and the condition device related to BB. When the flag is carried over in the ON state, and when the result of the lottery for the role in the game is not won, the stop switch 13 is operated within the range where the symbols related to BB can be stopped on the activated line. , the stop position is determined in advance so that the symbols related to the BB are stopped and displayed on the activated line. When the stop switch 13 is operated within a range in which the symbols relating to the BB cannot be stopped and displayed on the activated line, the stop position is determined in advance so as to stop the symbols suggesting the winning of the BB. (BB reach eyes). In addition, when BB is won as a result of the winning combination lottery before the game and the condition device flag related to BB is carried over in the ON state, when the result of the winning combination lottery in the game is a small winning combination or a replay winning, the small winning combination is selected. Alternatively, a small winning combination or a replay is drawn in by replay priority control, but by performing a small winning combination or replay drawing control different from that when the BB is not won, a stop comet suggesting a BB winning can be stopped and displayed.

The stop position determination table at the time of RB win is when RB is won as a result of the winning lottery and only the condition device flag related to RB is in the ON state, or when RB is won as a result of the winning combination lottery before the game and the condition device related to RB. When the flag is carried over in an ON state, and when the result of the lottery for the role in the game is not won, and the stop switch 13 is operated within the range where the symbols related to RB can be stopped on the activated line. , the stop position is determined in advance so that the symbols related to RB are stopped and displayed on the activated line. When the stop switch 13 is operated within a range in which symbols relating to the RB cannot be stopped and displayed on the activated line, the stop position is determined in advance so that a symbol suggesting that the player has won the RB is stopped and displayed. (RB reach eyes). In addition, when RB is won as a result of the role lottery before the game and the condition device flag related to RB is carried over in the ON state, when the result of the lottery of the role in the game is a small win or a replay win, the minor win Alternatively, a small winning combination or replay is drawn in by replay priority control, but by performing a small winning combination or replay drawing-in control different from when the BB is not won, the stop dots suggesting the RB winning can be stopped and displayed.

The stop position determination table for winning a small combination is used when a small combination is won as a result of the lottery, and the stop position is determined in advance so that the symbols related to the small combination are stopped and displayed on the activated line. Further, when the symbol relating to the minor combination cannot be stopped and displayed on the activated line, stop control is performed to suggest that the minor combination has been won (small winning combination).

The replay win stop position determination table is used when a replay win is made as a result of a winning combination lottery, and the stop positions are determined in advance so that symbols relating to the replay are stopped and displayed on the activated line.

(Operation order detection means 138)
The operation order detection means 138 is managed by the main control board 100 and detects in which order the stop switches 13 operated by the player are operated. By transmitting the detected operation order of the stop switch 13 to the sub control board 1000, the sub outputs the corresponding image or sound. Specifically, the input port is checked in the interrupt processing of a predetermined period, and when the operation of the predetermined stop switch 13 is detected during the input port check, the detection result is transmitted to the main control board 100 or the sub control board 1000, The main control board 100 or the sub-control board 1000 detects the operation order based on the order in which the detection results regarding the operation switches are received. Note that "operation order" is synonymous with "push order".

(Operation order control)
The operation order control is predetermined according to the winning combination, and changes the stop position of the symbols according to the operation order of the stop switch 13 so as to change the combination of symbols to be stopped and displayed on the set effective line. It is to control. As a stop operation order pattern, there are six combinations of operation orders for the three stop switches 13 (left center right, left right center, center left right, center right left, right left center, right center left). It is also possible to perform control so that the combination of symbols to be stop-displayed differs according to the winning combination and the order of operation. As will be described later, it is also possible to change the combination of symbols to be stopped and displayed on the active line in accordance with the order of operation when multiple wins are made (number priority control, number priority control). It is also possible to vary the number of game media to be paid out according to the order of stop operations.

(Regarding priority control for attracting small wins)
When a small winning combination for which medals are paid out by winning a prize is won alone, and if the symbols related to the small winning combination can be pulled in, control is performed to pull in the symbols related to the small winning combination. In the case that multiple small wins are won, the symbol combinations corresponding to all the winning wins can be stopped and displayed on the active line, the symbol combinations corresponding to all the wins However, when a small combination and a bonus combination are won in duplicate, the above-mentioned small combination or bonus combination is preferentially stopped by priority control, and both are on the effective line at the same time. control so as not to stop display.
(Winning judgment means 140)
Winning judgment means 140 is a means for executing judgment processing (also referred to as winning judgment processing) as to whether or not a combination of symbols forming a winning combination has been stop-displayed on an activated line. It is a means for judging whether or not the stop pattern determined when the stop switch operation is accepted is abnormal or not, and the judging is not based on the combination of symbols actually stopped on the activated line. After the winning determination means 140 determines that there is no abnormality, winning processing is performed based on the symbol combination that is stopped and displayed, and if it is not determined that the combination of symbols that constitute the winning combination has been stopped and displayed on the activated line, the player loses. Perform processing based on

The winning process is a process of giving a privilege to the player based on the combination of symbols stopped and displayed on the activated line. Winning processing when a symbol combination based on a small winning combination is stopped and displayed includes payout of medals (payout means 142) based on the stopped-displayed symbol combination, and processing of shifting the game state based on the stopped-displayed symbol combination. Winning processing when the symbol combination based on the replay is stopped and displayed includes granting the right to replay and processing to shift the game state based on the symbol combination that is stopped and displayed, and the symbol combination based on the bonus is stopped and displayed. Winning processing at this time is processing of shifting the game state based on the symbol combination that is stopped and displayed.

However, without being limited to this, when the result of the winning determination means 140 is a loss, a winning process based on the losing process may be performed, and as a result of the winning process, a process may be performed in which no privilege is given to the player. Further, as the winning process based on the loss, the game state may be shifted according to the operation mode when the game is lost. For example, when all the stop switches 13 are operated in accordance with a predetermined operation order when losing, a transition to a game state with a different freeze winning probability can be mentioned. In addition, even in the case of an apparent loss due to the omission of a small winning combination, it is possible to carry out a prize winning process such as controlling the transition of the game state such as transition to the RT state without paying out. Furthermore, as a winning process based on a bonus, payout of medals (payout means 142) based on the stop-displayed combination of symbols or giving the right to replay may be added.

The process of transitioning the game state includes setting a combination lottery table according to the game state to be transitioned, setting reel control according to the game state to be transitioned, and setting a freeze winning probability according to the game state to be transitioned. or a combination thereof.

When the winning symbol combination is determined, the winning determination means 140 transmits to the sub-control board 1000 winning symbol combination information (stopped eye information) stopped and displayed on the active line and winning lottery result information. On the other hand, when the sub-control board 1000 receives these pieces of information, it can use the display device 32, the lamp, or the speaker S to output an effect corresponding to the winning symbol combination information and the combination lottery result information.

(Payout means 142)
The payout means 142 is a means for paying out predetermined medals in accordance with the winning minor combination when the winning judgment means 140 determines that the minor combination has won.

Winning judgment means 140 judges winning on all active lines, and when a plurality of symbol combinations based on overlapping winning combinations are stop-displayed on a plurality of active lines as a result of the judgment, the stop-displayed plurality of symbol combinations are displayed. Winning process is performed for each of the above.

For example, when a small winning combination with a payout number of 2 and a small combination with a payout number of 10 are stopped and displayed on a plurality of active lines, the winning processing is performed as a small winning combination with a payout number of 2. 12 coins are paid out by summing the number of coins to be paid out based on 10 and the number of coins to be paid out based on the set minor combination.

An upper limit is set for the number of payouts for one time, and when the upper limit of the number of payouts is exceeded when the combination of symbols based on a plurality of small wins is stopped and displayed on the effective line, the number of payouts of the upper limit is paid out. .

For example, when the upper limit of the number of payouts is set to 15, and the small winning combination with the number of payouts set at 12 and the small combination with the number of payouts set at 10 are stopped on a plurality of active lines. As the winning process, when the total value of the small winning combination of 12 coins and the small winning combination of 10 coins exceeds the upper limit value, the upper limit value of 15 coins is paid out.

In the present embodiment, medals are set to be paid out only for small wins, but medals corresponding to the number of bets may be paid out as prize-winning processing based on replay, or prize-winning processing based on bonuses may be set in advance. You may pay out as many medals as you have.

(Program start processing flow)
A program start process executed in the main control board 100 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

When the power is turned on, the main control board 100 performs initial settings regarding the operation of the gaming machine. Specifically, it performs RAM check processing for setting the interrupt mode, setting the functions of the main CPU, and creating power failure recovery data. In the RAM check process, it is determined whether or not the checksum of all RAMs is normal. If the condition is satisfied, the power failure recovery data is determined to be normal, and if the condition is not satisfied, the power failure recovery data is determined to be abnormal.

Next, the states of the setting key switch signal and the door open detection switch signal are checked to determine whether or not the setting key switch 37 and the door open detection switch are on.

When the setting key switch 37 and the door open detection switch are on, the setting change enable flag is set on to indicate that the setting change state is to be entered. Next, it is determined whether the power failure recovery data is normal or whether the recovery is possible. If the power-off restoration data is normal or in a restorable state, then it is determined whether or not a setting changeable flag indicating whether or not the setting can be changed is on. If the setting changeable flag is ON, the process proceeds to setting change processing in FIG. Also, if the power failure recovery data is abnormal or cannot be recovered, the setting change process is similarly performed. Then, after the setting change process, the main game progress shown in FIG. 29 is entered.

If the setting key switch 37 and the door open detection switch are not on and if the setting changeable flag is off, it is determined whether or not the power failure recovery data created in the RAM check process is normal. If the power-off recovery data is abnormal, an error is reported and the progress of the game of the slot machine 1 is stopped to shift to non-recoverable error processing. On the other hand, if the power failure recovery data is normal, the power failure recovery process of FIG. 28 is performed. Then, after the power-off recovery process, the main game progress shown in FIG. 29 is entered. After the power-off recovery process, the game is restarted from the state before the power-off occurred, so the process is not necessarily executed from the beginning of the main game progress.

In the non-recoverable error processing, interrupts are prohibited, and the output of the output port (the output of the sub-control command, the output of the excitation signal to the stepping motor 66, etc.) is cleared. Then, the display (notification) of the error is repeated on the obtained number display 27 .

(Description of power-off processing)
Power-off processing executed in the main control board 100 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the power-off process, the output port is cleared, interrupts that are periodically executed are prohibited, and the interrupt disable/enable state at power-off is saved. Next, the used registers are saved and the stack pointer is saved. When the data is saved, the power-off processing completed flag indicating that the power-off processing has been performed is turned on and saved, and the checksum data of all the RAM areas is calculated and saved. Then, writing to the RAM is prohibited, and the system waits for a reset. The address range of the stored stack pointer, presence or absence of a power-off processing completed flag, and whether or not the checksum of all RAM areas is normal are determined by appropriate power-supply interrupt processing by the power-supply interrupt means 144 at the time of power-on processing. Check to determine if it was cracked.

(Description of interrupts)
Interrupt processing that occurs periodically (for example, every 2.235 milliseconds) in the main control board 100 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

When interrupt processing is started, the necessary data stored in the register is compared, and when a power-off detection signal is received, power-off processing is executed, and the input port that determines the input of various sensors and operation switches is read. Then, various timers (freeze period measurement timer, wait period measurement timer, etc.) are measured, and as reel drive control, each reel is accelerating, constant speed, starting deceleration, decelerating, or stopping. It performs control according to the drive state and updates the drive state. Next, port output processing is performed to create and output data (excitation signal to the stepping motor 66, hopper drive signal, etc.) to be output for each output port, and to check whether or not various abnormalities have occurred. Various kinds of abnormalities include whether or not the current set value is a normal value, and whether or not the operation pattern of the input/discharge sensor is normal. Next, an external signal is output to set (on/off control) an external signal such as a bonus signal, an ART signal, a security signal, a medal insertion signal, and a medal payout signal to be output to an external system such as a hall computer (S304).

Next, if there is a sub-control command set in the control command transmission process, it outputs the sub-control command to the sub-control board 1000, controls the lighting of various LEDs, and sub-controls such as stop switch operation sound and medal insertion sound. The interrupt processing is terminated by outputting notification data to be transmitted to the board, outputting a signal related to the performance test, restoring the register, and saving the interrupt permission flag to ON.

(Description of power failure recovery processing)
Power-off recovery processing executed in the main control board 100 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the power-off recovery process, the stack pointer is recovered, and the output data related to the sub-control command to be transmitted to the sub-control board 1000 is recovered. After that, it is determined whether or not the set value data is within the normal range. As a result of the judgment, if it is abnormal (the value is out of the defined range), it shifts to unrecoverable error processing. On the other hand, if normal (within a defined range of values), an unused RAM area is initialized, a periodically executed interrupt is activated, and the input port is read. After that, the power-off processing completion flag is cleared, the used registers are restored, and the interrupt prohibition/permission state at the time of power-off is restored, and the power-off recovery processing is completed. It should be noted that when the power failure return processing is completed, the state before the power failure occurs is restored, and if it does not return (at the time of setting change), the game progress main control processing is performed from the beginning.

In the above embodiment, the interrupt is activated at a predetermined timing during the power-off recovery process, but the interrupt may be activated during the program start process.

(Description of main game progression)
A game progress main control process executed by the main control board 100 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

The main control board 100 refers to the value of the freeze effect number stored before the previous game, and executes the freeze effect when the stored freeze effect number corresponds to the number to execute the freeze effect, and saves the freeze effect. If the freeze effect number provided does not correspond to the number to execute the freeze effect, the process proceeds to the next process without executing the freeze effect. It may be configured so that the freeze effect number is not saved when the freeze effect is not executed. may be configured.

Next, when game medals are inserted from the medal insertion slot 17, the number of bets or the number of credits is updated (game medal insertion processing). Next, it is determined whether or not the number of bets enabling the game to be executed has been placed, and if it is determined that a bet has been placed, it is determined whether or not the start lever has been operated, and if it is determined that no bet has been placed Waits for insertion of game medals or reception of operation of the bet switch if it is stored in credits (in the case that it is stored in credits). If the number of bets that allows the game to be executed has been placed and the start lever is operated (the start switch signal is determined to be ON), internal lottery processing is performed and the start lever is not operated (start switch If the signal is not determined to be on), wait for the reception of the operation of the start lever.

In the internal lottery process, the internal lottery random numbers are generated and acquired, and a predetermined arithmetic process is executed to determine the winning combination (condition device number). After determining the winning combination, a stop control table corresponding to the stop timing of each stop switch is created in advance, and stop control is executed even if the stop switch operation is accepted immediately after allowing the stop switch operation acceptance after reel rotation. be as prepared as possible.

Next, it is checked whether the minimum playing time (equivalent to 4.1 seconds) set in the previous game has passed. If it is determined that the minimum playing time has passed (if it is determined that the value of the minimum playing time timer is 0), the minimum playing time is newly set, and if it is not determined that the minimum playing time has passed ( If it is not determined that the value of the minimum game time timer is 0), it is checked whether or not the minimum game time has passed after decrementing the value of the minimum game time timer. This minimum game time check process is executed until it is determined that the minimum game time has passed, and other processes are executed as the game progress main process between the process of determining the minimum game time and the process of newly setting the minimum game time. configured not to. As a result, since the minimum game time is not extended by other processes, the game time of the player can be made available as soon as possible. That is, it is possible to prevent the game from being delayed without making the player wait.

However, the present invention is not limited to this, and another process may be executed as the game progress main process between the process of determining the minimum playing time and the process of newly setting the minimum playing time. Other processing in this case may be processing for clearing the RWM address, processing for storing other data in the RWM, or other instructions with a short processing time. Since the processing time for these processes is extremely short, the extension of the minimum playing time cannot be experienced by the user. After newly setting the minimum playing time, reel rotation start preparation processing is executed.

In the reel rotation start preparation process, the data relating to the spinning reel stop saved in the previous game is initialized, the stop table used in the current game is set, the rotation start output of all reels is requested, and the reel rotation start is started. Set the sub-control command (reel rotation start command) shown.

After the reel rotation start preparation process is completed, a process relating to a freeze effect (for example, a reel effect before reel rotation) is executed. In the freeze effect, the reels are slightly moved or reversely rotated, mainly to indicate the degree of expectation of the winning combination.

When the freeze effect is not executed, or after the freeze effect is executed and the execution of the freeze effect ends, a process of rotating the reels is executed. There are four reel rotation states: an acceleration state, a constant speed state, a stop preparation state, and a stop state. When the reel is rotated, the acceleration state is set. In the acceleration state, the stepping motor is gradually rotated by interrupt processing.

As described above, if the constant-speed rotation process is suddenly executed while the reel is stopped, there is a high possibility of stepping out due to insufficient torque. Therefore, an acceleration process is required to gradually rotate the reels. In the acceleration process of this embodiment, the stepping motor is first moved by one step after 50 interrupt processes, then the stepping motor is moved by one step after 30 interrupt processes, and then stepping is performed after 10 interrupt processes. Move the motor one step, then move the stepping motor one step after handling five interrupts, move the stepping motor one step after handling two interrupts, and turn the stepping motor after one interrupt handling. Move one step. After that, the process is connected to a constant speed rotation process in which the stepping motor is moved by one step for each interrupt process.

When constant-speed processing is being executed, the value of the above-described rotation failure detection counter is incremented for each interrupt processing to detect rotation failure. Since the initial value of the rotation failure detection counter is set to 0, it is incremented for each interrupt processing. , 0, it may be determined that the rotation failure is detected. In addition, in the constant speed state, the stop acceptance of the stop switch is permitted, and the operation of the stop switch is waited. When the stop acceptance of the stop switch is permitted, the lamp of the stop switch is lit in blue to inform the player that the stop switch is valid (when the stop acceptance of the stop switch is not permitted, the red light is lit). The lighting control of the stop switch lamp may be performed by the main control means or by the sub-control means. Further, as lighting control of the lamps of the stop switches, when executing push order navigation, the lamps of the stop switches may be flashed so that the player can easily recognize the stop switch to be stopped. .

Also, a command indicating that the reel has started rotating is transmitted to the sub-control means, and when the sub-control means receives the command, a reel rotation time measurement timer for measuring the rotation time of the reel is set and counting is started. . Then, when the value of the reel rotation time measurement timer reaches a predetermined value (time equivalent to 3 minutes), the message "Please stop the reels" (reel stop warning image) is displayed on the liquid crystal to prompt the player to rotate the reels. encourage rotation. The reel rotation time measurement timer is initialized when the stop switch is operated (when the stop switch operation is accepted), and if there is a reel that is still spinning, it counts again. In this way, the reel rotation time measurement timer continues to be updated until all the reels are stopped. In addition, when the reel stop warning image is displayed at the same time as the push order navigation, by displaying it in front of the push order navigation, even if the display areas of the reel stop warning image and the push order navigation overlap, the reel The visibility of the stop warning image is ensured, and the player can be clearly urged to operate the stop switch. Also, at this time, the push order navigation becomes difficult to see and there is a risk that it will be difficult to know which reel to stop, so by operating the sub switch, the reel stop warning image is erased (or the reel stop warning image is reduced or reduced). Alternatively, it may be moved) so that the push order navigation can be recognized.

After enabling reception of operation of the stop switch in the game progress main processing, determination processing of reception of operation of the stop switch (reel stop reception check processing) is repeated until the stop switch is operated. When it is determined that one of the stop switches has been operated, stop control of the reel corresponding to the operated stop switch is executed. At this time, the reel corresponding to the operated stop switch shifts from the constant speed state to the stop preparation state, and rotates the reel to the target stop position while rotating at the constant speed. Then, when it reaches the target stop position, it shifts to a stop state, and all the four-phase excitations are turned ON to apply the brakes. Here, the target stop position is determined by whether or not the pattern number currently passing and the pattern number saved as the stop position match. All 4-phase excitation is turned ON as a position. Also, the pattern number currently passing means that the initial pattern number is set at the moment the index sensor detects the index (when the index signal rises). It is judged by setting the pattern number next to the number. In other words, if a rotation failure occurs with respect to a predetermined reel during reel rotation, and then the predetermined reel is stopped, the rotation failure is not detected (for example, if the index sensor stops before detecting the index). , it may be judged that the pattern number currently passing and the pattern number saved as the stop position match, and in that case the pattern combination on the reel display window will be misaligned (irregular). may stop. However, even in this case, in the winning judgment process, the winning judgment is executed using the symbol number saved at the time of acceptance of stop, not the actually stopped symbol, so that the result of the game will not be different from the result of the lottery. configured to prevent

After executing the reel stop acceptance check process, it is checked whether all the reels are stopped. When all the reels are stopped, the process proceeds to the prize giving process, and when all the reels are not stopped, the process of waiting for stop operation reception of the stop switch corresponding to the rotating reel is executed. Then, after all the reels have stopped, the contents displayed on the status display monitor are updated, and the process proceeds to advantageous section clear counter management processing. Then, a game end check process for updating the RT status, etc. is performed, and a series of main flow of the game progress is finished. Note that the software random number update process may be performed during the period from when the reel starts to rotate until the stop operation is received.

(setting change processing)
A setting change process executed in the main control board 100 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

When the setting change mode starts, it determines whether the current set value is within the normal range.If it is within the normal range, the current set value is obtained. Save "1" and get the setting value "1".

After acquiring the setting value, the setting value display data is saved (S1405). After saving the setting value display data, the lighting control is performed by referring to the setting value display data every 5 interrupts by dynamic lighting control which is interrupt processing.

After that, it is determined whether or not the start switch 12 has been turned on from off. When it is determined that the start switch 12 has not turned on from off, it is determined whether or not the setting switch has turned on from off.

Here, when it is determined that the setting switch has not turned on from off, it is determined again whether or not the start switch 12 has turned on from off, and when it is determined that the setting switch has turned on from off, Determine whether or not the set value is greater than or equal to the maximum set value (setting 6).

If the set value is not greater than the maximum value, increment the current set value. conduct. After incrementing the setting value, the process returns to S1404 to display the updated setting value.

After that, when the start switch sensor is detected and it is determined that the start switch 12 has been turned on from off, the setting value is determined, and the setting key switch is waited until it is determined that the setting key switch has been turned off from on. The set value is saved when it is determined that is turned off from on.

(Advantageous section clear counter management process)
Advantageous section clear counter management processing relating to the management of advantageous sections, among the processes that are mainly executed in the course of the game, will be described.

First, the current value of the advantageous section clear counter is decremented by 1, and it is determined whether the value of the advantageous section clear counter before the subtraction is 0 or not. When it is determined that the value of the advantageous section clear counter before subtraction is 0, it is next determined whether the advantageous section flag is 1 or not. The advantageous section flag corresponds to the game state. When the advantageous section flag is 1, it is an advantageous section, and when the advantageous section flag is 0, it is a normal section. When the advantageous interval flag is determined to be 1, it indicates that it is decided to shift from the current game to the advantageous interval, so 1500 is stored in the advantageous interval clear counter. 1500 stored in the advantageous section clear counter corresponds to the maximum number of games that can be played in the advantageous section, and when the advantageous section is played 1500 times at maximum, the normal section is set from the next game. This is for the purpose of preventing addiction, suppressing the state in which the number of medals continues to increase throughout the day, and not significantly fueling the gambling spirit. As for the timing of setting the advantageous section flag to 1, the advantageous section transition lottery process is performed between the reception of the start switch and the start of rotation of the reels. Advantageous zone transition lottery processing is a process that is passed when the condition device number to be the target of the lottery is selected. , the advantageous section flag is set to 0 (normal section). In this embodiment, the advantageous section transition lottery is a process that is executed only in the normal section. It is also conceivable to execute the advantageous section transition lottery during the advantageous section. In this case, if the advantageous section transition lottery is won, the advantageous section flag is set to 1, but if the advantageous section transition lottery is not won, the current flag is maintained (if the advantageous section flag is 1, the If the interval flag is 0, 0 is maintained). When the advantageous section flag is updated from 1 to 0, it is updated by the parameter initialization processing when the advantageous section shifts to the normal section.

When it is determined that the value of the advantageous section clear counter before the subtraction is 0 and the advantageous section flag is not 1, the advantageous section clear counter management process is terminated because it is in the normal section.

When it is determined that the value of the advantageous section clear counter before subtraction is not 0, it is determined whether or not the value of the advantageous section clear counter is 0 after subtraction. When it is determined that the value of the advantageous section clear counter after the subtraction is not 0, it is during the advantageous section (other than the final game), so the MY counter is changed from OUT (payout of the game) to IN (bet of the game). The difference in the number of sheets is added to the MY counter. When the value of the MY counter after addition becomes a negative value, the initial value (0) is saved. Here, the MY counter counts an increased value starting from the point where medals have decreased the most during the advantageous interval, and is always 0 while the medals decrease during the advantageous interval. (For example, if the MY counter value is 0 and the game is executed with 3 bets and the game is lost, the counter value will be -3, but if the counter value becomes a negative value, 0). In addition, even if a small win happens to be won and the MY counter reaches 10 (10 small wins), the value of the MY counter becomes 0 if the deviation continues for 5 games (three coins are inserted per game). there is Then, when the value of the MY counter exceeds 2400 (if the value of the MY counter is exactly 2400, the game is not terminated), even if the advantageous interval clear counter is not 0, the advantageous interval is terminated. When the value of the MY counter exceeds 2400, all parameters affecting the performance of the pointing function are updated to 0. The parameters that affect the performance related to the instruction function include the number of AT games and the game state related to AT. Then, by updating the advantageous section flag to 0, a transition is made to a normal section that is not an advantageous section, and this process ends. When the value of the MY counter is 2400 or less, this process is terminated while maintaining the advantageous section. In this embodiment, if a replay is won during the advantageous period, the MY counter update process is not executed, but the process of determining whether the MY counter exceeds 2400 is passed. In the case of replay, OUT-IN is always 0 because the same number of bets as the inserted number is automatically betted. However, there is a possibility that the value of the MY counter will be updated at a timing different from the original processing due to noise or fraud, so it is determined whether or not the MY counter has reached the upper limit even during replay.

In addition, the advantageous interval can be terminated at any timing for each gaming machine other than the lapse of 1500 games or exceeding MY2400. For example, when winning a final lottery when a predetermined combination is won, or when an arbitrary number of games (less than 1500 games) are executed. In this way, when the advantageous interval is terminated with an arbitrary termination opportunity, the value of the advantageous interval clear counter is set to 1 before the advantageous interval clear counter management processing is executed (it is desirable that the AT-related processing is executed after all reels are stopped). By setting , when the advantageous interval clear counter management process is executed, the advantageous interval clear counter is 1 before the subtraction of the advantageous interval clear counter and 0 after the advantageous interval clear counter is subtracted. can be terminated. That is, after setting the value of the advantageous interval clear counter to 1, by subtracting 1 from the counter value, the value of the advantageous interval clear counter becomes 0 and the advantageous interval can be terminated. This makes it possible to perform processing within the same module without using a separate advantageous section termination module when an arbitrary termination condition is achieved.

Further, the advantageous interval clear counter subtraction processing in the advantageous interval clear counter management processing is configured to be executed in any game state in any number of bets (when a plurality of prescribed numbers are set for the gaming machine). there is

(Direction)
The sub-control means 1101 is provided with an effect control means 1110 and the like, and the effect control means 1110 controls the output of the effect via the above-described display device 32 and the like. A performance control means 1110 selects and outputs a performance by lottery using software random numbers based on the lottery result of a role lottery by a lottery lottery means 120 triggered by the operation of the start switch 12 for each game. Also, with the winning combination as an opportunity, there is a case where an effect called a continuous effect, which is related to a plurality of games, is performed.

The effect control means 1110 selects the contents of the effect based on the lottery result of the role by the role lottery means 120 . In this embodiment, a plurality of types of effect contents are provided in advance, and the effect control means 1110 performs a lottery using a software random number after the lottery for the role is performed by the role lottery means 120 at the start of the game. Select the contents of the production by .

In addition, a plurality of types of effects are provided according to not only the result of the combination lottery but also the result of the freeze lottery, the game state (RT state, freeze state), and the like. More specifically, a plurality of types of presentation contents are provided corresponding to bonus wins, small win wins, replay wins, non-win wins, and the like.

As the game progresses, the content of the production is at what timing (when the start switch 12 is operated, when each stop switch 13 is operated, etc.) and what kind of production is output (how the lamp is lit, It determines whether to flash or turn off, what kind of sound to output from the speaker S, what kind of image to display on the display device 32, etc.).
Then, the effect output control means 1002 controls the effect control means 1110 to output the effect from the effect output device at a predetermined timing according to the selected effect contents.
BL boards 1018a, 1018b, and 1018c are provided for controlling illumination of the lamps from the back of the symbols in order to make the symbols attached to the reels easier to see.

(Production by player's operation)
Moreover, it is also possible to generate an effect output by the effect control means 1110 according to an operation by the player. For example, the start switch 12, the stop switch 13, the medal insertion slot 17, the bet switch (MAX bet switch 18, 1 bet switch 19), the settlement switch, etc., for which operation signals are input to the main control board 100, are operated according to the operation signals. It is conceivable that an effect is generated by the effect control means 1110 of the sub-control board 1000 based on the sub-control command transmitted from the control board 100, and the sub-switch 20 and the sub-cross for which the operation signal is input to the sub-control board 1000. It is also conceivable that the sub-control board 1000 directly generates an effect according to the sub-input switch operating means 1008 such as the key switch 21 .

(Movable object 72)
The game machine has a movable object control means 1010 for controlling a movable accessory in addition to the effect output by the display device 32, the lamp, and the speaker S. Specifically, a shutter is placed in front of the display device 32, and the operation of the shutter serves to liven up the game. Another example is that the lamp or the speaker S is moved.

(AT)
AT is an abbreviation for assist time, and is also called a notification period, and is a period (hereinafter referred to as notification) for facilitating the winning of a winning combination by a winning combination lottery. In general, the means for notifying in the AT includes the operation timing of the stop switch, the operation order of the stop switch, the operation timing and the operation order, and is also called an operation procedure or an operation mode (hereinafter referred to as an operation procedure). Generally, the target of notification is a symbol combination that can give an advantageous result to the player, among a plurality of symbol combinations included in the winning combination. For example, it is possible to win a symbol combination that gives the most medals in a small combination, and a symbol combination that is more advantageous than the current combination lottery table (higher probability of winning in replay) in replay.

(Mainly manage AT)
In the past, when ATs were managed on the sub side, fraudulent acts (such as unauthorized access to the harness that electrically connects the main and the sub, unauthorized access to the sub side's electronic parts, etc.) In order to improve the performance, the design of the mechanism was devised, but the development cost was increasing. By managing the AT on the main side, it is possible to reduce costs and improve security.

(instruction monitor)
During the AT, when announcing the information on the operation procedure for the winning hand, the operation procedure information may be announced using the win number indicator. Specifically, "1" is displayed on the instruction monitor in the case of pushing order A (left, middle, right correct), and "2" is displayed on the instruction monitor in the case of pushing order B (left, right, middle, correct). In the case of push order C (middle right left correct), "3" is displayed on the instruction monitor, and in the case of push order D (middle right left correct), "4" is displayed on the instruction monitor, and push order E (right left In the case of the middle correct answer), "5" is displayed on the instruction monitor, and in the case of the pushing order F (right middle left correct answer), "6" is displayed on the instruction monitor.

With such a configuration, the player can know the correct pressing order by checking the instruction monitor. In addition, since the instruction monitor is controlled by the main control board, it is possible to accurately notify the pressing order even if the sub-control board is illegally modified.

Also, when the indication monitor is used also as the acquired number display, the above-described numbers (1 to 6) may be displayed in the lower digits, and "=" may be displayed as the identifier in the upper digits. In this case, the identifier can be used to determine whether the winning number indicator displays the winning number or the pressing order, so that the player's recognition is not hindered.

Also, when the instruction monitor is configured as a dedicated display, a 3-digit 7-segment display may be used. The reason for using three digits is that it corresponds to the number of reels. Then, in the case of push order A (left, middle, right correct), "123" is displayed on the instruction monitor, and in the case of push order B (left, right, middle, correct), "132" is displayed on the instruction monitor, and the push order is displayed. In the case of C (middle left right correct), "213" is displayed on the instruction monitor. In the case of , "231" is displayed on the instruction monitor, and in the case of pushing order F (right, middle, left correct), "321" is displayed on the instruction monitor. With such a configuration, it becomes easier to intuitively grasp the pressing order of the instruction monitor, and the player can easily grasp the correspondence relationship between the pressing order and the display of the instruction monitor.

The timing for displaying the pushing order on the instruction monitor is any period from when the pushing order is won by an internal lottery executed based on the operation of the start switch to when the stop switch becomes operable. is preferably the timing of With such a configuration, the pressing order can be notified before the player operates the stop switch, so it is possible to prevent the stop operation from being performed in an incorrect pressing order.

(Grouping of alternative roles)
In order to prevent the operation procedure information from being illegally acquired even when the AT is not in progress due to the fraudulent act described above, it is conceivable to classify the information transmitted from the main to the sub at the time of winning a winning combination. Specifically, group information (also referred to as performance group number) indicating that the selected hand is won is transmitted when the selected hand is won during non-AT, and operation procedure information is transmitted in addition to the group information during AT. As a result, on the sub side, it is unclear which operation procedure is used to display a symbol combination advantageous to the player during non-AT, and since operation procedure information is transmitted during AT, the liquid crystal display device on the sub side and the operation of the sub side are unknown. The operation procedure can be notified by the indicator lamp. As a result, the player can easily recognize the operation procedure combination by checking the liquid crystal display device, and can suppress illegal acquisition of the operation procedure information during non-AT.

(Normal section)
A normal section is a section in which processing related to the instruction function cannot be performed. When winning in the order of pushing in the normal section, a process of transmitting masked information (performance group number) indicating which order of pushing was won to the sub-control means is executed. In addition, when winning the pushing order in the normal section, notification of the pushing order (both the correct pushing order and the incorrect pushing order) is not displayed on the instruction monitor. As a result, in the normal section, both the main control means and the sub-control means do not notify the pushing order even if the pushing order is won, so even if the pushing order is won in the normal section, it is not always clear whether the answer is correct or incorrect. It has become.

(advantageous section)
An advantageous section is a section in which processing related to the instruction function can be executed. Advantageous sections are provided in order to suppress excessive medal acquisition by the AT. If you win the advantageous section transition lottery executed in the normal section, you can shift to the advantageous section. In the advantageous section, a lottery to transfer to AT can be held, but in order to suppress the above-mentioned excessive medal acquisition, it is designed so that the advantageous section ends based on certain conditions and shifts to the normal section. ing.
in particular,
1) When 1,500 games have been played from the next game after shifting to one advantageous section 2) When 2,400 or more medals are obtained from the next game after shifting to one advantageous section 3) When any condition is satisfied are mentioned. By these means, excessive acquisition of medals can be suppressed. Incidentally, the optional condition of 3) includes, for example, when one AT is finished, when a specific symbol combination is displayed, and the like.

(advantageous section ramp)
An advantageous section lamp is provided as information indicating on the main side that the vehicle is staying in an advantageous section. As a result, when the player confirms whether or not he/she is staying in the advantageous section, he/she can easily judge by lighting/non-lighting of the advantageous section lamp. Specifically, when the DP on the credit display 26 is lit, it indicates that the player is staying in the advantageous section, and when the DP on the credit display 26 is off, the player is not staying in the advantageous section. It is shown that. In addition, the lighting timing of the advantageous section lamp is after all reels stop, after all reels stop, after accepting bet switch operation, when inserting the first medal is detected, and when the second medal is not maintained. Examples include after insertion, after inserting the third medal for maintenance, after accepting the start switch, and after winning a role by internal lottery. In addition, as a condition to always light up, if you are staying in an advantageous section, and if you notify the operation procedure information of the choice hand and the ball output rate (maximum ball output rate) of the information game exceeds 1 ( increase). In addition, it is configured to light up the advantageous zone lamp even when announcing the RT transition pushing order to an RT with a high replay probability although the ball payout rate does not exceed 1 because the pushing order small combination is not installed in the specifications. ing. This is to inform the player that the state is advantageous to the player by means of the advantageous section lamp, and is intended to prevent the player from suffering damage due to ignorance of the specifications of the gaming machine.

Note that if the condition for always lighting the advantageous section lamp as described above is not satisfied, there is no problem even if the timing for lighting the advantageous section lamp after the transition to the new advantageous section is arbitrary.

In addition, if the advantageous section lamp is lit once, it will continue to be lit until the advantageous section ends, and before accepting the operation of the start switch for the next game after the advantageous section has ended (after all reels stop or , after receiving the bet switch operation, when detecting the medal inserted in maintenance that will be the first bet, detecting the medal inserted in maintenance that will be the second bet, or when the third bet is detected The advantageous section lamp is turned off at the time of detection of medals that have been put in for maintenance). With this configuration, even if the advantageous section lamp is not lit, it may be an advantageous section, and even if the advantageous section lamp is not lit, the player can feel the expectation that the processing related to the instruction function will be executed. can be given to As a result, conventionally, if it is a normal section, it has become a game that only waits to shift to an advantageous section, but if it is a gaming machine of this embodiment, it is possible that an AT transition lottery etc. is performed even in a normal section. Therefore, it is possible to maintain the motivation of the game.

Further, when the advantageous section flag is 1, it is not necessarily an advantageous section. This is a normal section (advantageous section flag is 0), and in a game in which the advantageous section flag is 1 after winning the advantageous section transition lottery, the advantageous section flag is 1 but before the transition to the advantageous section. This is because the game state is in the normal section. When executing the processing for transmitting whether the test signal is an advantageous interval or a normal interval, if the advantageous interval flag is referred to, the advantageous interval signal will be sent even though it is a normal interval as described above. A signal different from the original state is transmitted. In order to prevent this situation, the value of the advantageous interval clear counter is referred to when transmitting either the advantageous interval or the normal interval as the test signal. When the value of the advantageous section clear counter is 0, a process is executed to output a test signal indicating that it is a normal section. ), a process for outputting a test signal indicating the advantageous section is executed. With such a configuration, the process for outputting the test signal can be performed by simply determining whether the value of the advantageous section clear counter is 0 or not, and the state can be accurately specified. , and the program execution speed can be improved. As described above, even when the advantageous interval is terminated under an arbitrary end condition, the value of the advantageous interval clear counter is set to 1. Therefore, in the processing for outputting the test signal, even in the game where the advantageous interval ends, the advantageous interval can be output correctly.

(Processing related to instruction function)
Processing related to the instruction function includes not only AT-related lotteries such as AT transition lottery, AT additional lottery, AT end condition update (AT game number addition / subtraction, AT execution notification number addition / subtraction), but also AT state management It is a concept that includes processing related to The processing related to this instruction function can be executed for a predetermined number of bets for each gaming state, and when a plurality of bets is set as a prescribed number in a certain gaming state, only one bet number is selected. configured to process. For example, when a 2-coin bet and a 3-coin bet are possible in the middle state of the bonus, the processing related to the command function can be executed only in the game with the 3-coin bet, and the processing related to the command function can be executed in the game with the 2-coin bet. is infeasible. That is, in a game with two bets, the AT lottery is not executed even if the AT lottery target role is won, or the AT game number is not updated according to the progress of the game. In addition, if SB or CB, which ends in one game, is dedicated to 2-bet games, and the game after SB or CB ends is 2-bet or 3-bet, replay is won with SB or CB. If the number of cards automatically bet is 2, it becomes impossible to execute the processing related to the instruction function in the game after the SB or CB is finished. ), the number of bets to be automatically inserted when a replay is won in SB or CB is set to three. By doing so, it is possible to execute the processing related to the instruction function even in the game after the replay is won in SB or CB, so that the game that is disadvantageous to the player can be eliminated. It should be noted that, as described above, processing related to the advantageous section is configured to be executed regardless of the number of bets.

(Status display monitor)
A hall manager can easily check whether medals are illegally acquired from a gaming machine due to the above-mentioned fraudulent act, or whether a game is being played with a modified gaming machine whose performance is different from the performance test passed by the Security Communication Association. A status display monitor is provided on the main control board. The information displayed on the status display monitor includes:
1) Display of the performance of the advantageous section of the gaming machine (identifier: 7P. or 7U.)
2) Continuous role ratio in 6000 games (identifier: 6Y.)
3) Role ratio in 6000 games (identifier: 7Y.)
4) Continuous accessory ratio in total number of games played (identifier: 6A.)
5) Accessory ratio in total number of games played (identifier: 7A.)
are mentioned. 7 segments are used as means for display.

Regarding 1), there are two types of display patterns. The second is information indicating the ratio of the number of games staying in the advantageous section to the total number of games staying in the normal section and the advantageous section (referred to as “7U” type). is displayed.

2) to 3) are information indicating a ratio calculated at an arbitrary timing (also referred to as round-slicing calculation) of 6000 consecutive games out of the above-described total number of games played.

5) to 6) are information indicating the continuous accessory ratio and the accessory ratio from when the gaming machine starts playing until the final game.

The display order is set so that the hall manager can easily check the state ratio monitor. Specifically, the display is switched at predetermined intervals such as 1) identifier⇒1) ratio⇒2) identifier⇒2) ratio⇒ 6) ratio⇒1) identifier⇒ . Also, depending on the specifications of the monitor used for display, 1) ⇒ 2) ⇒ 6) ⇒ 1) ⇒ .

In addition to the above display contents, calculate the ratio of the number of staying games during bonus and the number of staying games during non-bonus

<Notification of exceptions in the content displayed on the status display monitor>
To check whether the status display monitor is operating normally,
1) A predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) after the power is turned on and the setting change process is started
During at least one of 2) during setting change and during setting confirmation, and 3) during RAM abnormality error, contents different from the display contents described above may be exceptionally displayed. Desirably, the display contents are patterns that cannot be displayed on a normal status display monitor, such as "0-."

(Interlocking system between slot machine 1 and mobile terminal)
Using the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, by linking the portable terminal owned by the player and the slot machine 1, the sub-control board 1000 can output effects peculiar to the player, and output within the slot machine 1. A linking system between the slot machine 1 and the portable terminal can be performed, such as managing the produced performance information on a dedicated server.

The sub-control board 1000 is provided with an effect generation flag for managing that predetermined effect information is output according to the progress of the game by the player, and a number-of-games flag for managing that a specific number of games has been fulfilled. When various flag information managed in advance by the machine 1 is satisfied by the player, the flag information is held, and the information is output so that the mobile terminal can receive the information at any timing by the player, and is output. By receiving the obtained information with a portable terminal that can be connected to the Internet, it communicates with a dedicated server and manages various flag information on the server.

More specifically, various flag information is started to be held based on a trigger to be described later. The sub-control board 1000 holds various generation flags according to the effects and game information generated during the progress of the slot machine 1, such as "make a small win suggesting effect appear", and when the player operates the sub-buttons, Various flag information held in the slot machine 1 is output to the outside via a QR code (registered trademark of Denso Wave Co., Ltd.) or infrared rays, and the player sends it to a mobile terminal (mobile phone including smartphone, mobile PC, etc.). When the information is received by an electronic device capable of connecting to the Internet, the information is automatically connected to a dedicated server, and the information is managed based on the player's personal information registered in advance in the server.

When the player plays a game from the next time onwards, the player connects to the dedicated server by the mobile terminal, and the personal information of the player managed on the server is issued to the mobile terminal as a password, and the player can use the information from the next time onwards. Various flag information managed by a server up to now is reflected in the slot machine 1 by inputting a password issued at the time of starting a game into the slot machine 1.例文帳に追加

The sub-control board 1000 controls to start holding various flag information when a password is input by a player, and to erase the held flag when various flag information is output. do.

Also, when a player inputs a password into the slot machine 1, by inputting a password containing specific information, for example, the character's clothes can be changed to arbitrary clothes selected by the player, or output during the BB. It is possible to change the sound source to be played.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the password input by the player is cited as a trigger for the slot machine 1 to hold various flags, but the trigger is not limited to this. For example, when a player starts a game, the sub-control board 1000 temporarily holds various flags by operating a sub-button, and the player "sees a special effect" depending on the progress of the game. If you want to manage various generated flags for some reason, you can read the information such as the QR code output from the slot machine 1 by operating the sub-buttons in the same way as before. It is also possible to consider a specification that erases various flags held in . According to this specification, if the player leaves the slot after finishing the game without outputting the information from the slot machine 1, even though the player has set the various flags to be temporarily held, the various flags will be set in the next power-off process or It can be held until the setting change process is performed, or it can be automatically erased when no game is played for a predetermined time.

The information output from the slot machine 1 is not limited to the above-mentioned information. For example, it is also possible to output game history information at the same time. "Number of games", "Number of BB/RB", "Number of AT/ART", and "Difference in medals" during the period from when various flags are temporarily turned on until the various flags are erased due to external output of information, etc. In addition to information such as "the number of coins", various information managed by the slot machine 1 includes information such as "how many games (from the end of the BB) won the BB" and "types, times and probability of small wins won". Information can be output.

At that time, if the QR code output from the slot machine 1 is not enough for one data, it is possible to divide it into a plurality of data and output it. It is also possible to appropriately adopt general communication techniques that are actually used in various fields, such as wired and wireless LAN.

<First embodiment>
A configuration applicable to the first embodiment, in which the termination condition of the advantageous interval is changed according to the gaming state in which the advantageous interval transition lottery is won, will be described below.

First, FIG. 32 is a diagram showing the pattern arrangement in the first embodiment, and FIGS. 33 to 35 are diagrams showing a list of symbol combinations that can be displayed as a result of the winning lottery in the first embodiment. FIG. 36 to FIG. 38 are diagrams showing a list of symbol combinations formed by each winning combination, and FIG. 39 is a diagram showing the set numbers for each winning combination. In the first embodiment, detailed description of FIGS. 32 to 39 is omitted.

The RT state transition conditions and replay winning probability will be described with reference to FIG. RT0 is the state that is set after the main RWM is initialized at the time of shipment from the factory, or when the number of game medals paid out exceeds 210 while the type 1 BB is in operation. Move to RT1. RT1 is a state (sometimes referred to as inside 1st class BB) that is set when the 1st class BB is won, and is based on the fact that the symbol combination related to 1st class BB is displayed on the activated line. to shift from RT1 to general BB.

BB in general is one state of 1 type BB in operation, a symbol combination related to 1 type BB is displayed, transition to 1 type BB in operation, and 1 type BB in operation and RB non-winning state. The state to be set when Based on the fact that RB is won in BB general, the game shifts from BB general to inside RB (shifts when the symbol combination related to RB is not stopped and displayed). "Inside RB" is a state set when the type 1 BB is in operation and in the RB winning state, and when the symbol combination related to RB is displayed, the game shifts from inside RB to during RB operation. RB in operation is a state set in the case of 1 type BB in operation and RB in operation, and transition from RB in operation to general BB based on 12 games played or 8 wins during RB in operation. do.

In this way, there are three states that can be set during BB operation: BB in general, RB inside, and RB in operation. In addition, while the BB is in operation, if the payout of game medals during the operation of the type 1 BB exceeds 210 in addition to the above conditions, the process shifts to RT0.

The sum of replay winning probabilities inside RT0, RT1, and RB is set to 9188/65536, and the types of replays to be won are also set to be the same. During BB in general, the total replay winning probability during RB is set to 0/65536. In other words, the replay indicates that you will not win.

In the first embodiment, the probabilities of winning replays during RT0, RT1, BB general, inside RB, and during RB operation are described, but the replay winning probabilities are designed to be different in each state. good too. For example, it is conceivable to set the sum of replay winning probabilities to 9188 for RT0, 8978 for RT1, 4 during general BB, 9187 during RB internal, and 0 during RB operation. You may make it differ.

Next, the L mode number will be explained. The L mode number is a number that is saved (stored) in a predetermined storage area controlled by the main control board. The performance during stay in the advantageous section can be varied according to the value obtained. Specifically, when winning the advantageous section transition lottery while staying in RT0, the L mode number does not change (maintains 0).

When 0 is saved (stored) as the L mode number, the maximum number of staying games in the advantageous section is set to 1500 games, and the maximum number of games in the non-AT period is set to 1400 games. That is, when 1400 games are continuously consumed in the non-AT period, the AT period shifts to the AT period, and thereafter the AT period of up to 100 games can be executed.

If the lottery for transitioning to the advantageous section is won during stay in RT1, 1 is saved as the L mode number. The maximum number of games in the AT period is set to 500 games. That is, if the non-AT period is played continuously for 500 games, the AT period shifts to the AT period, after which the AT period of up to 1000 games can be executed.

When winning the advantage zone transition lottery while staying in the RB, 2 is saved as the L mode number, and when 2 is saved as the L mode number, the maximum number of games in the advantage zone is set to 1500 games. , the maximum number of games in the non-AT period is set to 500 games. When 2 is stored in the L mode number, it is configured to shift to the normal section after 500 consecutive non-AT periods are played.

If you win the advantage section transition lottery while staying in BB or RB, 3 is saved as the L mode number, and when 3 is saved as the L mode number, the maximum number of games in the advantage section 1500 games are set, and the maximum number of games in the non-AT period is set to 1200 games. That is, when 1200 games are continuously consumed in the non-AT period, the AT period shifts to the AT period, and thereafter the AT period of up to 300 games can be executed.

Thus, in this example, when 0, 1, and 3 are saved in the L mode number, the effective ceiling is set. On the other hand, if the L mode number 2 is set, the real ceiling is not set.

The stored L mode number is (1) set to 0 at the timing of the end of the advantageous section (shift to the normal section), and after that, at the timing of shifting to the advantageous section, the Set the L mode number, (2) maintain the saved L mode number at the timing of the end of the advantageous section (shift to the normal section), and then enter the staying game state at the timing of shifting to the advantageous section It may be configured to set the corresponding L mode number.

Next, the conditions for starting and ending the advantageous section will be described. The conditions for starting the advantageous section are configured such that when a small winning combination involving payout of game medals is won during the normal section in RT0, RT1, BB general, or RB internal, the advantageous section transition lottery is performed. , Advantageous section transition lottery is not performed for a small combination won during RB operation. In this embodiment, when the advantageous section transition lottery is executed, the transition to the advantageous section is performed with a probability of 100%, but this is only an example, and the transition may be made with a probability of less than 100%.

As for the end conditions of the advantageous section, when L mode number 0, L mode number 1, and L mode number 3 are set, it is determined that after shifting to AT period, it shifts to non-AT period during AT period. After that, the advantageous section ends at the timing of transition to the non-AT period. In addition, when the L mode number 2 is set, as described above, when the maximum number of games in the non-AT period is completed, the game shifts to the normal section (ends the advantageous section). Note that these are only examples, and can be changed without any problem. For example, when L mode number 2 is set, if it is configured so that the AT period can be shifted to before the maximum number of games in the non-AT period is completed, the normal section will be normal if the conditions for ending the AT period are satisfied. It may be configured to be able to shift to

Next, the relationship between game characteristics and setting of L mode numbers in the non-AT period and the AT period will be described. A player plays a game with RT0 or RT1 in a non-AT period, displays one kind of BB symbol combination when he/she acquires the right to the AT period, and plays the game while the BB is in operation during the AT period. In particular, since the replay probability is higher inside the RB than during the BB in general and during the RB operation, it is advantageous for the player to consume the AT period inside the RB. During the AT period, one set of 30 games of AT can be executed, and by the end of the first set's AT period,
(1): Win the AT continuation lottery (2): End the BB operation before completing 30 games By satisfying one of the conditions, you can acquire the right of the second set of AT period.

"(1): Winning the AT continuation lottery" means that the lottery will be drawn according to the result of the lottery for each game during the 30 games. Prize-C1 to Prize-C3 is 5%, Prize-C4 is 30%, Prize-E1 to Prize-E6 is 6%, Prize-F and Prize-G have a 50% chance of winning the AT continuous lottery. do.

"(2): Terminate the BB operation before 30 games are completed" means that the condition for terminating the BB operation is that 210 game medals are paid out. If 210 game medals are paid out before completing 30 games while staying in either medium or RB operation, the player wins the AT continuation lottery.

As described above, it is possible to change the performance of the advantageous section according to the game state (set L mode number) in which the advantageous section transition lottery is won, and the player can appropriately select the game method. It is possible to expand the playability. In this embodiment, it is optimal for the player to play in RT1 during the non-AT period and within the RB during the AT period. That is, during the non-AT period, when the 1st type BB is won, the game progresses while the symbol combination relating to the 1st type BB is not stopped and displayed, and the game proceeds while the RB is won during the AT period. In this case, it is preferable to proceed with the game by causing the symbol combination related to the RB to remain inside the RB without being stopped and displayed.

As mentioned above, the timing at which you can acquire the right for the AT period (the timing at which you can win the AT continuation lottery) depends on the result of the lottery according to the result of the role lottery during the 30 games, and whether the BB operation ends before the completion of 30 games. Although described, it is not limited to this, and may be determined by an AT continuation lottery at the time of completion of 30 games.

As described above, the timing of acquiring the rights for the AT period has been explained. When the timing of the advantageous section transition lottery is RT1 (L mode number 1), if you shift to the advantageous section, you can transition to the AT period by completing a maximum of 500 games in the non-AT period, and inside the RB (L mode number 2) If it shifts to the advantageous section at the time of , the non-AT period is digested up to 500 games and shifts to the normal section.

Here, in the configuration of the present embodiment, if the AT continuation lottery is not won during the AT period and inside the RB, the game shifts to the non-AT period and the normal section inside the RB. As an example of what happens when you do not win the lottery for acquiring the rights for the AT period that is executed every game, if you win the lottery for the transition to the advantageous section in the normal section within the RB, 2 is saved as the L mode number. be done. After that, by satisfying the termination condition during the BB operation, it shifts to RT0, wins the 1st type BB and does not stop displaying the symbol combination related to the 1st type BB, shifts to RT1, and the L mode number is saved as 2. If you play 500 games in this situation (RT0 and RT1 together, 500 games are played), you will move to the normal section during RT1, and by winning the advantageous section transition lottery, the L mode number 1 will be saved, and then the maximum After completing 500 games, the AT period begins. That is, as a player, 500 games with 2 saved as the L mode number, about 1 game from the normal section to the advantageous section, and 1 saved as the L mode number. By digesting the normal state (non-AT period) of about 1000 games, including 500 games in , it will be shifted to the AT period, and it can be recognized that the so-called ceiling has been reached.

Thus, in the present embodiment, in a gaming machine in which the maximum number of staying games in the advantageous section is set to 1,500 games, about 1,000 games in the non-AT period and about 1,000 games in the AT period, a total of about 2,000 games are played. A series of game progressions can be designed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 41, an example of a method for storing L mode numbers according to this embodiment will be described in detail. It should be noted that the processing in the same figure is processing executed by the main control board.

First, it is determined whether or not it is in non-RT mode. If it is not RT (YES), the process ends without saving the L mode number. That is, the L mode number is maintained at 0. Also, if it is not non-RT (NO), it is determined whether or not it is in RT1. If it is in RT1 (YES), 1 is saved as the L mode number, and this processing ends. Also, if it is not in RT1 (NO), it is determined whether or not the RB condition device has been activated before the previous game, in other words, whether or not it is in the RB. If it is inside the RB (YES), 2 is saved as the L mode number, and this processing ends. Also, if it is not inside the RB (NO), 3 is saved as the L mode number, and this processing ends.

In this embodiment, the saved L mode number differs depending on the game state when transitioning to the advantageous section. "first advantageous section", the state in which L mode number 3 is saved is "third advantageous section", and the state in which L mode number 0 is saved is "fourth advantageous section". Also called

Regarding the transition to the AT period, it has been explained that the non-AT period is transitioned to the AT period by playing the number of games corresponding to the L mode number, but this is not the only option. , the probability of transition to the AT period may be changed for each combination lottery result. For example, the AT period transition lottery probability at the L mode number 2 with the set value 1 may be lower than the AT period transition lottery probability at the time of the L mode number 2 with the set value 6, or the L mode number The AT period transition lottery probability set value common to 0 and L mode number 3 may be the lowest AT period transition probability, or may vary for each set value and for each role lottery result, but L It is desirable to set the AT period transition lottery probability to be lower than in mode number 1 and L mode number 2.

<Second embodiment>
A configuration related to a reel unit (sometimes simply referred to as a reel) applicable to the second embodiment will be described in detail below.

The reel unit of the second embodiment is composed of a reel base and a reel sheet wound around the reel base.

Also, the reel sheet is composed of three areas: a non-transmissive silver-stopped area, a white area having a higher transmittance than the silver-stopped area, and a non-stopped area having a higher transmittance than the white area.

The upper part of FIG. 42 shows the inside of the lamp house housing the LEDL, LEDC, and LEDR in the reels, and the lower part of FIG. 42 shows the state where the reel sheets are attached.

FIG. 43 shows the area where the reel sheet is attached to the sheet attaching surface, and shows the reel sheet surface structure having the pattern area and the background area.

FIG. 43 shows a general reel sheet back surface structure showing areas that transmit light and areas that reflect light when light is emitted from each LED. On the back surface of the reel sheet, the silver stop area corresponds to the background area, and the white stop area corresponds to the pattern area. The light from each LED is emitted toward the reel sheet, but when the light is applied to the silver-stopped area, the light is totally reflected, so the light does not pass through the silver-stopped area. Further, when light is applied to the white stop area, unlike the silver stop area, it does not undergo total reflection, and the luminance of the irradiated light decreases and passes through the white stop area.

Since the background area corresponds to the silver stop area and the pattern area corresponds to the white stop area, the light emitted from each LED can emphasize and brighten only the pattern area. However, in the case of a general reel sheet, the brightness of the light emitted from each LED may be weakened by passing through the white stop area.

It is conceivable to dispose LEDs in the space between the reels and the display window so that the player can easily see the patterns (pictures) attached to the reel sheets. This allows the entire reel to be illuminated from the outside. The larger the number of LEDs to be arranged, the brighter the light. At that time, it is desirable to arrange the LEDs at positions closer to the reel side than to the display window side. When the reels are arranged at a position close to the display window, when the reels are directly irradiated with light, the light is reflected and the player sees white, which may make it difficult to visually recognize specific symbols during the game.

Instead of the reel structure described above, it is conceivable that the background area corresponds to the white stop area and the pattern area corresponds to the silver stop area. By doing so, the background area occupies a larger proportion of the reel sheet, and the background area is arranged so as to cover the pattern area, so that the brightness of the entire reel can be maintained at a high level.

However, by setting the background area to the white stop area, the partition between the reels (in other words, the sheet attachment surface) is also the white stop area, but it is also the sheet attachment surface, and the light from each LED does not reach, From the player's point of view, a dark line appears. As a result, when the player tries to stop the symbols attached to the reel sheet in order to stop the spinning reels, the black line is floating, and there is a risk that the player will lose the desire to play the game. The overall balance of the pattern design attached to the sheet may be lost.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 43(a), a new no-stop (pattern) area is provided on the reel sheet, which is different from the white stop (design) area and the silver stop (background) area. . In addition, FIG.43(a), FIG.43(b), FIG.43(c) is only an example.

The non-stop area is an area where silver stop or white stop is not applied on the rear surface of the reel sheet. By providing this region, it is possible to irradiate the outside of the house lamp with light from each LED without lowering the irradiation luminance of the light from the white stop region.

A part of the non-stop region shown in FIG. 43(b) is arranged at a position overlapping the sticker sticking surface, and the non-stopping pattern shown in FIG. 43(c) is positioned so as not to overlap the sticker sticking surface are placed. When part of the no-stop area overlaps the sticker-attached surface, the light emitted from each LED passes through part of the no-stop area, but does not pass through the part that overlaps the sticker-attached surface. . By arranging in this way, the brightness in the space becomes high, but since part of the area is not included in the irradiation range, when viewed from the player, part of the unstoppable area appears black. There is a risk that the visibility and design of the reel will be degraded.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 43(c), by arranging the non-stopping region in a region that does not overlap with the sheet attachment surface, the entire non-stopping region transmits the light emitted from each LED. , you can prevent black lines from appearing.

As a result, the brightness of the light from each LED according to the conventional structure can be provided to the player without lowering it as much as possible, and the effect is that it is possible to provide a reel sheet with excellent design not only in the pattern area and the background area. can give

As a derivative plan, the pattern used in the pattern area may be included in the pattern area in consideration of the design used in the gaming machine. The pattern arranged in the pattern area may be a non-stop area like the pattern area, or may be a white stop area. By setting the pattern arranged in the design area as the non-stop area, the specific design is emphasized more. Among the symbols on the reels, the specific symbol at this time is desirably used as a relatively large symbol (such as white 7) or as an index symbol when the player performs so-called eye pressing. By using the pattern arranged in the design area as the white stop area, the pattern area can be emphasized.

Furthermore, the number of pattern areas may be different between index patterns and non-index patterns. As described above, the index pattern is a relatively large pattern, and the area in which the pattern area can be arranged is small. In other words, the patterns other than the index patterns are relatively small, and the area in which the pattern area can be arranged is large. This can be used as a reference when a player presses a specific pattern in accordance with the arrangement and size of the pattern pattern when pressing other than the indicator pattern.

Further, the liquid crystal effect provided in the game machine and the lighting mode of each LED may be interlocked. Specifically, after the player has operated all the stop switches and all the rotating reels have stopped, the LEDs are turned on in order from the lower row to the upper row, and after the LEDs on the upper row are lit, It is conceivable to display the pattern of the same system from the lower area of the liquid crystal corresponding to the reel. At this time, the color of the displayed pattern is preferably the same color as or similar to the color projected in the pattern area. Moreover, it is more preferable to perform the effect during a period (so-called omen) in which an AT or a big win can be expected.

Further, each LED may be arranged at a position in the vertical direction of the pattern area or at a position in the vertical direction of the pattern area.

<Third Embodiment>
Next, a configuration related to scenario management during an advantageous section, which is applicable to the third embodiment, will be described in detail below.

In the third embodiment, by managing in advance the expected value of game medals obtained while staying in the advantageous section, the player is prevented from obtaining excessive game medals, and the player's gambling is controlled. Aim to calm down.

In the third embodiment, when winning the advantageous section transition lottery (when it is decided to newly transition from the normal section to the advantageous section), one of scenario numbers 1 to 6 described in FIG. is selected. In addition, the maximum number of games that can be stayed in one advantageous section (the maximum number of games that can be stayed continuously) is set to 1480, and basically, a new scenario number will not be selected until 1480 games are played. ing.

The scenario number described in FIG. 44 is the number stored in the main RWM when winning the advantageous section transition lottery, and is configured so that one of scenario numbers 1 to 6 is selected. . Note that the period is the number of games with 37 games as one unit. The values of "0" and "1" corresponding to each scenario number and each cycle, "0" indicates a non-AT period and "1" indicates an AT period. For example, when the scenario number "1" is selected, "0" is stored in the first cycle, indicating that the first cycle is a non-AT period (in other words, from the first game AT is not executed for 37 games up to the 37th game). When the scenario number 1 is selected, the 25th cycle (889th game) stores "1", which indicates that it is the AT period.

When the scenario number 1 is selected, since the 1st cycle to the 24th cycle are "0", it is a non-AT period, and the game medals decrease. In this embodiment, it is assumed that the expected number of game medals to be obtained during the non-AT period is -54. That is, since game medals decrease during the non-AT period, it is designed to decrease 54 game medals per cycle. Also, since the 25th cycle to the 39th cycle is "1", it is an AT period and is a section in which game medals can be increased. In this embodiment, it is assumed that the number of game medals expected to increase during the AT period is 100. That is, since the number of game medals increases during the AT period, it is designed to increase the number of game medals by 100 per cycle. The expected number of game medals to be obtained is the average value of all game states in the advantageous section. It should be noted that the numerical values in the figure may be applied only to a predetermined game state in the advantageous section.

Considering the expected number of game medals to be obtained during the above non-AT period and AT period, winning the advantageous section transition lottery, selecting scenario number 1, and playing 1480 games in the advantageous section Game medals The expected acquisition number can be calculated as 150. In this embodiment, the maximum number of games that can be played in one advantageous section is designed to be 1480 games, but the number is not limited to this and may be 1500 games. In other words, when scenario number 1 is selected, the expected number of medals to be obtained is 150, so the player is more likely to benefit from playing the game in the advantageous section where scenario number 1 is selected. . The expected number of game medals to be obtained may be the average value of all game states in the advantageous section, or may be applied only to a predetermined game state (the same applies to other scenarios).

Similarly, regarding the expected number of game medals to be obtained when 1480 games are played in scenario numbers 2 to 5, the expected number of game medals to be obtained for scenario number 2 is 1074, and the expected number of game medals to be obtained for scenario number 3 is 1074. is 612, the expected number of game medals for scenario number 4 is -1082, and the expected number of game medals for scenario number 5 is 1536.

When one of scenario numbers 1 to 5 shown in FIG. 44 is selected, the game is played from the start of the selected scenario number (1st game) to the end of the selected scenario number (1480th game). As a result, the number of game medals (possessed medals) close to the expected number of game medals to be obtained increases or decreases.

However, if the AT period is predetermined, a player who has a lot of experience (knowledge) playing this specification will easily identify the current scenario number depending on which cycle the AT period occurs. . In particular, scenario number 4 has a negative expected value for winning game medals, so if it is determined that scenario number 4 is selected, the player is more likely to leave the seat.

In order to solve the above problem, scenario number 6 is prepared in which the non-AT period and the AT period are not predetermined in each cycle. Scenario number 6 is a scenario number that determines whether or not a win is made during the AT period according to the result of the lottery. By providing the possibility that scenario number 6 will be selected, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to determine whether the expected value for winning game medals is a positive scenario number or a negative scenario number.

In this embodiment, scenario number 6 determines whether or not to shift to the AT period by a random lottery (according to the result of the role lottery) until the 24th cycle. Specifically, when it is determined by random lottery in the second period that the AT period is started, the third period is the AT period. In this way, in Scenario 6, when staying in a predetermined cycle, it is determined by the lottery result of each game whether to use the AT period or the non-AT period in the next cycle of the predetermined cycle. is configured to By constructing in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from discriminating the scenario determined by whether it is the AT period or not, and the game is progressed while having anticipation for the arrival of the AT period. can do.

In this embodiment, it is assumed that the expected value of winning game medals when scenario number 6 is selected is -700. Also, in scenario number 6, if the transition is to the AT period and then to the non-AT period, the current advantageous section may end (the current advantageous section ends and a new scenario number will be determined).

Next, the scenario number selection probability will be described. The "selection probability" in FIG. 44 indicates a value that makes the ratio of winning the advantageous section transition lottery and selecting the scenario number different for each set value. R1 has a set value of 1, R2 has a set value of 2, R5 has a set value of 5, and R6 has a set value of 6, exemplifying a case in which four stages of set values are provided. Also, the numerical values listed under R1, R2, R5, and R6 indicate the selection probability of the scenario number in %. Scenario number 1: 10%, scenario number 2: 3%, scenario number 3: 2%, scenario number 4: 20%, scenario number 5: 5%, scenario number 6: 60%. .

At setting value 1, scenario number 3 has the lowest selection ratio and scenario number 6 has the highest selection ratio. At setting value 6, scenario number 4 has the lowest selection ratio and scenario number 1 has the highest selection ratio. ing. In general, there are many designs in which the expected value for winning game medals is negative and positive for each set value. This is the expected value for winning game medals.

Scenario number 6 shown in FIG. 44 is different from scenario number 1 to scenario number 5 described above. Until the 24th cycle, it is a scenario in which it is decided whether or not to win the AT lottery based on the winning lottery result. It's becoming The reason why scenario number 6 is prepared is that in the case of the patterns from scenario number 1 to scenario number 5 described above, there is a period in which the player does not win during the game, so the player can When reaching , the possibility of stopping the game increases. Therefore, by providing the scenario number 6, the player can be more interested in guessing the current scenario number.

The game medal acquisition expected value of scenario number 6 is designed to be negative. In the present embodiment, the setting value 1 has the highest probability of selecting scenario number 6, which has a negative expected value for winning game medals, and the setting value 6 has the lowest. Furthermore, the setting value 6 has the highest selection probability of the scenario number 1 in which the game medal acquisition expected value is positive, and the setting value 1 has the lowest. In other words, when the player is playing the game, it is possible to increase the interest in the game while guessing the setting value by the change of the scenario number.

Scenario numbers 1 to 5 are designed to be "0" at the start (1st to 3rd cycles) and at the end (40th cycle). This is because the number of game medals that can be acquired while staying in one advantageous section is prevented from becoming excessive. For example, although not shown, if the AT period corresponding to the selected scenario number is from the 16th cycle to the 40th cycle, assuming that 100 game medals can be obtained in one cycle, about 2400 game medals will be obtained. can be obtained. By completing the 40th cycle, the current advantageous section ends, and if you win the next advantageous section transition lottery, the AT period corresponding to the selected scenario number is from the 1st cycle to the 20th cycle. Assuming that 100 game medals can be obtained in one cycle, approximately 2000 game medals can be obtained. From the player's point of view, the situation is such that 2,400 and 2,000 medals can be obtained consecutively, so there is a high possibility that the player will get too many game medals and become absorbed in the gaming machine. Also, although the maximum number of game medals that can be obtained in one advantageous section is 2400, there is a risk that the maximum number of game medals that can be obtained will be intentionally increased.

Therefore, even if scenario numbers 1 to 5 are selected, it is possible to avoid a situation in which game medals are excessively obtained continuously across advantageous sections. Furthermore, since the AT period (in other words, the expected number of game medals to be obtained) is determined in advance as in scenario numbers 1 to 5, it is possible to control excessive acquisition of game medals and consumption of excessive game medals. It is possible to provide a game machine that can be expected to have a relatively stable design that does not depend only on probability. That is, by setting the cycle at the start of the scenario (from the 1st cycle to the 3rd cycle) and the cycle at the end (the 40th cycle) as non-AT periods, the scenario numbers advantageous to the player are continuously selected. Even when the game is played, it is possible to prevent the game medals from being excessively acquired and the game machine from becoming absorbed in the game.

In the present embodiment, it is conceivable that the advantageous section transition lottery is won and the advantageous section lamp is not lit until at least the scenario number transitions to the AT period. If selected, maintain the selected scenario number until 1480 games are played. In other words, once the advantageous section lamp is turned on (shifted to the AT period), the advantageous section lamp cannot be turned off until the advantageous section ends. As a result, for example, in the advantageous interval in which scenario number 2 is selected, the timing at which the advantageous interval lamp lights is the start timing of the fourth cycle. In this way, if you design the advantageous section lamp to light up in a specific cycle, there will be no options for scenario number 1 and scenario number 5, and if the fifth cycle is a non-AT period, ) Since scenario number 4 is detected, the player is more likely to leave the seat.

Based on the above, if you win the advantageous section transition lottery, and from the next game where one of the scenario numbers is selected, the advantageous section lamp will light up, and until the selected scenario number ends, the advantageous section lamp will light up. It is desirable to continue This makes it difficult for the player to identify which scenario number it is, so that the player can avoid unintentionally leaving the seat.

Next, selection of the effect pattern shown in FIG. 44 will be described. In this embodiment, when scenario number 1 is selected, effect configuration 1 is selected, when scenario number 2 is selected, effect configuration 2 is selected, and scenario number 3 is selected. When the scenario number 4 is selected, the effect configuration 3 is selected, and when the scenario number 5 is selected, the effect configuration 5 is selected. When the scenario number 6 is selected, one of the production configurations 1 to 5 is selected. "0" described in the effect configuration indicates that the precursor effect is not performed, "1" indicates that the present precursor effect is executed when it is decided to shift to the AT period, and "2". indicates that a false premonition effect is executed that suggests the possibility of shifting to the AT period, although the shift does not occur to the AT period. In other words, in the next cycle, it is possible to execute an effect that prompts whether or not the AT period will come.

Regarding effect configuration 6, as described above, when scenario number 6 is selected, one of effect configurations 1 to 5 is selected. It is possible to provide a game machine that allows a game to be played while guessing which scenario number the current scenario number is.

As described above, the scenario management and effect configuration when shifting to one advantageous section have been described, but the design may be changed as appropriate.

In this embodiment, the scenario numbers are designed to be 1 to 6, but the number of selectable scenarios may be increased.

In this embodiment, the selection ratio of the scenario numbers is designed to vary according to the setting value. , the selection rate may be increased stepwise so that the set value 6 has the highest selection rate.

In the present embodiment, in scenario number 6, the current advantageous section ends when the AT period is entered at least once and then the non-AT period is entered. The advantageous section may not end until the AT period of . For example, if the expected value of winning game medals in scenario number 6 is positive, the game is designed so that it is easier for the player to stay in scenario number 6 to play the game. Also, regarding scenario number 6, it is conceivable that the condition for shifting to the non-AT period after shifting to the AT period is until the number of games is managed and the continuation rate lottery is not won.

In this embodiment, the effect configuration is designed so that one of the effect configurations 1 to 5 is selected when scenario number 6 is selected. When it is determined, if the current effect configuration is 0, it is rewritten to 1, so that the player can recognize that an omen has started. Also, when it is decided to shift to the AT period, it is conceivable not to rewrite from the case where the current effect configuration is 0.

Further, in scenario number 6, the probability of winning the AT lottery (it is determined that the next period will be the AT period) may be varied for each set value. For example, the set value 6 may be configured such that the scenario number is more likely to be selected than the other set values, while the winning rate of the AT lottery for the scenario number 6 is higher than the other set values.

It should be noted that the number of types of scenario numbers, the number of games in one cycle, the allocation of AT periods, and the like described above are merely examples, and it should be noted that there is no problem even if they are changed.

<Fourth Embodiment>
Next, in the fourth embodiment, game characteristics related to RT fluctuation at the end timing of MB and the end of CB will be described.

FIG. 45 describes the reel arrangement in the fourth embodiment.

FIG. 46 is a list of symbol combinations that can be won in the role lottery result in the fourth embodiment, FIG. 47 is a list of winning combinations in the role lottery result in the fourth embodiment, and FIG. 48 is the role lottery in the fourth embodiment. is described.

In the fourth embodiment, BB and MB can be won as bonuses. The CB has no symbol combination, the CB game starts when the game starts during the MB operation, and the CB game ends when the game ends during the MB operation.

FIG. 49 shows an RT transition diagram in the fourth embodiment. The non-RT state is an RT state in which a game can be played by transitioning to the factory shipment, after the main RWM is initialized, or when the result of 50 games is obtained in RT2. As will be described later, the non-RT is also referred to as the withdrawal zone in the fourth embodiment.

RT1 is an RT state that can be shifted when the winning 05, winning 09, and replay 02 symbol combinations are displayed. As will be described later, RT1 is also referred to as a normal game in the fourth embodiment.

RT2 is an RT state that can be shifted to when the MB ends and the winning 05 and winning 09 symbol combinations are not displayed. As will be described later, RT2 is also referred to as a first advantageous game in the fourth embodiment.

RT3 is an RT state that can be shifted to after BB ends. As will be described later, RT3 is also referred to as a second advantageous game in the fourth embodiment.

Inside the BB is an RT state that can be shifted to when the BB is won and the BB symbol combination is not displayed in the game. As will be described later, the inside of the BB is also referred to as an inside game in the fourth embodiment.

The BB operation is an RT state that can be shifted when the BB symbol combination is displayed. As will be described later, in the fourth embodiment, the BB operation is also referred to as a game during the BB.

The replay winning probability in each RT state will be explained. In the fourth embodiment, the specified number can be selected from 2 and 3 (only 3 specified numbers during BB operation and MB-B operation), and according to the specified number for each RT state, The reference destination of the lottery table for the role lottery and the number of game medals to be paid out are different.

In the fourth embodiment, during the operation of the MB, it is a game in which the symbol combinations relating to all the small wins can be displayed regardless of the win lottery result. For example, even if a result of a winning combination lottery is obtained during MB operation, the winning combinations that can be displayed are all small winning combinations (a prize-A condition device to a prize-G condition device). During MB operation, if the result of replay-B condition device is obtained as a result of the role lottery, the winning hand that can be displayed is all small wins (winning-A condition device to winning-G condition device) and replay. It becomes a game-B condition device. Since the displayable pattern combination pattern differs between the result of the loss and the result of the replay-B condition device, a predetermined stop control may be performed according to each displayable pattern combination pattern. . Concretely, it is controlled to preferentially draw in a specific pattern combination at the time of losing, and to preferentially draw in a predetermined pattern combination different from the specific pattern combination at the time of replay-B condition setting. You may do so. Details will be described later.

FIG. 50 describes the end timing of the MB-A game and the RT variation timing. The MB game ends when more than 72 game medals are paid out for MB-A. On the other hand, the CB game that operates during the MB-A game is terminated after the result of the game is obtained. In this embodiment, in the MB-A game, even if the RT transition symbol combination is displayed, the RT transition cannot be performed. In the middle of the game medals being paid out, the MB game is ended when the game medals are paid out as a termination condition of the MB-A game. However, in the CB game, the payout of all the game medals has not been completed and the result of the game has not been obtained, so the CB game continues. When the CB game ends, the CB game ends after paying out the game medals.

In the present embodiment, when the symbol combination relating to the win 05 is displayed in the MB-A game with the prescribed number of 3 medals, control is performed so that 12 game medals are paid out. When the game medals are paid out, 72 game medals, which is the condition for ending the MB-A game, are paid out, so the MB game is ended. In other words, the MB game ends in the middle of paying out 12 game medals. Thereafter, after the payout of 12 game medals is completed, it is determined whether or not the symbol combination displayed in the current game is a symbol combination that triggers RT shift. Since winning 05 is a symbol combination that shifts to RT1, the game will be played at RT1 from the next game. Since RT1 is a game state with a relatively low replay probability, it is a game state disadvantageous to the player.

Also, in the MB-A game, when the prescribed number of 3 medals is displayed, when the symbol combination related to winning 06 is displayed, control is performed to pay out 11 game medals, but the 10th game medal out of 11 is displayed. The MB game is ended when 72 game medals are paid out, which is the termination condition of the MB-A game at the time of the payout. In other words, the MB game ends in the middle of paying out 11 game medals. Thereafter, after the payout of 11 game medals is completed, it is determined whether or not the symbol combination displayed in the current game is a symbol combination that triggers RT shift. Since winning 06 is not a symbol combination that shifts to RT1, it is possible to stay in the RT2 state continuously even after the MB game ends. From the player's point of view, the game can be played while maintaining RT2, which is an RT state with a higher replay probability than RT1, except during BB operation, with the prescribed number of 3 cards, so the player expects to obtain game medals. A game can be played in a state where the value is high.

In the fourth embodiment, a game flow in which a player plays a normal game will be described. A player usually plays a game with a prescribed number of three coins in RT1, expecting to win MB-A or BB. In the case of the specified number of 2 cards, the replay winning probability is high, but the winning probability of BB or MB-A is low. It is desirable to play games.

When MB-A is won, the player plays the game so as to display the symbol combination related to winning 05 until the game in which more than 72 coins can be paid out. For example, 72 coins are paid out by displaying the symbol combination relating to winning prize 05 six times. As described above, in the present embodiment, the MB game can be terminated even during payout of game medals.

In the MB-A game, when the game is played with RT1 and the prescribed number of 3 cards, there are two types of lottery results (replay-A condition device + all wins, all wins). The results of the two types of lottery are controlled to display Winning 05 or Winning 09. Therefore, when the player plays the game with the specified number of three medals, there is an opportunity to obtain the maximum payout of game medals. At the payout end timing after the completion condition of MB-A is satisfied, winning 05 or winning 09 is displayed to shift to RT1, so that the game thereafter proceeds with RT1 having a low replay probability. Become.

Similarly, in the MB-A game, the player plays the game so as to display the symbol combination relating to winning 05 until the game in which more than 72 coins can be paid out. For example, 72 coins are paid out by displaying the symbol combination relating to winning prize 05 six times. In the next game, the game is played with the specified number of 2 cards, that is, it is an MB-A game, and if the game is played with RT1 and the specified number of 2 cards, the replay-B will be won at about 1/2. , and when the replay-B is won, the prize 06 can be displayed, so that "the prize 06 is stopped and the payout of the game medals is started → during the payout of the game medals, the MB - The end condition of A is satisfied → RT2 is set → the payout of game medals is completed → the RT state does not shift because the win 06 is stopped and displayed”, resulting in the final game in MB-A. Although one game medal is obtained less than when winning 05 is displayed in (the game with the last winning), as a result, it is possible to shift to RT2 with a high replay probability.

At the timing when the termination condition of MB is satisfied, processing related to RT state transition is executed by interrupt processing.

As a method of increasing the probability of winning replay-B in RT1, it is possible to increase the probability of winning replay-B in RT1 by increasing the probability of winning replay-B in RT1 by setting the specified number to 3, but the specified number is 3 and 2. By selecting either one of the two types and playing the game, even with the same RT1, the reference destination of the lottery table is made different. That is, in the fourth embodiment, in the MB game, RT1, in the game immediately before the game in which the MB game may end, by performing a game with a high winning probability of re-game-B, It is possible to increase the ratio of winning 06 to be displayed (in other words, not to display winning 05 or winning 09), and to enhance game playability. The winning percentage of replay-B when the prescribed number is 2 is 50% (32768/65536).

In addition, in the MB-A game RT2, even if the game is played with a 3-coin bet, the re-game-B wins with a high probability, so the player can bet 3-coin and the win 05 will be displayed. There is no need to worry, and winning 06 is displayed so that the player can play the game without worry. In RT2, when playing the game with the specified number of 3, it is possible to maintain RT2 at about 80% (52066/65536), and when playing with the specified number of 2, it is possible to maintain RT2 at about 50% (32769/65536). ), it is most advantageous to play the game with the prescribed number of three in RT2. In addition, when the prescribed number is two, even with the same combination of symbols, the allocation of game medals is small, so it is desirable to play the game with the prescribed number of three.

Finally, RT3 will be explained. RT3 is a game state that can be shifted after finishing the BB game, and unlike the route where it is easier to shift to RT2 by winning MB-A and changing the specified number, it is relatively shifted to RT2. It is an easy route.

As described above, in the fourth embodiment, by ending the MB game in accordance with the timing of the number of payouts, it is possible to provide a game property in which the RT transition is possible according to the symbol combination displayed thereafter. As a result, the player can be given an opportunity to select whether or not to change the specified number before the game ends.

In addition to the above, as a derivative plan, if there is a situation in which it is advantageous to play the game with the prescribed number of 3 and a situation in which it is advantageous to play the game with the prescribed number of 2, specifically, MB During the -A game, the gaming machine may notify whether to bet 2 or 3 according to the remaining number of payouts at the end of the MB-A game. It is preferable that the notification is made by LED lighting, segment display, liquid crystal display, voice output, or the like. The timing of notification is
1: Notify during game standby after satisfying the condition of the remaining number of sheets.
2: During the game, based on the condition before the condition of the number of remaining coins is satisfied, the result of the combination lottery is determined and the result of the game is obtained.
3: Always report after the condition of the remaining number of sheets is satisfied.
can be considered.

As a result, the player can change the specified number according to the notification regardless of the timing of the notification, making it easier to satisfy the conditions for transitioning to RT2 and avoiding unintended disadvantages. You can proceed with the game without

<Configuration regarding main switch applicable to this example>
(Various main switches)
A 1 bed switch, a MAX bed switch, a start switch, a left stop switch, a middle stop switch, a right stop switch, a settlement switch, and a reset switch are provided as switches managed by the main control means (hereinafter sometimes referred to as main switches). ing. Information on whether or not these main switches have been operated (data corresponding to ON or OFF) is stored in a storage area starting from a predetermined address in the RWM. More specifically, input port 0 level data is at 0xF001, input port 1 level data is at 0xF002, input port 2 level data is at 0xF003, input port 0 falling data is at 0xF004, and input port 0 rising is at 0xF005. data, input port 1 rising data at address 0xF006, and input port 2 rising data at address 0xF007.

In this example, the 0th bit (D0) of input port 0 is set to a setting/reset switch signal, the 1st bit (D1) is set to a setting key switch signal, and the 2nd bit (D2) is a door switch signal. A signal is set, the 3rd bit (D3), 4th bit (D4), and 5th bit (D5) are not used, the 6th bit (D6) is set to a power failure detection signal, and the 7th bit ( D7) is set with a full detection signal. In each of the D0, D1, D2, D6, and D7 bits, 0 indicates OFF, and 1 indicates ON.

The 0th bit (D0) of input port 1 is set to the right stop switch sensor signal, the 1st bit (D1) is set to the middle stop switch sensor signal, and the 2nd bit (D2) is set to the left stop switch sensor signal. is set, the 3rd bit (D3) is set to the 3-sheet insert sensor (MAX bed switch sensor) signal, the 4th bit (D4) is set to the 1-sheet insert switch signal, and the 5th bit (D5) is the settlement. The switch signal is set, the 6th bit (D6) is set to the start switch sensor signal, and the 7th bit (D7) is unused. In each of the D0, D1, D2, D3, D4, D5, and D6 bits, 0 indicates OFF, and 1 indicates ON.

Further, the 0th bit (D0) of the input port 2 is set to the reel sensor signal 1, the 1st bit (D1) is set to the reel sensor signal 2 signal, and the 2nd bit (D2) is set to the reel sensor signal. 3 is set, the 3rd bit (D3) is set to the payout sensor 2 signal, the 4th bit (D4) is set to the payout sensor 1 signal, the 5th bit (D5) is set to the input sensor 2 signal, The 6th bit (D6) is set to the input sensor 1 signal, and the 7th bit (D7) is set to the selector passage sensor signal. In each of the D0, D1, D2, D3, D4, D5, D6, and D7 bits, 0 indicates OFF, and 1 indicates ON.

When the various main switches are operated, the sensors installed in the various main switches detect the operation of the various main switches, and when the sensors of the various main switches detect the operation of the various main switches, the corresponding input ports are detected. It is configured so that the corresponding bit is set to 1. Then, the input port is checked for each interrupt processing of the main control means, and the processing based on the various main switches corresponding to the input port 1 is executed.

In addition, there are cases where predetermined processing is executed when various main switches are operated. period is called an invalid period). For example, the effective period of the start switch is a state in which a specified number of bets are made after all the reels have stopped (referred to as a start switch operation waiting state in this embodiment), and the start switch is in the start switch operation waiting state. When the start switch sensor detects the operation of the start switch, internal lottery processing and reel rotation processing can be executed. When the start switch sensor detects that the start switch has been operated in a state other than the start switch operation waiting state, internal lottery processing and reel rotation processing are not executed.

In this way, when the sensor of the main switch detects the operation of the main switch and executes a predetermined process (for example, in the case of the start switch, the internal lottery process or reel rotation process corresponds to this), in other words, the valid period When the main switch is operated at , it is called effective detection, and when the main switch sensor detects the operation of the main switch, a predetermined process (for example, in the case of the start switch, internal lottery processing and reel rotation processing are applicable. ) is not executed, in other words, the case where the main switch is operated during the invalid period is referred to as invalidity detection.

A state in which the main switch is operated (ON state) during the effective period is called an effective detection state, and a state in which the main switch is operated (ON state) during the invalid period is called an effective detection state. This state is called invalid detection state.

Next, the effective period of various main switches will be described. The effective period of the MAX bet switch is when all the reels are stopped, credits have accumulated the maximum prescribed number or more (3 or more and 50 or less in this embodiment), and the bet number is less than the maximum prescribed number (this embodiment 0 or more and less than 3 in terms of form).

In addition, the effective period of the start switch is the state in which the number of bets is set to the specified number (including bets made in the automatic betting process), and the effective period of the left stop switch is the period in which the left reel rotates at a constant speed. The effective period of the middle stop switch is the state in which the middle reel is rotating at a constant speed (constant speed state), and the effective period of the right stop switch is the state in which the right reel is at a constant speed. It is a state of high speed rotation (constant speed state), the valid period of the settlement switch is a state in which all the reels are stopped and 1 or more is stored in the credit, and the valid period of the reset switch is This is a state in which an error is detected and an error flag is set (the validity period may be set even during the setting change mode).

Next, the predetermined processing executed by various main switches will be described. The predetermined processing based on the MAX bet switch when the MAX bet switch sensor detects the operation of the MAX bet switch during the effective period of the MAX bet switch is 3 bet processing, etc., and the start switch sensor is activated during the effective period of the start switch. Predetermined processing based on the start switch when the operation of the start switch is detected includes internal lottery processing, reel rotation processing, etc. When the left stop switch sensor detects the operation of the left stop switch during the valid period of the left stop switch The predetermined processing based on the left stop switch is the stop control processing of the left reel, etc., and the predetermined processing based on the middle stop switch when the middle stop switch sensor detects the operation of the middle stop switch during the effective period of the middle stop switch The processing is the stop control processing of the middle reel, etc. The predetermined processing based on the right stop switch when the right stop switch sensor detects the operation of the right stop switch during the valid period of the right stop switch is the stop control of the right reel. The predetermined processing based on the settlement switch when the settlement switch sensor detects the operation of the settlement switch during the validity period of the settlement switch is settlement processing (payout processing), etc., and is reset during the validity period of the reset switch. The predetermined processing based on the reset switch when the switch sensor detects the operation of the reset switch includes error cancellation processing and the like.

When a plurality of main switches among various main switches are operated at the same time, the processing based on the operated main switch may not be executed. The operation when such a plurality of main switches are simultaneously operated (all of the plurality of main switches are ON) will be described in detail below.

(Process 1 of other main switches when MAX bet switch is invalid detection)
A description will be given of the processing when the MAX bet switch is detected to be invalid and another main switch is operated while this state continues. When the MAX bed switch is in an invalid detection state, if the start switch sensor detects the operation of the start switch during the effective period of the start switch, the predetermined processing based on the start switch is not executed, and the left stop switch is not executed during the effective period of the left stop switch. When the stop switch sensor detects the operation of the left stop switch, the predetermined processing based on the left stop switch is not executed, and when the middle stop switch sensor detects the operation of the middle stop switch during the effective period of the middle stop switch, the middle If the right stop switch sensor detects the operation of the right stop switch during the effective period of the right stop switch without executing the prescribed processing based on the stop switch, the prescribed processing based on the right stop switch is not executed and the adjustment switch is operated. When the settlement switch sensor detects the operation of the settlement switch during the valid period, the predetermined processing based on the settlement switch is not executed, and when the reset switch sensor detects the operation of the reset switch during the valid period of the reset switch, the reset switch It is configured to execute a predetermined process based on

With this configuration, when the MAX bet switch malfunctions and is always ON (the level data of the MAX bet switch sensor is always 1) regardless of whether the player operates the MAX bet switch or not. does not execute a predetermined process based on other main switches (except the reset switch), it becomes easy to perceive that the MAX bet switch is out of order. In addition, by not executing a predetermined process based on the settlement switch, it is possible to prevent settlement when the MAX bet switch fails due to fraud, and to prevent illegal profit exploitation of the game parlor. Furthermore, since the predetermined processing based on the reset switch is executed, when errors occur simultaneously, the error can be canceled and the warning sound can be stopped, so that the operation of the game hall can be prevented.

(Other main switch processing 2 when MAX bet switch is invalid detection)
A description will be given of the processing when the MAX bet switch is detected to be invalid and another main switch is operated while this state continues. When the MAX bet switch is in an invalid detection state, if the start switch sensor detects the operation of the start switch during the effective period of the start switch, the predetermined processing based on the start switch is not executed, and the left stop switch is not executed during the effective period of the left stop switch. When the stop switch sensor detects the operation of the left stop switch, the predetermined processing based on the left stop switch is not executed, and when the middle stop switch sensor detects the operation of the middle stop switch during the effective period of the middle stop switch, the middle If the right stop switch sensor detects the operation of the right stop switch during the valid period of the right stop switch without executing the prescribed processing based on the stop switch, the prescribed processing based on the right stop switch is not executed and the adjustment switch is operated. When the settlement switch sensor detects the operation of the settlement switch during the valid period, a predetermined process based on the settlement switch is executed, and when the reset switch sensor detects the operation of the reset switch during the valid period of the reset switch, it is based on the reset switch. It is configured to execute predetermined processing.

With this configuration, if the MAX bet switch is always ON due to a failure, the predetermined processing based on other main switches (excluding the adjustment switch and reset switch) will not be executed, so the MAX It becomes easier to detect that the bed switch is out of order. Further, by executing a predetermined process based on the settlement switch, the medals that the player has accumulated can be discharged, and the player can stop the game at any time. Furthermore, since the predetermined processing based on the reset switch is executed, when errors occur simultaneously, the error can be canceled and the warning sound can be stopped, so that the operation of the game hall can be prevented.

(Other main switch processing 3 when MAX bet switch is invalid detection)
A description will be given of the processing when the MAX bet switch is detected to be invalid and another main switch is operated while this state continues. When the MAX bed switch is in an invalid detection state, when the start switch sensor detects the operation of the start switch during the effective period of the start switch, a predetermined process based on the start switch is executed, and the left stop is performed during the effective period of the left stop switch. When the switch sensor detects the operation of the left stop switch, the predetermined processing based on the left stop switch is executed, and when the middle stop switch sensor detects the operation of the middle stop switch during the effective period of the middle stop switch, the middle stop switch When the right stop switch sensor detects the operation of the right stop switch during the effective period of the right stop switch, the predetermined process based on the right stop switch is executed, and settlement is made during the effective period of the adjustment switch When the switch sensor detects the operation of the adjustment switch, the predetermined processing based on the adjustment switch is executed, and when the reset switch sensor detects the operation of the reset switch during the valid period of the reset switch, the predetermined processing based on the reset switch is performed. configured to run.

With this configuration, even if the MAX bet switch is always ON due to a failure, the game can be progressed, so even if the MAX bet switch fails at any timing during the game, the game can be continued. can be completed. As a result, since the game can be executed for the amount of the bet used by the player at the start of the game, trouble between the player and the game hall can be prevented. Also, by executing a predetermined process based on the settlement switch, the medals that the player has accumulated can be discharged, and the player can stop the game at any time. Furthermore, since the predetermined processing based on the reset switch can be executed, even if the MAX bed switch is always ON due to a failure and a predetermined error occurs at the same time, the operation of the reset switch It is possible to cancel the predetermined error and stop the output of the warning sound associated with the predetermined error, so that it is possible not to interfere with the operation of the game arcade or other players' games.

(Other main switch processing 4 when MAX bet switch is invalid detection)
A description will be given of the processing when the MAX bet switch is detected to be invalid and another main switch is operated while this state continues. When the MAX bed switch is in an invalid detection state, if the start switch sensor detects the operation of the start switch during the effective period of the start switch, the predetermined processing based on the start switch is not executed, and the left stop switch is not executed during the effective period of the left stop switch. When the stop switch sensor detects the operation of the left stop switch, the predetermined processing based on the left stop switch is executed, and when the middle stop switch sensor detects the operation of the middle stop switch during the effective period of the middle stop switch, the middle stop If the right stop switch sensor detects the operation of the right stop switch during the effective period of the right stop switch, the predetermined process based on the right stop switch is executed, and during the effective period of the adjustment switch When the adjustment switch sensor detects the operation of the adjustment switch, the predetermined processing based on the adjustment switch is not executed, and when the reset switch sensor detects the operation of the reset switch during the effective period of the reset switch, the predetermined processing based on the reset switch configured to process.

With this configuration, even if the MAX bet switch is always ON due to a failure, the game can be progressed during the game (for example, the stop button can be operated while the reels are rotating). Since it is effective, the rotation of the reel can be stopped), so even if the MAX bet switch fails at any timing during the game, the game can be completed, and the bet amount used by the player at the start of the game can be completed. Since the game can be executed, trouble between the player and the game hall can be prevented. Further, since a new game cannot be started while the MAX bet switch is out of order, it is possible to prevent troubles between the player and the game hall. In addition, by not executing a predetermined process based on the settlement switch, it is possible to prevent settlement when the MAX bet switch fails due to fraud, and to prevent illegal profit exploitation of the game parlor. Furthermore, since a predetermined process based on the reset switch can be executed, even if the MAX bed switch is always ON due to a failure and a predetermined error has occurred, the reset switch can be operated to perform a predetermined can be canceled, and the output of the warning sound associated with the predetermined error can be stopped, so that it is possible not to interfere with the operation of the game arcade or other players' games.

(Processing 1 of other main switches when the start switch is invalid detection)
A description will be given of the processing when the start switch is detected to be invalid and another main switch is operated while this state continues. When the start switch is in the invalid detection state, if the MAX bed switch sensor detects the operation of the MAX bed switch during the valid period of the MAX bed switch, the predetermined processing based on the MAX bed switch is not executed, and the left stop switch is activated When the left stop switch sensor detects the operation of the left stop switch during the period, the predetermined processing based on the left stop switch is not executed, and the middle stop switch sensor detects the operation of the middle stop switch during the effective period of the middle stop switch. when the right stop switch does not perform predetermined processing based on the middle stop switch, and when the right stop switch sensor detects operation of the right stop switch during the effective period of the right stop switch, does not perform predetermined processing based on the right stop switch, When the settlement switch sensor detects the operation of the settlement switch during the valid period of the settlement switch, the predetermined processing based on the settlement switch is not executed, and when the reset switch sensor detects the operation of the reset switch during the valid period of the reset switch It is configured to execute a predetermined process based on the reset switch.

With this configuration, when the start switch is always on due to a failure, the predetermined processing based on the other main switches (excluding the reset switch) is not executed, so the start switch fails. It becomes easier to perceive that In addition, by not executing the predetermined processing based on the settlement switch, it is possible to prevent the settlement when the start switch fails due to fraud, and to prevent the illegal exploitation of the profit of the game parlor. Furthermore, since a predetermined process based on the reset switch can be executed, even if the start switch is always on due to a failure and a predetermined error has occurred, the reset switch can be operated to perform a predetermined process. Since the error can be canceled and the output of the warning sound related to the predetermined error can be stopped, it is possible not to interfere with the operation of the game arcade or other players' games.

(Processing 2 of other main switches when the start switch is invalid detection)
A description will be given of the processing when the start switch is detected to be invalid and another main switch is operated while this state continues. When the start switch is in the invalid detection state, if the MAX bed switch sensor detects the operation of the MAX bed switch during the valid period of the MAX bed switch, the predetermined processing based on the MAX bed switch is not executed, and the left stop switch is activated When the left stop switch sensor detects the operation of the left stop switch during the period, the predetermined processing based on the left stop switch is not executed, and the middle stop switch sensor detects the operation of the middle stop switch during the effective period of the middle stop switch. when the right stop switch does not perform predetermined processing based on the middle stop switch, and when the right stop switch sensor detects operation of the right stop switch during the effective period of the right stop switch, does not perform predetermined processing based on the right stop switch, When the settlement switch sensor detects the operation of the settlement switch during the validity period of the settlement switch, a predetermined process based on the settlement switch is executed, and when the reset switch sensor detects the operation of the reset switch during the validity period of the reset switch, reset It is configured to perform a predetermined process based on the switch.

With this configuration, when the start switch is always on due to a failure, the predetermined processing based on the other main switches (excluding the adjustment switch and reset switch) is not executed. It becomes easy to detect that the is out of order. Also, by executing a predetermined process based on the settlement switch, the medals that the player has accumulated can be discharged, and the player can stop the game at any time. Furthermore, since a predetermined process based on the reset switch can be executed, even if the start switch is always on due to a failure and a predetermined error has occurred, the reset switch can be operated to perform a predetermined process. Since the error can be canceled and the output of the warning sound related to the predetermined error can be stopped, it is possible not to interfere with the operation of the game arcade or other players' games.

(Process 3 of other main switches when the start switch is invalid detection)
A description will be given of the processing when the start switch is detected to be invalid and another main switch is operated while this state continues. When the start switch is in an invalid detection state and the MAX bet switch sensor detects the operation of the MAX bet switch during the valid period of the MAX bet switch, a predetermined process based on the MAX bet switch is executed, and the left stop switch is valid during the valid period. When the left stop switch sensor detects the operation of the left stop switch in , the predetermined processing based on the left stop switch is executed, and when the middle stop switch sensor detects the operation of the middle stop switch during the effective period of the middle stop switch Predetermined processing based on the middle stop switch is executed, and when the right stop switch sensor detects the operation of the right stop switch during the effective period of the right stop switch, predetermined processing is executed based on the right stop switch, and the adjustment switch is activated When the adjustment switch sensor detects the operation of the adjustment switch during the period, the predetermined processing based on the adjustment switch is executed, and when the reset switch sensor detects the operation of the reset switch during the effective period of the reset switch, the predetermined processing based on the reset switch It is configured to execute the processing of

With such a configuration, the game can be continued even if the start switch is always turned on due to a failure, so that the game can be completed even if the start switch fails at any timing during the game. be able to. As a result, since the game can be executed for the amount of the bet used by the player at the start of the game, trouble between the player and the game hall can be prevented. Also, by executing a predetermined process based on the settlement switch, the medals that the player has accumulated can be discharged, and the player can stop the game at any time. Furthermore, since a predetermined process based on the reset switch can be executed, even if the start switch is always on due to a failure and a predetermined error has occurred, the reset switch can be operated to perform a predetermined process. Since the error can be canceled and the output of the warning sound related to the predetermined error can be stopped, it is possible not to interfere with the operation of the game arcade or other players' games.

(Process 4 of other main switches when the start switch is invalid detection)
A description will be given of the processing when the start switch is detected to be invalid and another main switch is operated while this state continues. When the start switch is in the invalid detection state, if the MAX bed switch sensor detects the operation of the MAX bed switch during the valid period of the MAX bed switch, the predetermined processing based on the MAX bed switch is not executed, and the left stop switch is activated When the left stop switch sensor detects the operation of the left stop switch during the period, predetermined processing based on the left stop switch is executed, and when the middle stop switch sensor detects the operation of the middle stop switch during the effective period of the middle stop switch performs predetermined processing based on the middle stop switch, and when the right stop switch sensor detects the operation of the right stop switch during the effective period of the right stop switch, performs predetermined processing based on the right stop switch, and the adjustment switch When the settlement switch sensor detects the operation of the settlement switch during the valid period, the predetermined processing based on the settlement switch is not executed, and when the reset switch sensor detects the operation of the reset switch during the valid period of the reset switch, the reset switch It is configured to execute a predetermined process based on

With such a configuration, even if the start switch is always ON due to a failure, the game can be progressed during the game (for example, the operation of the stop button is valid while the reel is rotating). Therefore, even if the start switch fails at any time during the game, the game can be completed. Since it can be executed, it is possible to prevent trouble between the player and the game hall. In addition, since a new bet cannot be made while the start switch is out of order, it is difficult to start the game, thereby preventing troubles between the player and the game hall. In addition, by not executing a predetermined process based on the settlement switch, it is possible to prevent settlement when the MAX bet switch fails due to fraud, and to prevent illegal profit exploitation of the game parlor. Furthermore, since a predetermined process based on the reset switch can be executed, even if the start switch is always on due to a failure and a predetermined error has occurred, the reset switch can be operated to perform a predetermined process. Since the error can be canceled and the output of the warning sound related to the predetermined error can be stopped, it is possible not to interfere with the operation of the game arcade or other players' games.

(Process 1 of other main switches when the left stop switch is invalid detection)
The processing when the left stop switch is detected to be invalid and another main switch is operated while this state continues will be described. When the left stop switch is in an invalid detection state, if the MAX bed switch sensor detects the operation of the MAX bed switch during the valid period of the MAX bed switch, the predetermined processing based on the MAX bed switch is not executed, and the start switch is activated When the start switch sensor detects the operation of the start switch during the period, the predetermined processing based on the start switch is not executed, and when the middle stop switch sensor detects the operation of the middle stop switch during the effective period of the middle stop switch, the middle If the right stop switch sensor detects the operation of the right stop switch during the effective period of the right stop switch without executing the prescribed processing based on the stop switch, the prescribed processing based on the right stop switch is not executed and the adjustment switch is operated. When the settlement switch sensor detects the operation of the settlement switch during the valid period, the predetermined processing based on the settlement switch is not executed, and when the reset switch sensor detects the operation of the reset switch during the valid period of the reset switch, the reset switch It is configured to execute a predetermined process based on

With this configuration, when the left stop switch is always ON due to a failure, the predetermined processing based on the other main switches is not executed, so that the left stop switch is out of order. easier to perceive. In addition, by not executing the predetermined processing based on the settlement switch, it is possible to prevent the settlement when the left stop switch fails due to fraudulence, thereby preventing the illegal profit exploitation of the game parlor. Furthermore, since a predetermined process based on the reset switch can be executed, even if the left stop switch is always ON due to a failure and a predetermined error has occurred, the reset switch can be operated to perform a predetermined process. can be canceled, and the output of the warning sound associated with the predetermined error can be stopped, so that it is possible not to interfere with the operation of the game arcade or other players' games.

(Processing 2 of other main switches when the left stop switch is invalid detection)
The processing when the left stop switch is detected to be invalid and another main switch is operated while this state continues will be described. When the left stop switch is in an invalid detection state, if the MAX bed switch sensor detects the operation of the MAX bed switch during the valid period of the MAX bed switch, the predetermined processing based on the MAX bed switch is not executed, and the start switch is activated When the start switch sensor detects the operation of the start switch during the period, the predetermined processing based on the start switch is not executed, and when the middle stop switch sensor detects the operation of the middle stop switch during the effective period of the middle stop switch, the middle If the right stop switch sensor detects the operation of the right stop switch during the valid period of the right stop switch without executing the prescribed processing based on the stop switch, the prescribed processing based on the right stop switch is not executed and the adjustment switch is operated. When the settlement switch sensor detects the operation of the settlement switch during the valid period, a predetermined process based on the settlement switch is executed, and when the reset switch sensor detects the operation of the reset switch during the valid period of the reset switch, it is based on the reset switch. It is configured to execute predetermined processing.

With this configuration, when the left stop switch is always ON due to a failure, the predetermined processing based on the other main switches is not executed, so that the left stop switch is out of order. easier to perceive. Further, by executing a predetermined process based on the settlement switch, the medals that the player has accumulated can be discharged, and the player can stop the game at any time. Furthermore, since a predetermined process based on the reset switch can be executed, even if the left stop switch is always ON due to a failure and a predetermined error has occurred, the reset switch can be operated to perform a predetermined process. can be canceled, and the output of the warning sound associated with the predetermined error can be stopped, so that it is possible not to interfere with the operation of the game arcade or other players' games.

(Process 3 of other main switches when the left stop switch is invalid detection)
The processing when the left stop switch is detected to be invalid and another main switch is operated while this state continues will be described. When the left stop switch is in an invalid detection state, when the MAX bet switch sensor detects the operation of the MAX bet switch during the valid period of the MAX bet switch, a predetermined process based on the MAX bet switch is executed, and the valid period of the start switch When the start switch sensor detects the operation of the start switch, the predetermined processing based on the start switch is executed, and when the middle stop switch sensor detects the operation of the middle stop switch during the valid period of the middle stop switch, the middle stop switch When the right stop switch sensor detects the operation of the right stop switch during the effective period of the right stop switch, the predetermined process based on the right stop switch is executed, and settlement is made during the effective period of the adjustment switch When the switch sensor detects the operation of the adjustment switch, the predetermined processing based on the adjustment switch is executed, and when the reset switch sensor detects the operation of the reset switch during the valid period of the reset switch, the predetermined processing based on the reset switch is performed. configured to run.

With this configuration, even if the left stop switch is always turned on due to a failure, the game can be continued. can be completed. As a result, since the game can be executed for the amount of the bet used by the player at the start of the game, trouble between the player and the game hall can be prevented. Further, by executing a predetermined process based on the settlement switch, the medals that the player has accumulated can be discharged, and the player can stop the game at any time. Furthermore, since a predetermined process based on the reset switch can be executed, even if the left stop switch is always ON due to a failure and a predetermined error has occurred, the reset switch can be operated to perform a predetermined process. can be canceled, and the output of the warning sound associated with the predetermined error can be stopped, so that it is possible not to interfere with the operation of the game arcade or other players' games.

(Processing 4 of other main switches when the left stop switch is invalid detection)
The processing when the left stop switch is detected to be invalid and another main switch is operated while this state continues will be described. When the left stop switch is in an invalid detection state, when the MAX bet switch sensor detects the operation of the MAX bet switch during the valid period of the MAX bet switch, a predetermined process based on the MAX bet switch is executed, and the valid period of the start switch When the start switch sensor detects the operation of the start switch, the predetermined processing based on the start switch is executed, and when the middle stop switch sensor detects the operation of the middle stop switch during the valid period of the middle stop switch, the middle stop switch If the right stop switch sensor detects the operation of the right stop switch during the valid period of the right stop switch, the specified process based on the right stop switch is not performed and the valid period of the adjustment switch When the adjustment switch sensor detects the operation of the adjustment switch, the predetermined processing based on the adjustment switch is executed, and when the reset switch sensor detects the operation of the reset switch during the valid period of the reset switch, the predetermined processing based on the reset switch is performed. configured to process.

With this configuration, when the left stop switch is always on due to a failure, the predetermined processing based on the middle and right stop switches is not executed, so the left stop switch is out of order. becomes easier to perceive. Also, by executing a predetermined process based on the settlement switch, the medals that the player has accumulated can be discharged, and the player can stop the game at any time. Furthermore, since a predetermined process based on the reset switch can be executed, even if the left stop switch is always ON due to a failure and a predetermined error has occurred, the reset switch can be operated to perform a predetermined process. can be canceled, and the output of the warning sound associated with the predetermined error can be stopped, so that it is possible not to interfere with the operation of the game arcade or other players' games.

The processing of other main switches when the middle stop switch is disabled and the processing of other main switches when the right stop switch is disabled are the same as those of the other main switches when the left stop switch is disabled. Since it is the same as the processing 1 to 4 of the switch, the description is omitted.

(Process 1 of other main switches when settlement switch detects invalidity)
A description will be given of the processing when another main switch is operated while the settlement switch is detected to be invalid and this state continues. When the settlement switch is in the invalid detection state, if the MAX bet switch sensor detects the operation of the MAX bet switch during the valid period of the MAX bet switch, the predetermined processing based on the MAX bet switch is not executed, and the valid period of the start switch is When the start switch sensor detects the operation of the start switch, the predetermined processing based on the start switch is not executed, and when the left stop switch sensor detects the operation of the left stop switch during the effective period of the left stop switch, the left stop If the middle stop switch sensor detects the operation of the middle stop switch during the effective period of the middle stop switch without executing the predetermined processing based on the switch, the predetermined processing based on the middle stop switch is not executed and the right stop switch is activated. When the right stop switch sensor detects the operation of the right stop switch during the effective period, the prescribed processing based on the right stop switch is not executed, and when the reset switch sensor detects the operation of the reset switch during the effective period of the reset switch It is configured to execute a predetermined process based on the reset switch.

With this configuration, when the adjustment switch is always on due to a failure, the predetermined processing based on the other main switches is not executed, so that the failure of the adjustment switch can be sensed. easier. In addition, by not executing the predetermined processing based on the settlement switch, it is possible to prevent the settlement when the reset switch is operated by fraud, and to prevent the game parlor from being illegally exploited. Furthermore, since a predetermined process based on the reset switch can be executed, even if the settlement switch is always on due to a failure and a predetermined error has occurred, the reset switch can be operated to perform a predetermined process. Since the error can be canceled and the output of the warning sound related to the predetermined error can be stopped, it is possible not to interfere with the operation of the game arcade or other players' games.

(Process 2 of other main switches when settlement switch detects invalidity)
A description will be given of the processing when another main switch is operated while the settlement switch is detected to be invalid and this state continues. When the settlement switch is in an invalid detection state, if the MAX bet switch sensor detects the operation of the MAX bet switch during the valid period of the MAX bet switch, predetermined processing based on the MAX bet switch is performed, and during the valid period of the start switch When the start switch sensor detects the operation of the start switch, a predetermined process based on the start switch is executed, and when the left stop switch sensor detects the operation of the left stop switch during the effective period of the left stop switch, the left stop switch is activated. When the middle stop switch sensor detects the operation of the middle stop switch during the effective period of the middle stop switch, the predetermined processing based on the middle stop switch is executed, and the right stop switch is executed during the effective period of the right stop switch. When the stop switch sensor detects the operation of the right stop switch, the predetermined processing based on the right stop switch is executed, and when the reset switch sensor detects the operation of the reset switch during the valid period of the reset switch, the predetermined processing based on the reset switch is performed. It is configured to execute the processing of

With such a configuration, the game can be progressed even when the settlement switch is always ON due to a failure, so that the game can be completed even if the settlement switch fails at any timing during the game. be able to. As a result, since the game can be executed for the amount of the bet used by the player at the start of the game, trouble between the player and the game hall can be prevented. Furthermore, since a predetermined process based on the reset switch can be executed, even if the settlement switch is always on due to a failure and a predetermined error has occurred, the reset switch can be operated to perform a predetermined process. Since the error can be canceled and the output of the warning sound related to the predetermined error can be stopped, it is possible not to interfere with the operation of the game arcade or other players' games.

(Process 3 of other main switches when settlement switch detects invalidity)
A description will be given of the processing when another main switch is operated while the settlement switch is detected to be invalid and this state continues. When the settlement switch is in the invalid detection state, if the MAX bet switch sensor detects the operation of the MAX bet switch during the valid period of the MAX bet switch, the predetermined processing based on the MAX bet switch is not executed, and the valid period of the start switch is When the start switch sensor detects the operation of the start switch, the predetermined processing based on the start switch is not executed, and when the left stop switch sensor detects the operation of the left stop switch during the effective period of the left stop switch, the left stop Execute predetermined processing based on the switch, and when the middle stop switch sensor detects the operation of the middle stop switch during the valid period of the middle stop switch, execute predetermined processing based on the middle stop switch, and perform the predetermined processing based on the right stop switch When the right stop switch sensor detects the operation of the right stop switch in , the predetermined processing based on the right stop switch is executed, and when the reset switch sensor detects the operation of the reset switch during the effective period of the reset switch, the reset switch It is configured to execute a predetermined process based on

With this configuration, even if the settlement switch is always ON due to a failure, the game can be progressed during the game (for example, if the reel is rotating, the operation of the stop button is valid. Therefore, the rotation of the reel can be stopped), so even if the settlement switch fails at any time during the game, the game can be completed, and the game for the bet used by the player at the start of the game is lost. Since it can be executed, it is possible to prevent trouble between the player and the game hall. In addition, since a new bet cannot be made while the settlement switch is out of order, it is difficult to start a new game, thereby preventing troubles between the player and the game hall. Furthermore, since a predetermined process based on the reset switch can be executed, even if the settlement switch is always on due to a failure and a predetermined error has occurred, the reset switch can be operated to perform a predetermined process. Since the error can be canceled and the output of the warning sound related to the predetermined error can be stopped, it is possible not to interfere with the operation of the game arcade or other players' games.

(Process 1 of other main switches when the reset switch is invalid detection)
A description will be given of the processing when the reset switch is detected to be invalid and another main switch is operated while this state continues. When the reset switch is in an invalid detection state, if the MAX bet switch sensor detects the operation of the MAX bet switch during the valid period of the MAX bet switch, the predetermined processing based on the MAX bet switch is not executed, and the valid period of the start switch is When the start switch sensor detects the operation of the start switch, the predetermined processing based on the start switch is not executed, and when the left stop switch sensor detects the operation of the left stop switch during the effective period of the left stop switch, the left stop If the middle stop switch sensor detects the operation of the middle stop switch during the effective period of the middle stop switch without executing the predetermined processing based on the switch, the predetermined processing based on the middle stop switch is not executed and the right stop switch is activated. When the right stop switch sensor detects the operation of the right stop switch during the valid period, the prescribed processing based on the right stop switch is not executed, and when the adjustment switch sensor detects the operation of the adjustment switch during the valid period of the adjustment switch It is configured not to execute a predetermined process based on the settlement switch.

With this configuration, when the reset switch is always ON due to a failure, the predetermined processing based on other main switches is not executed, so that the failure of the reset switch can be sensed. easier. In addition, by not executing the predetermined processing based on the settlement switch, it is possible to prevent the settlement when the reset switch is operated by fraud, and to prevent the game parlor from being illegally exploited. Furthermore, when an error occurs while the reset switch is in an invalid detection state, the error cannot be cleared, so it is possible to prevent fraudulent actions that use fraudulent means to reset the error.

(Processing 2 of other main switches when the reset switch is invalid detection)
A description will be given of the processing when the reset switch is detected to be invalid and another main switch is operated while this state continues. When the reset switch is in an invalid detection state, if the MAX bet switch sensor detects the operation of the MAX bet switch during the valid period of the MAX bet switch, the predetermined processing based on the MAX bet switch is not executed, and the valid period of the start switch is When the start switch sensor detects the operation of the start switch, the predetermined processing based on the start switch is not executed, and when the left stop switch sensor detects the operation of the left stop switch during the effective period of the left stop switch, the left stop If the middle stop switch sensor detects the operation of the middle stop switch during the valid period of the middle stop switch without executing the predetermined processing based on the switch, the predetermined processing based on the middle stop switch is not executed and the right stop switch is activated. When the right stop switch sensor detects the operation of the right stop switch during the valid period, the prescribed processing based on the right stop switch is not executed, and when the adjustment switch sensor detects the operation of the adjustment switch during the valid period of the adjustment switch It is configured to execute a predetermined process based on the settlement switch.

With this configuration, when the reset switch is always ON due to a failure, the reset switch fails because the predetermined processing based on the other main switches (excluding the adjustment switch) is not executed. It becomes easier to perceive that Also, by executing a predetermined process based on the settlement switch, the medals that the player has accumulated can be discharged, and the player can stop the game at any time. Furthermore, when an error occurs while the reset switch is in an invalid detection state, the error cannot be cleared, so it is possible to prevent fraudulent actions that use fraudulent means to reset the error. Furthermore, when an error occurs while the reset switch is in an invalid detection state, the error cannot be cleared, so it is possible to prevent fraudulent actions that use fraudulent means to reset the error.

(Process 3 of other main switches when the reset switch is invalid detection)
A description will be given of the processing when the reset switch is detected to be invalid and another main switch is operated while this state continues. When the reset switch is in an invalid detection state and the MAX bed switch sensor detects the operation of the MAX bed switch during the valid period of the MAX bed switch, a predetermined process based on the MAX bed switch is executed, and during the valid period of the start switch When the start switch sensor detects the operation of the start switch, a predetermined process based on the start switch is executed, and when the left stop switch sensor detects the operation of the left stop switch during the effective period of the left stop switch, the left stop switch is activated. When the middle stop switch sensor detects the operation of the middle stop switch during the effective period of the middle stop switch, the predetermined processing based on the middle stop switch is executed, and the right stop switch is executed during the effective period of the right stop switch. When the stop switch sensor detects the operation of the right stop switch, the predetermined processing based on the right stop switch is executed, and when the adjustment switch sensor detects the operation of the adjustment switch during the valid period of the adjustment switch, the predetermined processing based on the adjustment switch It is configured to execute the processing of

With such a configuration, the game can be continued even if the reset switch is always ON due to a failure, so that the game can be completed even if the reset switch fails at any timing during the game. be able to. As a result, since the game can be executed for the amount of the bet used by the player at the start of the game, trouble between the player and the game hall can be prevented. Further, by executing a predetermined process based on the settlement switch, the medals that the player has accumulated can be discharged, and the player can stop the game at any time. Furthermore, when an error occurs while the reset switch is in an invalid detection state, the error cannot be cleared, so it is possible to prevent fraudulent actions that use fraudulent means to reset the error.

(Process 4 of other main switches when the reset switch is invalid detection)
A description will be given of the processing when the reset switch is detected to be invalid and another main switch is operated while this state continues. When the reset switch is in an invalid detection state, if the MAX bet switch sensor detects the operation of the MAX bet switch during the valid period of the MAX bet switch, the predetermined processing based on the MAX bet switch is not executed, and the valid period of the start switch is When the start switch sensor detects the operation of the start switch, a predetermined process based on the start switch is performed, and when the left stop switch sensor detects the operation of the left stop switch during the effective period of the left stop switch, the left stop switch When the middle stop switch sensor detects the operation of the middle stop switch during the effective period of the middle stop switch, execute predetermined processing based on the middle stop switch, and during the effective period of the right stop switch When the right stop switch sensor detects the operation of the right stop switch, the predetermined processing based on the right stop switch is executed, and when the adjustment switch sensor detects the operation of the adjustment switch during the valid period of the adjustment switch, it is based on the adjustment switch. It is configured not to execute a predetermined process.

With this configuration, even if the reset switch is always ON due to a failure, the game can be progressed (for example, if the reel is rotating, the operation of the stop button is effective, so the reel can be stopped). rotation can be stopped), the game can be completed even if the reset switch fails at any timing during the game. However, even if the MAX bet switch sensor detects the operation of the MAX bet switch, it does not execute a predetermined process, making it difficult to start a new game. In addition, by not executing the predetermined processing based on the settlement switch, it is possible to prevent the settlement when the reset switch is operated by fraud, and to prevent the game parlor from being illegally exploited. Furthermore, when an error occurs while the reset switch is in an invalid detection state, the error cannot be cleared, so it is possible to prevent fraudulent actions that use fraudulent means to reset the error.

If an error occurs while the reset switch is in the invalid detection state, the error cannot be cleared because the error is canceled based on the rising edge of the reset switch signal. In the case of , the error cannot be cleared because the rise signal does not turn ON. Also, if the configuration is such that the error is canceled based on the falling signal instead of the rising signal (the error is canceled by OFF→ON→OFF), the reset switch is turned ON and OFF when the error is canceled by an illegal operation. Therefore, it is possible to make the error cancellation more difficult.

(Processing of other main switches when the MAX bet switch is effective detection)
A description will be given of the processing when the MAX bet switch is detected valid and another main switch is operated while this state continues. Among the other main switches, the start switch, the adjustment switch, or the reset switch can be effective when the MAX bet switch is detected to be effective. When the start switch sensor detects the operation of the start switch during the effective period of the start switch when the MAX bed switch is in the effective detection state, the predetermined processing based on the start switch is not executed. By combining such a configuration with the process 3 of the other main switch when the MAX bet switch is invalid detection, when the MAX bet switch is in the invalid detection state, the start switch sensor is activated during the valid period of the start switch. When the operation of the start switch is detected, a predetermined process based on the start switch is executed, and when the start switch sensor detects the operation of the start switch during the effective period of the start switch when the MAX bed switch is in the effective detection state. It becomes the structure which does not perform the predetermined|prescribed process based on a start switch.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the illegal operation of the MAX bet switch from progressing the game. In other words, if the switch continues to be operated after the MAX bet switch is detected to be valid, the possibility of fraud is high, and the progress of the game is disabled, and the switch is continued after the MAX bet switch is detected to be invalid. It is possible to proceed with the game assuming that the possibility of cheating is low in the state of being operated.

Further, when the MAX bet switch is in the effective detection state, when the settlement switch sensor detects the operation of the settlement switch during the valid period of the settlement switch, the predetermined processing based on the settlement switch is not executed. By combining such a configuration with the processing 2 or 3 of the other main switch when the MAX bet switch is invalid detection, when the MAX bet switch is in the invalid detection state, settlement is made during the valid period of the settlement switch When the switch sensor detects the operation of the adjustment switch, a predetermined process based on the adjustment switch is executed, and when the MAX bed switch is in the valid detection state, the adjustment switch sensor detects the operation of the adjustment switch during the valid period of the adjustment switch. Then, the predetermined processing based on the settlement switch is not executed.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent fraudulent settlement of the game due to fraudulent operation of the MAX bet switch. In other words, if the switch continues to be operated after the MAX bet switch is detected to be valid, it is highly likely that the game is fraudulent, and game settlement is disabled. It is possible to settle the game because the possibility of fraud is low when the game is being operated.

In addition, when the MAX bed switch is in the effective detection state, when the reset switch sensor detects the operation of the reset switch sensor during the effective period of the reset switch, the predetermined processing based on the reset switch is not executed. By combining such a configuration with the processing 1, 2, 3, or 4 of the other main switches when the MAX bet switch is invalid detection, when the MAX bet switch is invalid detection state, the reset switch When the reset switch sensor detects the operation of the reset switch during the effective period, a predetermined process based on the reset switch is executed, and when the MAX bed switch is in the effective detection state, the reset switch sensor detects the reset switch during the effective period of the reset switch. is detected, the predetermined processing based on the reset switch is not executed.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent illegal operation of the MAX bet switch to cancel the error. In other words, if the switch continues to be operated after the MAX bet switch is detected to be valid, the possibility of fraud is high, and the error cancellation is disabled, and the switch is continuously operated after the MAX bet switch is detected to be invalid. It is possible to cancel the error because the possibility of fraud is low in this state.

(Processing of other main switches when the start switch is valid detection)
A description will be given of the processing when another main switch is operated while the start switch is valid and this state continues. Of the other main switches, the stop switch (left stop switch, middle stop switch, right stop switch) or reset switch can be effective when the start switch is detected to be effective. When the start switch is in the valid detection state and the stop switch sensor detects the operation of the stop switch during the valid period of the stop switch, the predetermined processing based on the stop switch is not executed. By combining such a configuration with the processing 3 or 4 of the other main switch when the start switch is invalid detection, when the start switch is in the invalid detection state, the stop switch sensor is detected during the effective period of the stop switch. When detects the operation of the stop switch, it executes the predetermined processing based on the stop switch, and when the start switch is in the effective detection state, when the stop switch sensor detects the operation of the stop switch during the effective period of the stop switch It becomes the structure which does not perform the predetermined|prescribed process based on a stop switch.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the illegal operation of the start switch from progressing the game. In other words, the state in which the switch is continuously operated after the start switch is detected to be valid is highly likely to be fraudulent, and the progress of the game is disabled, and the switch is continuously operated after the start switch is detected to be invalid. The game is allowed to proceed because the possibility of fraud is low in the state where the player is playing.

Further, when the start switch is in the effective detection state, when the reset switch sensor detects operation of the reset switch during the effective period of the reset switch, the predetermined processing based on the reset switch is not executed. By combining such a configuration with the processing 1, 2, 3, or 4 of the other main switches when the start switch is in an invalid detection state, when the start switch is in an invalid detection state, the effective period of the reset switch is When the reset switch sensor detects the operation of the reset switch, a predetermined process based on the reset switch is executed, and when the start switch is in the effective detection state, the reset switch sensor detects the operation of the reset switch during the valid period of the reset switch. When it is detected, the configuration is such that the predetermined processing based on the reset switch is not executed.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the illegal operation of the start switch from progressing the game. In other words, if the switch continues to be operated after the start switch is detected to be valid, the possibility of fraud is high, and the error cancellation is disabled. It is possible to cancel the error because the possibility of fraud is low in the state where it is.

Further, when the start switch is in the effective detection state and the stop switch sensor detects the operation of the stop switch during the effective period of the stop switch, a predetermined process based on the stop switch is executed. By combining such a configuration with the processing 1 or 2 of the other main switch when the start switch is invalid detection, when the start switch is in the invalid detection state, the stop switch sensor is detected during the effective period of the stop switch. does not execute the prescribed processing based on the stop switch when it detects the operation of the stop switch, and when the start switch is in the effective detection state and the stop switch sensor detects the operation of the stop switch during the valid period of the stop switch is configured to execute a predetermined process based on the stop switch.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the dissatisfaction of the player due to the stagnation of the progress of the game, and to make the progress of the game smooth. In other words, it is highly probable that the state in which the switch is continuously operated after the start switch is detected to be valid is the operation of the start switch operated by the player, and the operation of each stop switch is assumed to end the game to the end. It is highly possible that the start switch is operated by a factor other than the player's operation (illegal or malfunction), and the game is stopped. The operation of each stop switch is made impossible so as not to finish it to the end.

(Processing of other main switches when the stop switch is valid detection)
A description will be given of the processing when another main switch is operated while the stop switch is detected to be effective and this state continues. Among the other main switches whose operation can be valid when the stop switch is detected to be valid, the stop switch (not operated stop switch) or the reset switch corresponds. While all reels are rotating, when the left stop switch is in a valid detection state, during the effective period of the middle or right stop switch, or when the right stop switch sensor detects the operation of the middle or right stop switch It is configured not to execute a predetermined process based on the middle or right stop switch. By combining this configuration with the processing 3 of the other main switch when the left stop switch is invalid detection, when the left stop switch is in the invalid detection state, during the effective period of the middle or right stop switch When the middle or right stop switch sensor detects the operation of the middle or right stop switch, a predetermined process based on the middle or right stop switch is executed, and when the left stop switch is in a valid detection state, the middle or When the middle or right stop switch sensor detects the operation of the middle or right stop switch during the effective period of the right stop switch, the predetermined processing based on the middle or right stop switch is not executed.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the illegal operation of the left stop switch from progressing the game. In other words, if the switch continues to be operated after the left stop switch is detected to be valid, the possibility of fraud is high, and the progress of the game is disabled, and the switch continues to be operated after the left stop switch is detected to be invalid. It is possible to proceed with the game assuming that the possibility of cheating is low in the state of being operated.

Further, when the left stop switch is in a valid detection state while all the reels are rotating and the reset switch sensor detects operation of the reset switch during the effective period of the reset switch, predetermined processing based on the reset switch is not executed. is configured as follows. By combining such a configuration with the processing 1, 2, 3, or 4 of the other main switches when the left stop switch is in an invalid state, the reset switch can be operated when the left stop switch is in an invalid state. When the reset switch sensor detects the operation of the reset switch during the effective period, a predetermined process based on the reset switch is executed, and when the left stop switch is in the effective detection state, the reset switch sensor detects the reset switch during the effective period of the reset switch. is detected, the predetermined processing based on the reset switch is not executed.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the illegal operation of the left stop switch to cancel the error. In other words, if the switch continues to be operated after the left stop switch is detected to be valid, the possibility of fraud is high, and it is impossible to cancel the error. It is possible to cancel the error because the possibility of fraud is low in the state being operated.

Also, while all reels are rotating, when the left stop switch is in the effective detection state, the middle or right stop switch sensor detects the operation of the middle or right stop switch during the effective period of the middle or right stop switch. It is configured to perform a predetermined action based on the time middle or right stop switch. By combining such a configuration with the processing 1, 2, or 4 of the other main switch when the left stop switch is invalid detection, when the left stop switch is invalid detection state, middle or right stop When the middle or right stop switch sensor detects the operation of the middle or right stop switch during the effective period of the switch, the predetermined processing based on the middle or right stop switch is not executed, and the left stop switch is in the effective detection state Sometimes, when the middle or right stop switch sensor detects the operation of the middle or right stop switch during the effective period of the middle or right stop switch, a predetermined process based on the middle or right stop switch is executed. becomes.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the dissatisfaction of the player due to the stagnation of the progress of the game, and to make the progress of the game smooth. In other words, it is highly likely that the state in which the left stop switch is continuously operated after the left stop switch has been detected to be effective is the operation of the left stop switch operated by the player. If the stop switch is enabled and the switch continues to be operated after the left stop switch is detected to be invalid, there is a possibility that the left stop switch is operated by a factor other than the player's operation (illegal or malfunction). is high, it is impossible to operate the rest of the stop switches in order to prevent the game from ending to the end.

(Processing of other main switches when settlement switch is valid detection)
A description will be given of the processing when another main switch is operated while the settlement switch has been detected to be valid and this state continues. Among other main switches, the MAX bet switch or the reset switch can be activated when the settlement switch is detected to be activated. When the settlement switch is in the effective detection state, the predetermined processing based on the MAX bet switch is not executed when the MAX bet switch sensor detects the operation of the MAX bet switch during the valid period of the MAX bet switch. By combining such a configuration with the process 2 of the other main switch when the adjustment switch is invalid detection, when the adjustment switch is in the invalid detection state, the MAX bet switch sensor is activated during the valid period of the MAX bet switch. When the operation of the MAX bet switch is detected, a predetermined process based on the MAX bet switch is executed, and when the settlement switch is in the valid detection state, the MAX bet switch sensor detects the operation of the MAX bet switch during the valid period of the MAX bet switch. When detected, the configuration is such that the predetermined processing based on the MAX bet switch is not executed.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the illegality of the game from progressing due to the illegal operation of the settlement switch. In other words, the state in which the switch is continuously operated after the settlement switch is detected to be valid is highly likely to be fraudulent, and the progress of the game is disabled, and the switch is continuously operated after the settlement switch is detected to be invalid. The game is allowed to proceed because the possibility of fraud is low in the state where the player is playing. In addition, as for the situation in which the MAX bet switch can be operated while the settlement switch is in the valid detection state, when the bet is made as settlement processing, only the bet amount is settled, or when the bet is made as settlement processing, the bet amount is settled. This corresponds to the situation between settlement of the bet amount and settlement of the credit amount when the settlement is first settled and then the credit amount is settled.

Further, when the settlement switch is in the effective detection state, when the reset switch sensor detects the operation of the reset switch during the valid period of the reset switch, the predetermined processing based on the reset switch is not executed. By combining such a configuration with the processing 1, 2, or 3 of the other main switch when the adjustment switch is invalid detection, when the adjustment switch is in the invalid detection state, the reset switch is reset during the valid period of the reset switch. When the switch sensor detects the operation of the reset switch, a predetermined process based on the reset switch is executed, and when the settlement switch is in the effective detection state, the reset switch sensor detects the operation of the reset switch during the valid period of the reset switch. When the reset switch is activated, the predetermined processing is not executed.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the illegality of canceling the error due to the illegal operation of the settlement switch. In other words, if the settlement switch continues to be operated after the settlement switch is detected to be valid, the possibility of fraud is high, and the error cannot be canceled. It is possible to cancel the error because the possibility of fraud is low in the state where the

(Processing of other main switches when the reset switch is valid detection)
A description will be given of the processing when another main switch is operated while the reset switch is valid and this state continues. Among the other main switches, the MAX bet switch, the start switch, the stop switch, or the checkout switch can be effective when the reset switch is detected to be effective. When the reset switch is in the valid detection state and the MAX bet switch sensor detects the operation of the MAX bet switch during the valid period of the MAX bet switch, the predetermined processing based on the MAX bet switch is not executed. By combining such a configuration with the process 3 of another main switch when the reset switch is invalid detection, when the reset switch is in the invalid detection state, the MAX bet switch sensor is activated during the valid period of the MAX bet switch. When the operation of the MAX bet switch is detected, a predetermined process based on the MAX bet switch is executed, and when the reset switch is in the effective detection state, the MAX bet switch sensor detects the operation of the MAX bet switch during the valid period of the MAX bet switch. When detected, the configuration is such that predetermined processing based on the MAX bet switch is not executed.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the illegal operation of the reset switch from progressing the game. In other words, the state in which the switch is continuously operated after the reset switch is detected to be valid is highly likely to be fraudulent, and the progress of the game is disabled, and the switch is continuously operated after the reset switch is detected to be invalid. The game is allowed to proceed because the possibility of fraud is low in the state where the player is playing.

Further, when the reset switch is in the valid detection state and the start switch sensor detects the operation of the start switch during the effective period of the start switch, the predetermined processing based on the start switch is not executed. By combining such a configuration with the processing 3 or 4 of the other main switch when the reset switch is in an invalid detection state, when the reset switch is in an invalid detection state, the start switch sensor is detected during the effective period of the start switch. When detects the operation of the start switch, it executes a predetermined process based on the start switch, and when the reset switch is in the valid detection state, when the start switch sensor detects the operation of the start switch during the valid period of the start switch, It becomes the structure which does not perform the predetermined|prescribed process based on a start switch.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the illegal operation of the reset switch from progressing the game. In other words, the state in which the switch is continuously operated after the reset switch is detected to be valid is highly likely to be fraudulent, and the progress of the game is disabled, and the switch is continuously operated after the reset switch is detected to be invalid. The game is allowed to proceed because the possibility of fraud is low in the state where the player is playing.

In addition, when the reset switch is in the effective detection state, the predetermined processing based on the stop switch is not executed when the stop switch sensor detects the operation of the stop switch during the effective period of the stop switch. By combining such a configuration with the processing 3 or 4 of the other main switch when the reset switch is invalid detection, when the reset switch is in the invalid detection state, the stop switch sensor is detected during the effective period of the stop switch. When detects the operation of the stop switch, it executes the predetermined processing based on the stop switch, and when the reset switch is in the effective detection state, when the stop switch sensor detects the operation of the stop switch during the effective period of the stop switch It becomes the structure which does not perform the predetermined|prescribed process based on a stop switch.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the illegal operation of the reset switch from progressing the game. In other words, the state in which the switch is continuously operated after the reset switch is detected to be valid is highly likely to be fraudulent, and the progress of the game is disabled, and the switch is continuously operated after the reset switch is detected to be invalid. The game is allowed to proceed because the possibility of fraud is low in the state where the player is playing.

In addition, when the reset switch is in the effective detection state, when the settlement switch sensor detects the operation of the settlement switch during the effective period of the settlement switch, the predetermined processing based on the settlement switch is not executed. By combining such a configuration with the processing 2 or 3 of the other main switch when the reset switch is invalid detection, when the reset switch is in the invalid detection state, the adjustment switch sensor is activated during the valid period of the adjustment switch. When the sensor detects the operation of the adjustment switch, it executes the predetermined processing based on the adjustment switch, and when the reset switch is in the valid detection state, when the adjustment switch sensor detects the operation of the adjustment switch during the valid period of the adjustment switch It becomes the structure which does not perform the predetermined|prescribed process based on a settlement switch.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent fraudulent settlement of the game due to fraudulent operation of the reset switch. In other words, the state in which the switch is continuously operated after the reset switch is detected to be valid is highly likely to be fraudulent, and the settlement of the game is made impossible, and the switch is continuously operated after the reset switch is detected to be invalid. It is possible to settle the game because the possibility of fraud is low when the game is in a state where it is.

In addition, when the reset switch is in the effective detection state and the MAX bet switch sensor detects the operation of the MAX bet switch during the effective period of the MAX bet switch, a predetermined process based on the MAX bet switch is executed. . By combining such a configuration with the processing 1, 2, or 4 of the other main switches when the reset switch is invalid detection, when the reset switch is invalid detection state, during the effective period of the MAX bet switch When the MAX bet switch sensor detects the operation of the MAX bet switch, the predetermined processing based on the MAX bet switch is not executed, and when the reset switch is in the valid detection state, the MAX bet switch sensor is activated during the valid period of the MAX bet switch When the operation of the MAX bet switch is detected, a predetermined process based on the MAX bet switch is executed.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the dissatisfaction of the player due to the stagnation of the progress of the game, and to make the progress of the game smooth. In other words, the state in which the switch is continuously operated after the reset switch is detected to be valid is likely to be a normal reset switch operation, and the game is allowed to proceed, and the switch is operated after the reset switch is detected to be invalid. If the switch is continuously operated, it is highly possible that the reset switch is operated abnormally (unauthorized), and the progress of the game is disabled. When the progress of the game is enabled, at least the game can be terminated, and control may be executed to prohibit the game from the next game. Since there is no error, it may be possible to proceed with the game until an error occurs (because it is difficult to cancel the error once it occurs).

Further, when the reset switch is in the effective detection state and the start switch sensor detects the operation of the start switch during the valid period of the start switch, a predetermined process based on the start switch is executed. By combining such a configuration with the processing 1 or 2 of the other main switch when the reset switch is invalid detection, when the reset switch is in the invalid detection state, the start switch sensor is detected during the effective period of the start switch. does not execute the prescribed processing based on the start switch when it detects the operation of the start switch, and when the start switch sensor detects the operation of the start switch during the effective period of the start switch while the reset switch is in the valid detection state is configured to execute a predetermined process based on the start switch.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the dissatisfaction of the player due to the stagnation of the progress of the game, and to make the progress of the game smooth. In other words, the state in which the switch is continuously operated after the reset switch is detected to be valid is likely to be a normal reset switch operation, and the game is allowed to proceed, and the switch is operated after the reset switch is detected to be invalid. If the switch is continuously operated, it is highly likely that the reset switch is operated abnormally (unauthorized), and the progress of the game is disabled. When the progress of the game is enabled, at least the game can be terminated, and control may be executed to prohibit the game from the next game. Since there is no error, it may be possible to proceed with the game until an error occurs (because it is difficult to cancel the error once it occurs).

Further, when the reset switch is in the valid detection state and the stop switch sensor detects operation of the stop switch during the valid period of the stop switch, a predetermined process based on the stop switch is executed. By combining such a configuration with the processing 1 or 2 of the other main switch when the reset switch is invalid detection, when the reset switch is in the invalid detection state, the stop switch sensor is detected during the effective period of the stop switch. does not execute the prescribed processing based on the stop switch when it detects the operation of the stop switch, and when the stop switch sensor detects the operation of the stop switch during the effective period of the stop switch when the reset switch is in the effective detection state is configured to execute a predetermined process based on the stop switch.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the dissatisfaction of the player due to the stagnation of the progress of the game, and to make the progress of the game smooth. In other words, the state in which the switch is continuously operated after the reset switch is detected to be valid is likely to be a normal reset switch operation, and the game is allowed to proceed, and the switch is operated after the reset switch is detected to be invalid. If the switch is continuously operated, it is highly possible that the reset switch is operated abnormally (unauthorized), and the progress of the game is disabled. When the progress of the game is enabled, at least the game can be terminated, and control may be executed to prohibit the game from the next game. Since there is no error, it may be possible to proceed with the game until an error occurs (because it is difficult to cancel the error once it occurs).

Further, when the reset switch is in the valid detection state and the settlement switch sensor detects the operation of the settlement switch during the effective period of the settlement switch, a predetermined process based on the settlement switch is executed. By combining such a configuration with the process 1 or 4 of the other main switch when the reset switch is invalid detection, when the reset switch is in the invalid detection state, the adjustment switch sensor is activated during the valid period of the adjustment switch. does not execute the prescribed processing based on the settlement switch when it detects the operation of the settlement switch, and when the settlement switch sensor detects the operation of the settlement switch during the valid period of the settlement switch while the reset switch is in the valid detection state is configured to execute a predetermined process based on the settlement switch.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the dissatisfaction of the player due to the stagnation of the progress of the game, and to make the progress of the game smooth. In other words, if the switch continues to be operated after the reset switch is detected to be valid, it is highly likely that the reset switch is being operated normally. If the reset switch is continuously operated, it is highly possible that the reset switch is operated abnormally (unauthorized), and the settlement of the game is made impossible. It should be noted that, when the settlement of the game is enabled, at least the settlement of the game is executable, and control may be executed to prohibit the game from the game after the settlement, or even if it is a malfunction. Since there is no problem with the game, it may be possible to proceed with the game until an error occurs (because it is difficult to cancel the error once it occurs).

In addition, in the processing of the various main switches described above, all of the configurations of the MAX bet switches can be replaced with 1 bet switches. Furthermore, when the replay symbol combination of the replay winning game is displayed (more specifically, during the period after receiving the third stop until the automatic betting process is executed), if various main switches are detected to be invalid, MAX The automatic betting process is executed even when the predetermined process based on the bet switch is not executed. This is because if the automatic betting process is stopped, the game cannot be completed, and even if the settlement switch is enabled, the settlement switch cannot be activated and the settlement processing cannot be executed. This is to prevent

Also, in the processing of the various main switches described above, both the MAX bet switch and the 1 bet switch may be provided, or only the MAX bet switch may be provided. If only the MAX bet switch is provided, processing related to 1 bet cannot be executed by the main switch, but can be realized by manually inserting one medal.

In addition, in the processing of the various main switches described above, the adjustment switch and the 1-bet switch may also be used as switches. In this case, the function of the 1-bet switch is executed in the case of a single push, and the function of the checkout switch is executed in the case of a long push. A single press means that the settlement/1 bet switch is released (OFF Long press means that even if the input port check performed for each interrupt process exceeds 894ms (equivalent to the settlement/1 bet switch being turned on 400 times in a row in the interrupt process), the settlement/1 The bed switch was operated (continued to be ON).

In addition, in the processing of the various main switches described above, even if the processing based on the operation of the bet switch is invalidated, it may be possible to insert medals for maintenance. With this configuration, the blocker is not operated by the operation of various main switches, so that wear of the blocker motor due to the player's arbitrary triggering of the blocker can be reduced. In addition, even when three cards are inserted (thrown in a specified number) for maintenance, the progress of the game can be stopped by invalidating the operation of the start switch.

Further, in the processing of the various main switches described above, even if the processing based on the operation of the bet switch is disabled, the automatic betting processing may be enabled. By configuring in this way, any of the various main switches can be selected during the period from the reception of the final stop operation at the timing when the replay symbol combination is stopped until the reels are stopped (more specifically, before the winning judgment process). Even if the switch detects invalidity and the predetermined process based on the operation of the bet switch is not executed (disabled), the automatic bet process will be executed. Since there is no need to judge, the program capacity can be reduced. Further, even when the automatic bet processing is performed, the progress of the game can be stopped by invalidating the operation of the start switch. In the case of such a configuration, from the reception of the final stop operation at the timing when the small combination is won and the symbol combination of the small combination stops until the reel stops (more specifically, until the winning judgment process ), if any one of the various main switches is detected to be invalid and a predetermined process based on the operation of the bet switch is not executed (became invalid), the payout process can also be executed. Furthermore, in the case of such a configuration, from the reception of the final stop operation at the timing when the symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined combination at the time of winning (replay, small combination, bonus, etc.) stops until the reel stops (more specifically, Specifically, if any one of the various main switches is invalidated before the winning determination process, the slip control is executed, and then the progress of the game is stopped after the winning determination process.

Further, in the processing of the various main switches described above, when the processing based on the operation of the bet switch is disabled, the automatic betting processing may also be disabled. By configuring in this way, any of the various main switches can be selected during the period from the reception of the final stop operation at the timing when the replay symbol combination is stopped until the reels are stopped (more specifically, before the winning judgment process). switch is detected to be invalid and the predetermined process based on the operation of the bet switch is not executed (became invalid), the automatic bet process is not executed, so the progress of the game can be stopped. As a result, the progress of the game can be stopped when the main switch is illegally operated, and damage to the game hall can be suppressed. In the case of such a configuration, from the reception of the final stop operation at the timing when the small combination is won and the symbol combination of the small combination stops until the reel stops (more specifically, until the winning judgment process ), if any one of the various main switches is detected to be invalid and a predetermined process based on the operation of the bet switch is not executed (became invalid), the payout process is also unexecutable. Furthermore, in the case of such a configuration, from the reception of the final stop operation at the timing when the symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined combination at the time of winning (replay, small combination, bonus, etc.) stops until the reel stops (more specifically, Specifically, if any one of the various main switches is detected to be invalid during the period before the winning determination process, the slip control is executed, and then the progress of the game is stopped before the winning determination process. .

In addition, in the processing of the various main switches described above, when a main switch is detected to be valid and another main switch is operated, it is assumed to be valid only once (predetermined processing based on the other main switch can be executed). good too. For example, when the reset switch is effective detection, when the start switch sensor detects the operation of the start switch during the valid period of the start switch, it is possible to execute a predetermined process based on the start switch, but the operation of the stop switch in the game Predetermined processing based on is made unexecutable. With this configuration, even if the start switch sensor picks up noise and the continuous ON state occurs for a very short period, the next operation is valid only once, so the game can be progressed. If it is noise, the continuous ON state is cancelled, and a predetermined process based on the next operation (stop switch in the above example) can be executed, allowing the game to proceed. If it is not noise, the continuous ON state is maintained and that Predetermined processing based on the next operation (stop switch in the above example) cannot be executed, and the game cannot proceed. As a result, the game can be played smoothly even if noise occurs.

In addition, in the processing of the various main switches described above, the valid period during which the reset switch is valid may be the door open detection state and the error detection state (during error occurrence). In other words, when the reset switch is turned ON in the door open detection state and error detection state, the reset switch is validly detected, and when the reset switch is turned ON in the door closed detection state and error detection state, the reset switch is reset. Invalidity of the switch is detected.

In addition, in the processing of the various main switches described above, even during the effective period of a certain main switch, if the input of a certain main switch and another main switch are detected at the same time, the operation reception of a certain main switch becomes invalid. In this case, the predetermined process may not be executed even within the valid period. For example, when the specified number of bets is placed, the start switch is valid, but when the specified number of bets is placed and the bet switch is detected to be invalid, acceptance of the start switch operation becomes invalid. There are cases (for example, processes 1, 2, and 4 of other main switches when the MAX bet switch is invalid detection). Even in such a case, when the bed switch is no longer detected, the reception of the operation of the start switch becomes effective, so the effective period of the start switch is set. In other words, the "effective period" does not indicate the period during which the operation of the main switch is effective in any state, but is used as the period during which the operation of the main switch alone is effective. In addition, although an example of the effective period of the start switch has been described above, the effective period of the other main switches (MAX bet switch, left stop switch, middle stop switch, right stop switch, settlement switch, reset switch) has the same intention. are using.

<Structure Regarding Passage of Medals Applicable to this Example>
(Medal selector structure)
The structure of the medal selector will be explained. The medal selector is provided for switching between guiding the medals inserted from the medal slot into the game machine (inside the hopper) or out of the game machine (receptacle). The medal selector is provided with a plurality of sensors for detecting medals that have passed through, and medals inserted from the medal slot pass through the path sensor, insertion sensor 1, and insertion sensor 2 in this order from upstream. It is Further, a blocker is provided between the path sensor and the insertion sensor 1. When the blocker is ON, the inserted medals are guided into the game machine, and when the blocker is OFF, the inserted medals are guided out of the game machine. lead. In addition, when the medals are led out of the game machine, when the medals cannot be stored (credit storage upper limit (50) and MAX bet (3)), when non-standard medals are inserted (medal during game play (from reception of the start switch to game end processing after all reels have stopped), during an error, during setting confirmation, or during settlement. etc.

When the path sensor detects medals (turns from OFF to ON), 1 is added to the insertion monitoring counter. Also, the value of the input monitoring counter is cleared (set to 0) when turning the blocker from OFF to ON. Also, the value of the input monitoring counter is decremented by 1 when the input sensor 2 changes from ON to OFF if the passage time and passage order of the input sensor 1 and the input sensor 2 are normal. That is, the value of the insertion monitoring counter when a normal medal is inserted and led into the game machine is 0 because 1 is added when the passage sensor is detected and 1 is subtracted when the insertion sensor 2 is detected. Then, if the value of the insertion monitoring counter is within the range of 0 to 2, it is assumed that the game medals have passed normally, and the processing of lighting the inserted number display LED is executed. However, if the replay is won and the automatic betting process is being executed, the addition process (including the addition display process) to the credit amount display will not be newly executed, without newly executing the process to light up the number of insertion display LED. Run (if you have less than 50 credits). The input monitoring counter is incremented when the blocker is OFF, but is cleared when the blocker is ON.

When the insertion sensor 1 detects medals (changes from OFF to ON), measurement of passing time is started until the insertion sensor 1 stops detecting medals (turns from ON to OFF). If this passage time is within the threshold, it is normal, but if it exceeds the threshold, it is determined that there is a medal retention error, and medal retention error processing is executed. The threshold from when the insertion sensor 1 is turned ON to when the insertion sensor 1 is turned OFF is set to 4 ms or more and 200 ms or less in consideration of the passage speed of medals.

When the insertion sensor 2 detects medals after the insertion sensor 1 detects medals (from OFF to ON to OFF), the insertion sensor 1 detects medals (turns from OFF to ON). Start measuring the passing time until medals are no longer detected (from ON to OFF). If this passing time (the time from when the insertion sensor 2 is turned ON until the insertion sensor 1 is turned OFF) is within the threshold, it is normal. to run. The threshold from when the insertion sensor 2 is turned ON until the insertion sensor 1 is turned OFF is set to 2 ms or more and 120 ms or less in consideration of the passing speed of medals.

When the insertion sensor 2 detects medals after the insertion sensor 1 detects medals (from OFF to ON to OFF), the insertion sensor 2 detects medals (turns from OFF to ON). Start measuring the passing time until medals are no longer detected (from ON to OFF). If this passage time (the time from when the insertion sensor 2 is turned ON until the insertion sensor 2 is turned OFF) is within the threshold, it is normal, but if it exceeds the threshold, it is determined as a medal retention error, and medal retention error processing is performed. to run. The threshold from when the insertion sensor 2 is turned ON to when the insertion sensor 2 is turned OFF is set to 4 ms or more and 200 ms or less in consideration of the passage speed of medals.

When the insertion sensor 2 detects medals (before switching from OFF to ON) before the insertion sensor 1 detects medals (before switching from OFF to ON), it is determined that there is a medal reverse flow error, and medals are detected. Perform backflow error handling.

The throw-in sensor 1 and the throw-in sensor 2 are arranged so that both may be turned ON when one medal passes (the distance between the throw-in sensor 1 and the throw-in sensor 2 is shorter than the diameter of the medal). , error processing can be executed according to the passage time of medals.

When a medal is inserted from the medal slot, it passes through the passage in the selector and is guided to the hopper by free fall. If the time from when the medals are thrown in until they are led to the hopper is too short, the blocker will not be turned on in time and the thrown medals will be led to the return passage. In addition, if the time from when the medals are inserted until they are led to the hopper is too long, the medal insertion time for starting the game will be longer than necessary. must be set to the correct time. There are various possible operations for inserting medals from the medal insertion slot, but as shown in FIG. In the present embodiment, the motion of free-falling medals without applying a high acceleration is described as a general medal-throwing motion. Also, after the medal is free-falling, it may collide with various parts in the selector, but the deceleration due to this collision is included in the term free fall.

One condition for turning the blocker from OFF to ON is after one game is finished. More specifically, after executing the winning process by stopping all the reels and releasing all the stop switches in the previous game, the game start display LED (start lamp), which is the information of the previous game, After initializing the storage area of the RWM relating to the insertion display LED (1-bet lamp, 2-bet lamp, 3-bet lamp) and the replay display LED (replay lamp), the blocker is turned ON.

Here, in the case where the player's goal is to play the game as much as possible within the business hours of the game hall where the game is played, in order to continuously play the game, after the game is over It is conceivable to perform an action for immediately executing the next game. As this operation, if medals are stored in the credit, the bet switch (MAX bet switch) is operated and then the start switch is operated. In this embodiment, the start switch is operated after throwing in three sheets. Since the shorter the time for performing this operation, the more games can be performed, if the inserted medals are not guided to the hopper but are guided to the return path, the time until the next game is executed becomes longer. There is a risk that the game will become uninteresting, for example, the player will feel that the operability is poor.

In order to solve the above-described problem, it is preferable to guide the medals to the hopper as much as possible when the medals are inserted through the medal insertion opening.

Therefore, in the gaming machine according to this example, in a situation where the last reel among a plurality of reels (three reels in this embodiment) is rotating, the stop switch corresponding to the last reel is turned on. When the stop switch is operated under the condition that the operation is effective, the stop switch sensor corresponding to the last reel detects the operation of the stop switch, starts the process of stopping the last reel, and then When the stop switch sensor no longer detects the operation of the stop switch and medals are inserted from the medal insertion slot, the inserted medals are guided to the hopper (processing to turn the blocker from OFF to ON is executed. is configured to allow

As a result, it is possible to insert medals after the game is over, and the timing at which medals can be inserted can be easily understood by the player (the medals can be inserted at the moment the last stop switch is released), so the operation of the game. can be executed quickly.

In order not to make the explanation redundant, "T1" is the time from the moment when the stop switch sensor corresponding to the last stop switch turns OFF until the blocker turns ON. When the medal slot is viewed from the front, the bottom chord of the medal is aligned with the top of the medal slot (right above the medal slot and the entire medal is visible) until it reaches the blocker. The time is described as "T2".

In addition, in the case where a loss (including a dropout of a small winning combination), a 1-card combination, a 10-card combination, a replay, or a bonus can be selected as a result of the internal lottery by the internal lottery means, any of the internal lottery Even if a result is obtained, the medals may be guided to the hopper when the medals are inserted at the moment the last stop switch is released.

In this case, payout processing executed after the last stop switch is released (processing to give medals to the player), automatic betting processing (automatic betting processing when replay symbol combination is displayed), or display freezing processing (bonus T1 including the processing time (freezing processing after displaying the symbol combination) is made shorter than T2 (T1<T2).

By constructing in this manner, the medal insertion timing guided to the hopper becomes the same regardless of the result of the internal lottery, and the game is executed without hindering the tempo of the game of the player. can be done.

It should be noted that, in a game that resulted in an internal lottery with a 10-card hand, if the last stop switch was pressed (accepting the operation) and then continued to be pressed, "pressing the last stop switch → last reel is stopped→10 game medals are paid out”. That is, instead of executing the payout of game medals based on the stopped symbol combination by releasing the stop switch, by pressing the stop switch (accepting the operation), the game medals based on the stopped symbol combination are paid. It may be configured to execute payout, and in such a configuration, the medals are guided to the hopper when the medals are inserted at the moment the stop switch is pressed (operation is accepted). may

Also, as a result of the internal lottery by the internal lottery means, a loss (including a small winning combination), a 1-card combination, a 10-card combination, a replay, or a bonus can be selected. When the one-piece combination is selected, the medals may be guided to the hopper when the medals are inserted at the moment the last stop switch is released.

In this case, the stop switch sensor corresponding to the last stop switch including the processing time of the payout process (the process of giving one medal to the player) executed after the last stop switch is released is turned OFF. T1a, which is the time from the moment until the blocker is turned on, is made shorter than T2 (T1a<T2), and automatic bet processing (automatic bet processing when replay symbol combination is displayed) or display freeze processing (bonus symbol combination is displayed) T1b, which is the time from the moment when the stop switch sensor corresponding to the last stop switch turns OFF until the blocker is turned ON, including the processing time of the freeze processing after freezing, is made longer than T2 (T1b>T2 ).

In all internal lottery results, if medals are inserted at the moment the last stop switch is released, they will be led to the hopper. This is because the time design is the same even if the number of coins to be paid out is the same, and time is lost when the number of payouts is one. Therefore, only when the number of payouts is 1 and the process is short (no payout), time loss can be reduced by setting T1a<T2, and the player's playing time can be shortened. can.

In addition, in the case where the result of the internal lottery by the internal lottery means is a loss (including a small winning combination in the order of pushing), 1-card hand, 10-card hand, replay, or bonus can be selected, the internal lottery by the internal lottery means As a result, the selection probability of losing or one-card hand is designed to be higher than the selection probability of ten-card hand, replay, or bonus. Then, the medals may be guided to the hopper when the medals are inserted at the moment the last stop switch is released only when the win or the one-piece combination is selected.

This is an event that the player has a high probability of encountering during the game (a combination with a high probability of winning). Considering the business hours of the game hall, it is possible to efficiently execute the number of games.

As a specific example of T1 and T2 described above, when a medal (diameter of 25 mm, weight of 5 g) is set to about 0.6 mm/ms when passing through the selector after being inserted from the medal slot, the medal When medals inserted into the slot are guided to the hopper, the distance from the medal slot to reach the blocker is designed to be about 60 mm, and the time from the medal slot to the blocker is designed to be about 90 ms. When designed in this way, it is desirable to design T2 to be 90 ms and T1 to be less than 90 ms. It is conceivable that the design value changes and the design value of T1 is changed accordingly.

In addition, when the start switch sensor detects the operation of the start switch, the operation of the start switch is accepted, and it is lost by the internal lottery (including the spilled eyes of the small hand in the pressing order), 1 hand, 10 hand, replay, or When the bonus is won, as described above, the stop switch sensor corresponding to the final stop operation detects the operation of the stop switch and accepts the stop switch operation. It has been explained that the state of the blocker is ON when the medal is inserted from the medal insertion slot at the timing when the operation of is no longer detected, but the start switch sensor detects the start switch By detecting the operation of , the operation of the start switch is accepted, and the internal lottery loses (including a small combination of pushing order), 1-piece hand, 10-hand hand, replay, or bonus is won, and the reel If a medal is inserted from the medal insertion slot at the timing when the rotation start processing (processing for rotating all reels) is started, the state of the blocker when the medal reaches the blocker is OFF, so at that timing Even if the stop switch is operated earliest after the medals are inserted, the medals reach the blocker before the blocker is turned on, and the medals are guided out of the game machine (receiving tray). .

<Structure related to reel unit applicable to this example>
A reel unit R008 applicable to this example will be described with reference to FIG. The reel unit R008 is mainly composed of a reel frame R001, a left reel R002, a middle reel R003 and a right reel R004. It is fixed via R006. After the reel unit R008 is installed on the reel mounting portion of the housing, the reel unit lower screw R005 and the reel unit upper screw R007 are fixed vertically.

Also, each reel (left reel R002, middle reel R003, right reel R004) may be configured to be fixed vertically to the reel frame R001. Each reel may be configured to be fixed to the reel frame R001.

In addition, when a reel upper screw (not shown) is provided separately from the reel unit upper screw R007 and each reel is fixed to the reel frame R001, it is fixed with a reel lower screw R006 and a reel upper screw (not shown). When fixing the unit R008 to the housing, it may be configured to be fixed by the reel unit lower screw R005 and the reel unit upper screw R007.

The rightmost reel lower screw R006 in the front view is more susceptible to the impact of closing the door than the other reel lower screws R006. With the right reel lower screw R006 fixed to the reel unit R008, the right reel lower screw R006 is arranged directly above the flow path leading from the hopper to the auxiliary tank. That is, if the right reel lower screw R006 comes off for some reason, the right reel lower screw R006 drops from the hopper into the flow path leading to the auxiliary tank.

As a result, it is possible to suppress the failure of the hopper caused by the entry of the right reel lower screw R006 into the hopper. You can reduce the chance of loss.

Also, the rightmost reel unit upper screw R007 in the front view is more likely to fall off because the impact due to the closing of the door is transmitted more easily than the other reel unit upper screws R007. Therefore, the width of the space (corresponding to A in FIG. 52) generated between the upper part of the right reel R004 and the lower part of the reel frame R001 to prevent the right reel unit upper screw R007 from entering the inside of the reel unit R008 when it falls off. is shorter than the longitudinal length of the reel unit upper screw R007 (corresponding to B in FIG. 52) (relationship between A and B in FIG. 52 is A<B). With this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the right reel unit upper screw R007 to enter the inside of the reel unit R008 when it falls off.

The relationship described above is not limited to the right reel, and is common to the middle reel and the left reel. After falling off, any reel and reel unit upper screw will have a common configuration and effect.

This can prevent the right reel unit upper screw R007 from entering the inside of the reel unit R008 when it falls off. If the right reel unit upper screw R007 gets inside the reel unit R008, it will affect the rotation of the reel (the reel may be damaged by the right reel unit upper screw R007, or the rotation of the reel may be hindered). etc.), it is necessary to immediately remove the reel unit upper screw R007 from the inside of the reel unit R008. I can't live without it. Thus, if the right reel unit upper screw R007 enters the inside of the reel unit R008, it takes a long time to restart the game. It is configured so that it is difficult to enter the inside of R008.

Also, the length of the reel unit upper screw R007 in the lateral direction (corresponding to C in FIG. 52) may be longer than the width A of the space generated between the upper part of the right reel R004 and the lower part of the reel frame R001. Such a configuration makes it more difficult for the reel unit upper screw R007 to enter the inside of the reel unit R008.

In the state where each reel is installed in the reel unit R008, the front part of each reel (the part closest to the player) is closer to the front side than the front part (the part closest to the player) of the reel frame R001. Therefore, when the reel unit upper screw R007 comes off, the reel unit upper screw R007 comes into contact with the upper surface of the reel. If the reel unit upper screw R007 contacts the upper surface of the reel, the reel unit upper screw R007 may rebound and enter the reel unit R008 and go behind the reel unit R008. In particular, when the reel unit upper screw R007 contacts the upper surface of the reel during reverse rotation (reel rotates from the bottom to the top), the possibility of the reel unit R008 jumping to the rear increases. In order to prevent such a situation, the configuration described above makes it difficult for the reel unit upper screw R007 to enter the inside of the reel unit R008.

The width of the space generated between the upper part of the right reel R004 and the lower part of the reel frame R001 (corresponding to A in FIG. 52) is set so that the right reel unit upper screw R007 does not enter the inside of the reel unit R008 when it falls off. Even when the length of the upper screw R007 in the longitudinal direction (corresponding to B in FIG. 52) is shorter than the length (relationship between A and B in FIG. 52 where A<B), the reel unit upper screw R007 There is a possibility of getting into the inside of R008. Even in this case, the reel R002 is configured so as not to be damaged by rotating the reel R002 while the reel unit upper screw R007 remains inside the reel unit R008.

FIG. 53 is a view of the reel unit R008 as viewed from the right side. The reel R002 is attached to the reel unit R008, the reel unit R008 is fixed to the housing, and the front panel R013 is closed.

In this state, if the reel unit upper screw R007 drops and enters the reel unit R008, the dropped reel unit upper screw R007 rolls on the reel R002. The reel unit rear upper opening R009 and the reel unit rear lower opening R010 are provided below the highest peak of the reel R002, and the length in the vertical direction of the openings of the reel unit rear upper opening R009 and the reel unit rear lower opening R010 (corresponding to E and F in FIG. 53) is longer than the length of the reel unit upper screw R007 in the longitudinal direction (corresponding to B in FIG. 53), the reel unit upper part rolling on the reel R002 The screw R007 is ejected to the outside of the reel unit R008 from the reel unit rear upper opening R009 or the reel unit rear lower opening R010 (it is configured to be easily ejected). As a result, the reel unit upper screw R007 does not remain inside the reel unit R008, thereby preventing damage to the reel R002.

Regarding the length of the reel unit rear upper opening R009 and the reel unit rear lower opening R010, the length in the horizontal direction is longer than the length in the longitudinal direction of the reel unit upper screw R007 (corresponding to B in FIG. 53). Therefore, the reel unit upper screw R007 is easily ejected from the reel unit rear upper opening R009 and the reel unit rear lower opening R010.

Also, the size of the opening of the reel unit rear upper opening R009 and the reel unit rear lower opening R010 may be larger, and if B<E and B<F are established, then B<E<F, B< Either F<E or B<E=F is acceptable. The B and F may be the length in the vertical direction, the length in the horizontal direction, or the area of the openings of the reel unit rear upper opening R009 and the reel unit rear lower opening R010.

The shortest distance (corresponding to D in FIG. 53) between the foremost part of the reel R002 and the front panel R013 is longer than the length B of the reel unit upper screw R007 in the longitudinal direction. As a result, when the reel unit upper screw R007 drops forward of the reel, it falls downward without being caught between the reel R002 and the front panel R013. Become. Especially when the reel R002 is rotating, a strong force is applied. Therefore, even if the reel unit upper screw R007 falls off in such a case, the reel unit upper screw hardly damages the reel R002, and the rotation of the reel R002 is prevented. It can be configured not to interfere.

Also, the relationship between the frontmost part of each reel and the frontmost part of the hopper installed at the bottom of the housing is because the frontmost part of each reel protrudes forward from the frontmost part of the hopper. Even if the reel unit upper screw R007 falls off and rolls in front of the reel unit R008 and is guided toward the lower part of the housing, it is difficult to enter the hopper. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the hopper from malfunctioning due to the reel unit upper screw R007 entering the hopper.

A central display substrate R011 is attached behind the front panel R013. The central display board R011 is controlled by the main control board, and various front side main control devices (1 bed lamp, 2 bed lamp, 3 bed lamp, replay lamp, start lamp, It controls the display of the medal insertable lamp, credit number display, payout number display) and the rear side main control device (set value display) attached to the rear surface of the front panel R013.

A central display substrate protective cover R012 for protecting the central display substrate R011 is attached to the central display substrate R011. The central display substrate protection cover R012 is made of a transparent resin to ensure the visibility of the central display substrate R011.

The upper portion of the central display board protective cover R012 slopes downward toward the rear. When the front panel R013 is closed, the shortest distance between the reel R002 and the upper part of the central display board protective cover R012 (corresponding to G in FIG. 54) is longer than the length B in the longitudinal direction of the reel unit upper screw R007. is also longer (relationship B<G).

With these configurations, when the reel unit upper screw R007 falls off and rolls forward, the central display board R011 is protected by the central display board protection cover R012, so that the reel unit upper screw R007 does not move from the central display board R011. In addition, since the upper part of the central display board protection cover R012 is inclined, it is possible to guide the reel unit upper screw R007 downward, so that the reel R002 and the central display Since the shortest distance G to the upper part of the board protection cover R012 is longer than the longitudinal length B of the reel unit upper screw R007, the reel unit upper screw R007 guides the reel R002 downward without damaging it. becomes possible.

Also, the shortest distance G between the reel R002 and the upper part of the central display board protection cover R012 is shorter than the length B of the reel unit upper screw R007 in the longitudinal direction (relationship B>G), but the reel R002 and the central display board The shortest distance G to the top of the protective cover R012 may be longer than the length C of the reel unit top screw R007 in the lateral direction (relationship C<G). In this case, since the shortest distance G between the reel R002 and the upper part of the central display board protection cover R012 is shorter than the length B in the longitudinal direction of the reel unit upper screw R007, there is a possibility that the reel unit upper screw R007 may be caught. Since it is longer than the length C in the lateral direction, it is possible to suppress the possibility of getting caught. Therefore, even when the reel unit upper screw R007 falls off, the reel unit upper screw R007 is less likely to damage the reel R002, and it is possible to guide the reel unit upper screw R007 to the lower part of the housing while preventing damage.

Also, the shortest distance G between the reel R002 and the top of the central display board protection cover R012 is shorter than the length B of the reel unit upper screw R007 in the longitudinal direction (relationship B>G), and the reel R002 and the central display board protection The shortest distance G to the top of the cover R012 may be shorter than the length C of the reel unit top screw R007 in the lateral direction (relationship C>G). In this case, when the reel unit upper screw R007 comes off, the reel unit upper screw R007 is sandwiched between the reel R002 and the central display board protective cover R012 and stops, so that the reel unit upper screw R007 can be seen from the door closed state, and the reel unit It becomes easy to see that the upper screw R007 has fallen off, and the whereabouts of the reel unit upper screw R007 can be visually recognized, so that the reel unit upper screw R007 can be easily recovered.

Further, a plurality of reel unit rear upper openings R009 and reel unit rear lower openings R010 may be provided corresponding to each reel. In other words, the left reel has a left reel unit rear upper opening and a left reel unit rear lower opening, and the middle reel has a middle rear upper opening and a middle rear lower opening reel unit. A right reel unit rear upper opening and a reel unit rear lower opening right are provided behind the right reel. By adopting such a configuration, a reel unit rear upper opening R009 and a reel unit rear lower opening R010 corresponding to dropout of the reel unit upper screw R007 corresponding to each reel are provided. Even if it falls off and enters the inside rear of the reel unit R008, it can be discharged to the outside of the reel unit R008 from the reel unit rear upper opening R009 or the reel unit rear lower opening R010.

Also, the rear side of the reel unit R008 may be fully open. With such a configuration, even if the reel unit upper screw R007 rolls to the rear inside the reel unit R008, the rear of the reel unit R008 is not closed, so the reel unit upper screw R007 does not move inside the reel unit R008. It is discharged outside the reel unit R008 without being caught.

<Configuration for display of instruction information applicable to this example>
In the advantageous section, an AT lottery is executed as a process related to the instruction function, and when the AT lottery is won and the AT becomes executable, the result of the internal lottery is the correct answer for the first stop left reel and the second stop. When the middle reel correct pushing order combination (hereinafter referred to as left-middle-right pushing order combination) is won, a process for notifying the player of the pushing order corresponding to the left-center-right pushing order combination is executed. In addition, when the left, middle, and right push orders are operated in the correct order, the correct symbol combination (which may be composed of a plurality of symbol combinations) is always displayed, and an advantageous payout (for example, 10 coins) is given to the player. If the operation is performed in the incorrect answer pressing order, the correct symbol combination (which may be composed of a plurality of symbol combinations) is not displayed, and the player cannot be given an advantageous payout (in other words, the incorrect answer symbol combination cannot be displayed). A combination is displayed and an unfavorable payout (for example, 1) is given to the player, or a losing symbol combination is displayed and no payout is given to the player).

The notification processing when the left, middle, right push order is won is roughly divided into four notification means, and the notification is executed. The first is an instruction monitor (the winning number display 27 shown in FIG. 21 displays the pressing order), the second is a liquid crystal (display device 32 shown in FIG. 21), and there are three The eyes are lamps (left operation instruction lamp 24a, middle operation instruction lamp 24b, and right operation instruction lamp 24c shown in FIG. 21), and the fourth is a speaker (speaker S shown in FIG. 21).

The instruction monitor has the contents described above, and the main control means uses the 7-segment display to notify the pressing order. The instruction monitor executes dynamic lighting control, digit 1 is the stored number display LED (upper digit) and ratio display LED (1000th digit), digit 2 is the stored number display LED (lower digit) and the ratio Display LED (100th digit), Digit 3 is obtained number display LED (upper digit) and ratio display LED (10th digit), Digit 4 is obtained number display LED (lower digit), ratio display LED (first place digit) and an advantageous interval display LED, and the digit 5 is an input number display LED, a game start display LED, an input display LED, a replay display LED, and a setting display LED. Since the instruction monitor in this embodiment is also used as a display for the number of winnings, it is displayed when the digit is 4 (when displaying "=", it is displayed when the digit is 3).

Lighting of each digit is switched for each interrupt process, and when digit 4 is lighted after digit 4 is lighted, it is after 5 interrupts (11.175 ms later). In other words, a different location is lit for each interrupt. Since the lights are blinking at a high speed, the afterimages can make it appear to the player that the lights are always on.

In the case of notifying the pushing order on the liquid crystal, under the situation where all the reels are rotating when the left, middle, right pushing order is won in the advantageous section, the image is displayed as "123", and then the left stop switch is turned off. After being operated, an image display of "_23" (_ is blank) is performed, and after that, an image display of "_3" (_ is blank) is performed after the middle stop switch is operated. Also, when "123" is displayed in order to emphasize the information corresponding to the stop switch to be operated now, the display of "1" is displayed larger than "2" and "3" so that the player can understand. Easily informed. Similarly, for "__23" and "__3", the image display corresponding to the stop button to be operated at present is displayed in a large size. In addition, when the left stop switch is operated while the image is displayed as "123", and the image is displayed as "_23" (_ is blank), the image display corresponding to the left stop button is It will change from "1" to blank. In this case, it may be configured so that an effect (for example, an effect of bursting) is accompanied when the image of "1" is erased.

In addition, the liquid crystal is controlled by the sub-control board, and when the sub-control board receives a push order information command related to the left, middle, right push sequence transmitted from the main control board, the command is acquired by reception interrupt processing, Analyze the command acquired by the command analysis processing of the main loop processing of the sub control board, and if it is determined as a push order command as a result of command analysis, acquire the image data related to the corresponding push order from the image table and control the liquid crystal The image control board executes drawing processing by transmitting the acquired image data command to the image control board. The sub-control board and the image control board may be composed of one board, but even in this case, the control section corresponding to the sub-control board and the control section corresponding to the image control board information is communicated through

As for the lamps, the middle panel lamp covering the front of the reel and the frame lamp on the upper part of the front panel correspond. Regarding the middle panel lamp, it is provided on the top, bottom, or both top and bottom of each reel, and it corresponds to the left reel under the situation where all reels are rotating when the left, middle, right push order is won in the advantageous section After that, after the left stop switch is operated, the middle panel lamp C corresponding to the middle reel is lit, and after that, after the middle stop switch is operated, the middle panel lamp C corresponding to the right reel is lit. Light the panel lamp R. In this way, by notifying the reel to be stopped now, the corresponding stop switch can be stopped. The shape and position of the middle panel lamp can be changed as appropriate, and the lighting mode can also be changed. When the middle panel lamp L lights up, the lamp corresponding to the left reel lights up. It is sufficient if the player can recognize that it is on (the same applies to the middle panel lamp C and the middle panel lamp R).

As for the frame lamps, the frame lamp L on the left side of the housing, the frame lamp C on the upper center of the housing, and the frame lamp R on the right side of the housing correspond to the left stop switch, the middle stop switch, and the right stop switch, respectively. It is possible to notify the pressing order in the same manner as the panel lamp.

In addition, the middle panel lamp and the frame lamp are controlled by the sub-control board, and when the sub-control board receives the push order information command regarding the left, middle, right push order transmitted from the main control board, the reception interrupt process is executed. and analyze the acquired command by the command analysis processing of the main loop processing of the sub control board, and if it is determined as a push order command as a result of the command analysis, the lamp corresponding to the push order from the lamp pattern table lights up. By acquiring the data and transmitting the acquired lamp lighting data command to each lamp substrate, the corresponding lamp substrate executes lighting control according to the lighting data.

As for speakers, an upper speaker L on the upper left side of the housing, an upper speaker R on the upper right side of the housing, and a lower speaker on the lower side of the housing are provided. When the left, middle, right correct answer pressing order is won, a process of outputting a voice "Left" from the upper speakers L and R is performed before the operation of the stop switch becomes effective. Then, after the left stop switch is performed by the player, a process of outputting a voice saying "I'm in the middle" is performed. Then, after the middle stop switch is performed by the player, a process of outputting a voice saying "right" is performed.

In addition, the middle panel lamp and the frame lamp are controlled by the sub-control board, and when the sub-control board receives the push order information command regarding the left, middle, right push order transmitted from the main control board, the reception interrupt process is executed. Acquires the command by, analyzes the command acquired by the command analysis processing of the main loop processing of the sub control board, and if it is determined as a push order command as a result of command analysis, acquires the corresponding voice data from the voice table, Audio is output from the speaker by sending the acquired audio data command to the audio board that controls the speaker.

The interrupt processing executed by the sub control board is executed every 1 ms, and is executed at an interval shorter than the interval 2.235 ms of the interrupt processing of the main control board. Also, when a command is received from the main control board, the command is obtained preferentially by generating a reception interrupt. As a result, it is possible to control the performance without missing commands from the main control board.

(Regarding the processing of various notification means when the push order is incorrect)
Regarding the instruction monitor, under the situation where the left, middle, right push order is won and the push order is displayed on the instruction monitor (for example, "= 1" is displayed on the instruction monitor), the middle stop switch is first operated to stop. If it has happened (if you have stopped the stop switch in a different order than the correct answer), continue to display the instruction monitor, and after the last stop switch is accepted when all reels have stopped , the display is initialized (turned off) when the last stop switch is released. After that, when an incorrect combination of symbols is displayed, "1" is displayed, which means the number of payouts. That is, when the left, middle, right pushing order is won and "=1" is displayed on the instruction monitor, when the left stop switch, which is the correct stop operation for the first stop, is operated to stop, After that, while the display of the instruction monitor maintains "=1", even if the middle stop switch, which is an incorrect stop operation for the first stop, is operated to stop, the display of the instruction monitor thereafter displays "=1". maintain.

Regarding the liquid crystal, if the middle stop switch is stopped first in a situation where the left, middle, right push order is won and the push order is displayed on the liquid crystal (for example, "123" is displayed on the liquid crystal), At that time, control is performed so as not to display the full-press order information on the liquid crystal. That is, in the case where the left, middle, right push order has been won and "123" is displayed on the liquid crystal, if the left stop switch, which is the correct stop operation for the first stop, is operated to stop, then the liquid crystal will display "123". is displayed as "_23", but if the middle stop switch, which is an incorrect stop operation for the first stop, is operated to stop, then the display on the liquid crystal (display regarding the order of pressing) is all erased. becomes.

With respect to the lamp, under the circumstances where the left, middle, right push order is won and the push order is displayed on the lamp (for example, the middle panel lamp L lights up, or the frame lamp L lights up), the middle stop switch is stopped first. If it does, the middle panel lamp L or the frame lamp L should not be turned on at that point. That is, when the left-middle-right push order is won and the middle panel lamp L is lit (or the frame lamp L is lit), the left stop switch, which is the correct stop operation for the first stop, is operated to stop. If the middle panel lamp C is turned on (or the frame lamp C is turned on) after that, while the middle stop switch, which is an incorrect stop operation for the first stop, is operated to stop, then the middle The panel lamp (or frame lamp C) will not be lit.

Regarding the speaker, after the left, middle, right push order is won and the push order is announced by voice, the announcement is not repeated, so even if the middle stop switch is stopped first after that, the voice will be newly played. No output. That is, when the left-middle-right push order has been won, if the left stop switch, which is the correct stop operation for the first stop, is operated to stop, then the speaker outputs a voice saying "I'm in the middle". On the other hand, when the stop operation of the middle stop switch, which is an incorrect stop operation for the first stop, is performed, the audio regarding the pressing order is not output from the speaker after that.

(Press order notification timing based on reception of start switch operation)
As a result of the internal lottery executed based on the reception of the operation of the start switch, the left, middle, right pressing order is won, and the timing for displaying the pressing order information on the instruction monitor after that is the reel rotation start processing (acceleration processing for all reels). It is conceivable to execute the display process immediately before . With such a configuration, the acceleration process is executed as the spinning drum rotation start process, then the constant speed process is executed, and then the operation of the stop switch becomes effective. Order information can be displayed.

Informing the pressing order by means of the liquid crystal, lamp, or speaker cannot be executed unless information is received from the main control board. Therefore, it is necessary to start the execution of the informing process before the process of starting the rotation of the barrel. Specifically, after winning the push order, the main control board executes the push order command set process, then transmits the push order command, and the sub control board receives the push order command. Execute.

In this way, it is better to execute the drum rotation start process as the process of the main control board, which is the starting point of the process related to the pressing order notification, which is the starting point of the notification on the instruction monitor. The processing timing is later than the execution of the push order command set processing as the processing of the main control board, which is the notification start point in . However, since the processing executed by the main control board actually takes less time than the processing executed by the sub control board after sending the push order command to the sub control board, the wait period has elapsed. If the start switch is operated after the start switch is pressed, it is configured so that the instruction monitor can notify the pressing order more quickly than the liquid crystal, the lamp, and the speaker can notify the pressing order. By configuring in this way, it is possible to first report the pushing order information managed by the most reliable main control board, and then to report the pushing order information managed by the sub-control board as supplementary information. , the player can easily recognize the pressing order information managed by the most reliable main control board, and the possibility that the pressing order is incorrect due to the player's operation can be reduced.

(When the start switch is operated after the wait period has passed)
Next, a detailed description will be given of a situation in which the start switch is operated after the wait period has elapsed and the left-middle-right push order win is won.

During the advantageous section, after the wait period measured from the previous game has passed (4.1 seconds have passed), as a result of the internal lottery executed based on the reception of the start switch, the left middle When the right pushing order is won, the command corresponding to the left, middle, right pushing order is stored in the command buffer by the main loop processing of the main control board, and the command buffer is processed by the command transmission processing executed in the interrupt processing of the main control board. Sends the commands stored in the at any time.

In the main loop processing of the main control board, after storing the command corresponding to the left, middle, right push order in the command buffer, it is determined whether or not the wait time has passed (in this situation, the wait time has passed, so After that, when it is determined that the wait period has passed, the instruction number to be displayed on the instruction monitor is stored in the corresponding address of the RWM, and the instruction monitor lighting process executed in the interrupt process of the main control board is performed. acquires the RWM address in which the instruction number is stored, and turns on the instruction monitor. After the instruction number to be displayed on the instruction monitor in the main loop processing of the main control board is stored in the corresponding address of the RWM, the processing for accelerating all the reels is executed.

With such a configuration, even if the lighting control of the instruction monitor is executed after the command corresponding to the left, middle, right push is stored in the command buffer, the wait period has passed (or the remaining wait period has passed). is extremely small), the push order display on the instruction monitor can be notified prior to the push order display on the other sub-control boards.

(When the start switch is operated before the wait period has passed)
Next, a detailed description will be given of a situation in which the start switch is operated before the wait period elapses and the left-middle-right push order win is won.

During the advantageous section, if the internal lottery executed based on the acceptance of the start switch operated before the wait period measured from the previous game has elapsed, the left, middle, right push order is won, By the main loop processing of the main control board, the command corresponding to the left, middle, right push order is stored in the command buffer, and the commands stored in the command buffer are transmitted at any time by the command transmission processing executed by the interrupt processing of the main control board. do.

In the main loop processing of the main control board, after storing the command corresponding to the left, middle, right push order in the command buffer, it is determined whether or not the wait time has passed (in this situation, the wait time has not passed, so After that, the judgment process is repeatedly executed until the wait period has passed. When it is judged that the wait period has passed, the instruction number to be displayed on the instruction monitor is stored in the corresponding address of the RWM. , the instruction monitor lighting process executed in the interrupt process of the main control board acquires the RWM address in which the instruction number is stored, and lights the instruction monitor. After storing the instruction number to be displayed on the instruction monitor in the main loop processing of the main control board in the corresponding address of the RWM, the processing for accelerating all the reels is executed.

With such a configuration, even if the command monitor lighting control is executed after the command corresponding to the left, middle, right pushing order is stored in the command buffer, if the situation is before the wait period elapses, the command monitor will not be displayed. The push order display for the other sub-control board can be notified before the push order display for the sub-control board.

This is because it is better to notify the display of the instruction monitor as early as possible, but if it is too early, the sense of anticipation after the start switch is operated will be lost (players expect to win a lottery related to AT and start lever (Because it is possible to know the winning of the push order small role that is unlikely to be done), it is more interesting to inform after a certain period of time from the operation of the start switch. based on being effective in improving For this reason, the instruction monitor is configured to be displayed in accordance with the spinning drum rotation start process (acceleration process for all reels). Since there is a possibility that the player will operate the buttons, the pressing order notified by the sub-control board is fixed regardless of the waiting period, so that the notification of the pressing order does not become too late when the game starts before the waiting period has elapsed. I will notify you in due time.

As processing in the sub-control board, when a left-center-right push order command is transmitted from the main control board, it is stored in the command reception buffer of the sub-control board. When the left-middle-right push order command is stored in the command reception buffer, reception interrupt processing occurs, the received command is analyzed, and the analyzed command is saved (in this example, the left-middle-right push order command is saved). ). It takes about 16ms from the time the command is received until the command is saved.

When displaying the left, middle, right correct image by the liquid crystal, the left, middle, right press order command (the command can be processed, but in this example, it is sent as it is) is sent to the image control board in the interrupt processing of the sub control board, and the image is controlled. When the board receives the left, middle, right push order command, it selects an image corresponding to the left, middle, right push order command from the image data table stored in the image control board, and starts drawing processing. Since the drawing process in this embodiment is executed at 30 fps, the drawing speed per sheet is about 3.3 ms. Further, the period until the data (left, middle, right pressing order command) stored in the sub control board is transmitted to the image control board is 1 ms.

When the left correct answer is to be notified by the lamp, select the lamp pattern corresponding to the left, middle, right push order command from the lamp data table stored in the sub-control board, and send it to the corresponding lamp board to perform lighting control. Let Alternatively, the left, middle, right pressing order command is transmitted to the lamp board in the interrupt processing in the sub control board, and when the lamp board receives the left, middle, right pressing order command, the left, middle, right pressing order is selected from the lamp data table stored in the lamp board. A lamp pattern corresponding to the command is selected to execute lighting control. It takes about 1 ms to turn on the lamp after the lamp pattern is selected. In addition, the period until the data (lamp pattern or left-center-right pressing order command) stored in the sub-control board is transmitted to the lamp board is 1 ms.

When the left correct answer is to be announced by the speaker, the voice pattern corresponding to the left, middle, right push order command is selected from the voice data table stored in the sub-control board, and is transmitted to the corresponding speaker board to control the voice output. let it run. Alternatively, the left, middle, right press order command is transmitted to the speaker board in the interrupt process of the sub control board, and when the speaker board receives the left, middle, right press order command, the left, middle, right press order is selected from the sound data table stored in the speaker board. A voice pattern corresponding to the command is selected to execute voice output control. It takes about 1 ms after the voice pattern is selected until the voice is output. In addition, the period until the data (audio pattern or left-center-right pressing order command) stored in the sub-control board is transmitted to the speaker control board is 1 ms.

Due to the processing on the sub-control board side described above, the pressing order notification order on the sub-control board side is the order of the lamp, the speaker, and the liquid crystal. The notification processing timings of the lamp and the speaker are substantially the same, but due to the relationship between the speed of light and the speed of sound, it is often the order of the lamp and the speaker that is easily recognized by the player.

With such a configuration, it is possible for the player to easily focus on the game at the start of the game, and the notification by the lamp is performed at the fastest, followed by the speaker and the liquid crystal, so that the player can easily understand the pressing order, and the player's pressing order error can be prevented. can be prevented.

(Press order notification timing based on stop switch operation reception)
As a result of the internal lottery executed after the operation of the start switch is accepted, the left-middle-right order in order is won, and information on the correct operation mode regarding the left-center-right order in order is notified by the instruction monitor, the liquid crystal, the lamp, and the speaker. When the correct first stop operation (in this example, the left stop switch first stop) is accepted under the condition that the operator is in the state where the operator is standing, the display of the instruction monitor does not change, but the mode of notification of the pressing order by the liquid crystal, the lamp, and the speaker changes. do.

As a result of the internal lottery executed after the operation of the start switch is accepted, the left-middle-right order in order is won, and information on the correct operation mode regarding the left-center-right order in order is notified by the instruction monitor, the liquid crystal, the lamp, and the speaker. When the correct first stop operation (left stop switch first stop in this example) is accepted in this situation, the left stop switch acceptance command is stored in the command transmission buffer of the main control board. A left stop switch acceptance command is transmitted to the sub control board in the interrupt processing of the main control board that occurs thereafter. When the sub-control board receives the left stop switch acceptance command, it generates a reception interrupt process, analyzes the received command, and saves the analyzed command (in this example, the left stop switch acceptance command is saved). It takes about 16ms from the time the command is received until the command is saved.

When displaying the middle second stop image (“2” image highlighted by “_23”) on the liquid crystal, the left stop switch reception command (a modified command may be used, but in this example it is unchanged) in the interrupt processing of the sub-control board. ) is sent to the image control board, and when the image control board receives the left stop switch acceptance command, the image corresponding to the left stop switch acceptance command is selected from the image data table stored in the image control board, and drawing processing is performed. to start. Since the drawing process in this embodiment is executed at 30 fps, the drawing speed per sheet is about 3.3 ms. Further, the period until the data (left stop switch reception command) stored in the sub control board is transmitted to the image control board is 1 ms.

When executing the middle second stop notification (turning off the left lamp and turning on the middle lamp) with the lamp, select the lamp pattern corresponding to the left stop switch reception command from the lamp data table stored in the sub-control board. and transmits it to the corresponding lamp substrate to execute lighting control. Alternatively, the left stop switch acceptance command is sent to the lamp board in the interrupt processing in the sub control board, and when the lamp board receives the left stop switch acceptance command, it corresponds to the left stop switch acceptance command from the lamp data table stored in the lamp board. The lamp pattern to be used is selected and the lighting control is executed. It takes approximately 1 ms to turn on the lamp after the lamp pattern is selected. Also, the period until the data (ramp pattern or left stop switch reception command) stored in the sub-control board is transmitted to the lamp board is 1 ms.

In the case of executing the middle second stop notification (outputting the sound of "mid") by the speaker, select the sound pattern corresponding to the left stop switch reception command from the sound data table stored in the sub control board, Send it to the corresponding speaker board to execute the audio output control. Alternatively, the left stop switch acceptance command is sent to the speaker board in the interrupt processing of the sub control board, and when the speaker board receives the left stop switch acceptance command, it corresponds to the left stop switch acceptance command from the sound data table stored in the speaker board. Select the audio pattern to be used and execute the audio output control. It takes about 1 ms after the selection of the voice pattern until the voice is output. Also, the period until the data (audio pattern or left stop switch reception command) stored in the sub-control board is transmitted to the speaker control board is 1 ms.

Due to the processing on the sub-control board side described above, the pressing order notification order on the sub-control board side is the order of the lamp, the speaker, and the liquid crystal. The notification processing timings of the lamps and the speakers are substantially the same. It may be configured to be in the order of the lamps.

With such a configuration, it is possible for the player to easily understand the pressing order by performing the notification by the lamp at the fastest speed so that the player can easily concentrate at the start of the second stop operation, and then by using the speaker and the liquid crystal. You can prevent order mistakes. In this example, the configuration related to the notification by the liquid crystal, the lamp, and the speaker in the first stop operation and the second stop operation is described in detail. There is no problem even if a similar configuration is applied.

<Fifth Embodiment>
In the fifth embodiment, the buttons used for effects such as the effect button P381 and the sub-switch 20 briefly explained in FIG. 1 are collectively referred to as effect input buttons. Description will be made with reference to operation explanatory diagrams.

The basic structure of the effect input button 1000 is roughly divided into three parts, a push-down part 1010, an outer wall part 1020, and an internal structural part 1030. As another structure, the effect input button 1000 is fixed to the game machine P. There are also a fixed part (not shown) for the purpose and a vibration generating part (not shown) for vibrating the entire effect input button, but the explanation in this embodiment is omitted.

The outer wall portion 1020 has, for example, an engine cylinder-like cylindrical structure inside, and the inner diameter portion 2022 has an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter dimension of the push-down portion 1010 so that the piston can move smoothly after the push-down portion 1010 is mounted. made up of dimensions. In particular, when a vibration generating portion is provided, the clearance between the inner diameter portion 1022 and the push-down portion 1010 is set to be large in order to positively vibrate the push-down portion 1010 .

The push-down portion 1010 is configured in a hollow columnar shape like an engine piston. , a pressing surface 1011 that is pressed down by a player's operation, and an operation detection unit (not shown) that is detected by an operation detection sensor.

The internal structural part 1030 mainly includes a spring member (not shown) that biases and holds the pressing part 1010 at an unoperated position, expands and contracts by the player's pressing operation, and detects the operation by the player's pressing operation. It is composed of an operation detection sensor (not shown) for detecting that the part has moved to a predetermined position, and a light emitting part 1034 having a plurality of light sources k to illuminate the pressing surface 1011 .

Effect input based on the operation explanatory cross-sectional view 1 of the effect input button whose pressing part is flat in FIG. 57 and the operation explanatory cross-sectional view 2 of the effect input button whose pressing surface is curved in FIG. To explain the operation of the button 1000, when the pressing surfaces 1011 and 1061 are pressed down by the operation of the player, the pressing portions 1030 and 1060 are moved along the wall surfaces of the inner diameter portions 1022 and 1072 of the outer wall portions 1020 and 1070. to move. At this time, the distances between the light-emitting portions 1034 and 1084 of the internal structural portions 1030 and 1080 and the back surfaces of the pressing surfaces 1011 and 1061 become closer. Further, when the player stops operating the pressing surfaces 1011 and 1061, the pressing portions 1030 and 1060 are biased and held at the initial positions using the repulsive force of the spring members.

In recent years, the sizes of the effect button P381 and the subswitch 20 have gradually increased, and the effect input button 1000 having large pressing surfaces 1011 and 1061 and a plurality of light sources k has been adopted. However, if the size of the effect input button 1000 is increased, there is a possibility that a problem that does not occur with the normal size effect input button 1000 will occur.

First, the first possible problem will be explained based on the effect input button problem explanatory diagram No. 1 in FIG. 59 . A light emitting part 1034 for illuminating the whole of the pressing part 1010 with the pressing surface 1011 as the center is provided at the bottom of the back surface of the pressing surface 1011 of the normal effect input button 1000 . In addition, when the stroke of the pressing part 1010 is long, it is necessary to sufficiently illuminate the pressing surface with the light of the light emitting part even when the pressing operation is not performed. However, it is necessary to make the distance between the surface 1010 and the light emitting portion 1034 as small as possible. However, as the size of the effect input button 1000 increases, the area of the pressing surface 1011 also increases. There is a possibility that the mounted light source k (for example, LED) may be destroyed by contact.

Next, the second conceivable problem will be explained based on the effect input button problem explanatory diagram No. 2 in FIG. 60 . As a normal operation, the depression part 1060 of the effect input button 1000 performs reciprocating motion by the player's operation. Due to the large clearance between 1072 and the outer diameter portion of the push-down portion 1060, eccentric movement such as shown in FIG. 60 may occur. At this time, the inner diameter portion 1072 of the outer wall portion 1070 may be damaged, and the light source k arranged around the light emitting portion 1084 may collide with the back side of the pressing surface 1061 and be destroyed. The eccentric movement means that normally the player pushes down the center of the push-down surface 1061, but the push-down part 1060 becomes vertical when the player hits repeatedly or the push-down part deviates from the center and pushes down. It refers to moving in a diagonal direction instead of a direction.

In the event that the components of the push-down portion 1060 collide with the light source k due to the eccentric movement described above and break, once damage occurs in the inner diameter portion 1072 of the outer wall portion 1070 due to operational deterioration, the eccentric movement will continue to occur. In addition, there is a possibility that a large number of light sources k in a wide range may be destroyed by contact due to worsening problems in the pressing mechanism.

Therefore, as countermeasures against the operation failure of the effect input button 1000, the first measure is to guard against the event that the component parts come into contact with the light source k, and the second measure is to destroy some of the light sources mounted in a plurality so that the luminous state is reduced. It is conceivable to take a measure to generate an abnormality in and to recognize the malfunction of the effect input button mechanism at an early stage. Although FIG. 60 illustrates the case where the push-down portion 1060 moves to the left side when viewed from the front, it is not limited to this, and the eccentricity in any direction such as the right side, the back side, or the front side. The configuration shown in the figure can also be adopted for movement.

As for the first countermeasure against light source destruction using the countermeasure explanatory diagram No. 1 of FIG. An example of countermeasures against destroying the light source k will be described. This embodiment is just an example, and the shape and arrangement of parts other than the main part can be changed as appropriate.

The effect input button 1000 is composed of an outer wall portion 1020, a depressing portion 1010, and an internal structural portion 1030. A light source portion 1034, which constitutes a part of the internal structural portion 1030, is closest to the back surface of the most depressed surface. A screw n having a screw head height higher than the light source height is adopted in the vicinity of k. By doing so, the pressing surface 1011 deformed into the screw head collides with the deformed pressing surface 1011 without colliding with the light source k. By doing so, it is possible to prevent damage to the light source k while fixing the light emitting section 1034 . In addition, by adopting a silver-colored screw n such as chrome plating for the protective plating of the screw n arranged near the light source k, the screw head diffusely reflects the light emitted from the light source k, and a brighter light emission mode can be expressed.

Next, the light source k mounted on the substrate 1111 of the light emitting units 1100A and 1100B in FIG. 62, and an arrangement example of the positioning and fixing means such as the boss b and the screw n, and the breakage of the light source due to the eccentric movement of the pressing portion 1060 in FIG. Countermeasures to be avoided A countermeasure against light source destruction will be described based on the explanatory diagram No. 2. FIG. This embodiment is just an example, and the shape and arrangement of parts other than the main part can be changed as appropriate. Also, the substrate of the light emitting portion is described using an ultra-thin film type substrate in the examples, and the notation of the thickness direction is omitted in the drawings. Of course, a conventional glass epoxy resin may be used for the substrate of the light emitting section of this embodiment.

The substrates of the light emitting units 1100A and 1100B have the same shape as the pressing surface 1061, and are provided mainly at the central portion and the peripheral portion of the substrate as the arrangement positions of the light sources k. As a method for fixing the light emitting portions 1100A and 1100B, fixing by positioning bosses b and screws n is used. At this time, a screw n and a boss b are provided near the light source k. In particular, in the case of the light source k arranged on the periphery, the positioning fixing means is arranged on the outer peripheral side of the light source k. By doing so, it is possible to avoid breaking the light source k at the constituent parts of the pressing portion 1060 due to the eccentric movement caused by the player pressing the peripheral portion of the pressing surface 1061 .

A modification of the structure of the inner diameter portion of the outer wall portion 1300 shown in FIG. 64 and a modification of the structure of the outer diameter portion of the push-down portion 1200 that contacts the inner diameter portion of the outer wall portion will be described. In this embodiment, a convex rail r having a semicircular cross section provided on the outer diameter portion 1262 of the push-down portion 1200 and a concave rail h having a semicircular cross section provided on the inner diameter portion 1372 of the outer wall portion 1300 are provided. The description will be given with an example where the

As a modified example of the effect input button 1000, semicircular concave rails h are provided in the 0 o'clock, 3 o'clock, 6 o'clock, and 9 o'clock directions of the inner diameter portion 1372 of the outer wall portion 1300 when viewed from above. , the inner diameter portion 1372 is vertically continued to form a half-moon concave shape in cross section. Semicircular convex rails r are provided in the 0 o'clock, 3 o'clock, 6 o'clock and 9 o'clock directions of the outer diameter portion 1262 of the push-down portion 1200 when viewed from the top. A cross section that continues 1262 in the vertical direction forms a half-moon convex rib shape. Since these structures are interlocked with each other, eccentric movement is less likely to occur. Movement occurs more frequently.

With such a configuration, if the bosses b and screws n for fixing the substrate 1111 of the light source k are arranged in the 0 o'clock direction, 3 o'clock direction, 6 o'clock direction, and 9 o'clock direction, the light source k can be moved eccentrically. It becomes possible to efficiently prevent destruction with a small configuration. In this embodiment, an example in which four concave rails h and four convex rails r are employed has been described, but the size and shape of the effect input button 1000 can be appropriately changed. Positioning and fixing means such as a boss b and a screw n for fixing the light-emitting portion are arranged at a position overlapping the location where the concave rail h and the convex rail r are provided, and the vicinity of the boss b and the screw n or the inner peripheral side is arranged. If the light source k is mounted (toward the center of the substrate of the light emitting portion 1100), it is possible to effectively prevent the light source from being destroyed due to the eccentric movement of the pressing portion 1060. FIG. As a result, if the arrangement positions of the concave rail h and the convex rail r, the substrate fixing means of the light emitting unit 1100 and the light source mounting position are linked and set, the production input button 1000 suitable for cost can be provided.

In the description so far, bosses b and screws n were used as substrate positioning and fixing means for the light emitting unit 1100. However, the shape of the substrate 1110 of the light emitting unit 1100, the size of the substrate 1110, the mounting angle of the substrate 1110, and the occurrence of problems. Depending on the frequency, the boss b may be used as a fixing means on the substrate 1110, and a portion for protecting the light source k may be selected for the boss b at the time of design.

In the explanation so far, the method of preventing the destruction of the light source k due to the malfunction of the effect input button 1000 has been explained, but it is also considered that the destruction of the light source k cannot be prevented depending on the unique structure of the effect input button 1000 or the degree of the malfunction. be done. Therefore, an embodiment in which the light irradiation ranges of the adjacent light sources k are overlapped with each other will be described with reference to FIG. 65 for explaining the LED irradiation ranges.

FIG. 65(A) shows areas w1 and w2, which are illuminated by the respective light sources k, with solid lines and alternate long and short dash lines, respectively. As shown in the figure, the light irradiation ranges of two adjacent light sources k partially overlap and irradiate the surface by pushing down the light. For example, even if one light source is destroyed, the other light source k pushes down It is possible to irradiate the surface with light and make the light emission unevenness inconspicuous. FIG. 65B shows areas w3, w4, and w5, which are illuminated by a plurality of continuously arranged light sources k, with solid lines, one-dot chain lines, and two-dot chain lines. By illuminating the regions that illuminate the pressing surface 1011 in this way, it is possible to make the light emission unevenness caused by the breakage of the light source k less conspicuous. FIG. 65(B) illustrates an example in which three light sources k arranged in succession overlap three regions for illuminating the depressed surface 1011. Further, a plurality of light sources k are scattered over a wide area. By doing so, it is also possible to demonstrate further effects by illuminating a wide area with multiple overlaps.

Next, as a second countermeasure for the operation failure of the effect input button 1000, by destroying a part of a plurality of light sources k mounted, an abnormality in the light emission state is generated and the failure of the effect input button mechanism is recognized early. explain. Similar to the effect input button shown in FIG. 58, the effect input button of this embodiment has a combination of an outer wall portion, a depressing portion, and an internal structural portion. However, the mounting position of the fixing means for mounting the substrate of the light-emitting portion of the internal component is different, and the structure is one step lower in the vertical direction, and the substrate has a similar structure. Note that descriptions of the same parts as those in the above-described configuration are omitted.

In general, for convenience of design, general resin is used as the material of the effect input button 1000, and a material suitable for abrasion resistance and slidability such as polyacetal resin is not used. Therefore, if a remarkably large stress or a continuous stress is continuously applied in a pressing direction different from the set operation direction of the pressing portion 1060, a problem occurs in the structure of the effect input button 1000, causing an abnormal movement such as eccentric movement. When the behavior becomes repeated and the problem progresses further, even if the pressing surface 1061 is operated due to the bite of the sliding part of the effect input button 1000, the pressing part 1060 does not move, and the operation detection part may develop into a serious problem such as not correctly passing through the detection part of the operation detection sensor.

Therefore, this embodiment enables early detection of the mechanical malfunction of the effect input button 1000 by destroying the light source k. A game machine P giving an unpleasant impression to a player due to a phenomenon in which light source destruction is repeated in a short period of time or a mechanical failure of the performance input button 1000 can be detected early.

The process of defect detection will be described using the illustration of light source destruction caused by eccentric movement of the effect input button 1000 in FIG. The outer shape of the substrate of the light-emitting portion 1094 has the same shape as the pressing surface, and the light sources are mainly provided at the central portion and the peripheral portion of the substrate as positions for arranging the light sources. As a fixing method of the light emitting part 1094, fixing by a positioning boss b and a screw n is used. By doing so, the light source k is destroyed at the component of the pressing portion 1060 due to the eccentric movement caused by the player pressing the peripheral portion of the pressing surface.

By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to detect a mechanical failure of the effect input button 1000 at an early stage. Further, when one light source k is destroyed, a plurality of surrounding light sources may be configured not to emit light. In addition, by making the light emission pattern and the lighting pattern of the light source k the same, the destruction of the light source k when the light source k that should be lit is not lit, etc., can be easily detected at an early stage. you can go

Furthermore, the appearance frequency/execution frequency of the light emission pattern that makes the lighting pattern the same may be set to be the highest. By doing so, the game parlor manager can quickly discover the mechanical malfunction of the effect input button 1000 without touching the effect input button 1000. - 特許庁Further, if the above-described convex rail r and concave rail h are adopted, the location where damage is expected can be limited, and furthermore, the light source k corresponding to the location where breakage is expected can be replaced by a socket type light source with a relatively low unit price. By combining the possible structure, it is possible not only to discover the malfunction of the effect input button 1000 at an early stage, but also to easily recycle the light emitting part 1094, and to replace the light source k without submitting a change approval report to the local police station. be able to.

(Part 1) A summary of the configuration for solving the above-described problem of the effect input button is as follows.
a pressing surface that can be slidably moved by a player's operation and that can be directly contacted by the player; a pressing portion that has at least an outer diameter portion and a detection target portion;
an outer wall portion having at least an inner diameter portion for enveloping and holding the outer diameter portion of the pressing portion;
a spring member provided inside the outer wall portion for biasing and maintaining the pressing portion at a predetermined position;
a light-emitting portion having a substrate on which a light source for emitting light is mounted inside the pressing portion;
a detection unit that detects the detection target portion;
A button unit comprising at least
The pressing surface and the light emitting unit are configured so that the distance between the pressing surface and the light emitting unit is reduced by the pressing operation,
The substrate is locked by a fixing means,
It is characterized in that the pressing surface and the light source are not in contact with each other when the pressing surface is pressed down and comes into contact with the fixing means.
For more information,
a pressing surface that can be slidably moved by a player's operation and that can be directly contacted by the player; a pressing portion that has at least an outer diameter portion and a detection target portion;
an outer wall portion having at least an inner diameter portion for enveloping and holding the outer diameter portion of the pressing portion;
a spring member provided inside the outer wall portion for biasing and maintaining the pressing portion at a predetermined position;
a light-emitting portion having a substrate on which a light source for emitting light is mounted inside the pressing portion;
a detection unit that detects the detection target portion;
A button unit comprising at least
The pressing surface and the light emitting unit are configured so that the distance between the pressing surface and the light emitting unit is reduced by the pressing operation,
When a large stress acts on the pressing surface operated by the player, and the central portion of the pressing surface is deformed, the pressing surface is the first of the parts constituting the light emitting unit. It is characterized in that the fixing means for the substrate, which is larger in the height direction than the light source, is in contact with the back side.
As an effect, it is possible to prevent breakage of the light source because the pressing surface is deformed and does not come into contact with the light source.

(Part 2) The following is a summary of the configuration for solving the above-described problem of the effect input button.
a pressing surface that can be slidably moved by a player's operation and that can be directly contacted by the player; a pressing portion that has at least an outer diameter portion and a detection target portion;
an outer wall portion having at least an inner diameter portion for enveloping and holding the outer diameter portion of the pressing portion;
a spring member provided inside the outer wall portion for biasing and maintaining the push-down portion at a predetermined position; a light-emitting portion having a substrate on which a light source for irradiating the inside of the push-down portion is mounted; A button unit including at least a detection unit for detecting a target portion,
The pressing surface and the light-emitting part are configured so that the distance between them narrows when the pressing operation is performed,
The substrate has a positioning portion,
When a pressing operation is performed on the pressing surface and the positioning part is contacted, the pressing surface and the light source are configured not to contact each other. a pressing surface that can be slidably moved by a player and can be directly contacted by a player; a pressing portion that has at least an outer diameter portion and a detection target portion;
an outer wall portion having at least an inner diameter portion for enveloping and holding the outer diameter portion of the pressing portion;
a spring member provided inside the outer wall portion for biasing and maintaining the push-down portion at a predetermined position; a light-emitting portion having a substrate on which a light source for irradiating the inside of the push-down portion is mounted; A button unit including at least a detection unit for detecting a target portion,
The pressing surface and the light-emitting part are configured so that the distance between them narrows when the player presses down. When the central portion of the surface is deformed, it is the positioning means for the substrate, which is larger in the height direction than the light source, that first contacts the back side of the surface to be pushed down among the portions constituting the light emitting portion. Characterized by
As an effect, it is possible to prevent breakage of the light source because the pressing surface is deformed and does not come into contact with the light source.

(Part 3) The configuration for solving the problem of the effect input button described above is summarized as follows.
a pressing surface that can be slidably moved by a player's operation and that can be directly contacted by the player; a pressing portion that has at least an outer diameter portion and a detection target portion;
an outer wall portion having at least an inner diameter portion for enveloping and holding the outer diameter portion of the pressing portion;
a spring member provided inside the outer wall portion for biasing and maintaining the push-down portion at a predetermined position; a light-emitting portion having a substrate on which a light source for irradiating the inside of the push-down portion is mounted; A button unit including at least a detection unit for detecting a target portion,
A plurality of light sources are mounted on the peripheral edge of the substrate of the light-emitting portion, and fixing means for the substrate, which is larger than the light sources in the height direction, is provided outside the virtual line connecting the plurality of mounted light sources. ,
The substrate is locked by a fixing means,
The back surface of the pressing surface and the light source are not in contact with each other when the pressing surface is pressed down and comes into contact with the fixing means.
As an effect, in order to prevent contact between the pressing part and the light source of the light emitting part when the pressing part moves eccentrically, the substrate fixing means is placed on the outer peripheral side of the light source. damage can be prevented.

(Part 4) A summary of the configuration for solving the above-described problem of the effect input button is as follows.
a pressing surface that can be slidably moved by a player's operation and that can be directly contacted by the player; a pressing portion that has at least an outer diameter portion and a detection target portion;
an outer wall portion having at least an inner diameter portion for enveloping and holding the outer diameter portion of the pressing portion;
a spring member provided inside the outer wall portion for biasing and maintaining the push-down portion at a predetermined position; a light-emitting portion having a substrate mounted with a light source for irradiating the inside of the push-down portion; A button unit including at least a detection unit for detecting a target portion,
The substrate has a positioning portion,
It is configured such that when the pressing surface is pressed down and comes into contact with the positioning portion, the pressing surface and the light source are not in contact with each other.
For more information,
a pressing surface that can be slidably moved by a player's operation and that can be directly contacted by the player; a pressing portion that has at least an outer diameter portion and a detection target portion;
an outer wall portion having at least an inner diameter portion for enveloping and holding the outer diameter portion of the pressing portion;
a spring member provided inside the outer wall portion for biasing and maintaining the push-down portion at a predetermined position; a light-emitting portion having a substrate mounted with a light source for irradiating the inside of the push-down portion; A button unit including at least a detection unit for detecting a target portion,
The substrate has a positioning portion, and a plurality of light sources are mounted on the peripheral edge portion of the substrate of the light emitting portion, and a portion further outside an imaginary line connecting the plurality of mounted light sources has a height higher than the light sources. It is characterized in that means for locating the substrate with a large direction are provided.
As an effect, in order to prevent contact between the push-down part and the light source of the light-emitting part when the push-down part moves eccentrically, the fixing means is placed on the outer peripheral side of the light source. Damage can be prevented.

(Part 5) Regarding the problem of the effect input button described above, the configuration for solving the problem is as follows.
a pressing surface that can be slidably moved by a player's operation and that can be directly contacted by the player; a pressing portion that has at least an outer diameter portion and a detection target portion;
an outer wall portion having at least an inner diameter portion for enveloping and holding the outer diameter portion of the pressing portion;
a spring member provided inside the outer wall portion for biasing and maintaining the push-down portion at a predetermined position; a light-emitting portion having a substrate on which a light source for irradiating the inside of the push-down portion is mounted; A button unit including at least a detection unit for detecting a target portion,
The substrate is locked by a fixing means,
It is configured such that when the pressing surface is pressed down and comes into contact with the light source, the rear surface of the pressing surface and the fixing means are not in contact with each other.
For more information,
a pressing surface that can be slidably moved by a player's operation and that can be directly contacted by the player; a pressing portion that has at least an outer diameter portion and a detection target portion;
an outer wall portion having at least an inner diameter portion for enveloping and holding the outer diameter portion of the pressing portion;
a spring member provided inside the outer wall portion for biasing and maintaining the push-down portion at a predetermined position; a light-emitting portion having a substrate on which a light source for irradiating the inside of the push-down portion is mounted; A button unit including at least a detection unit for detecting a target portion,
A plurality of light sources are mounted on the substrate of the light emitting section, and the distance between the back surface of the pressing surface and the arrangement position of the fixing means of the substrate is greater than the distance between the arrangement positions of the plurality of light sources and the back surface of the pressing surface. It is characterized by being set in a separated position.
As an effect, if the push-down part causes eccentric movement, the push-down part and the light source of the light emitting part will come into contact, and the light source will not emit light, which will clearly identify the malfunction of the effect input button mechanism. can be

(Part 6) Regarding the problem of the effect input button described above, the configuration to solve is summarized as follows.
a pressing surface that can be slidably moved by a player's operation and that can be directly contacted by the player; a pressing portion that has at least an outer diameter portion and a detection target portion;
an outer wall portion having at least an inner diameter portion for enveloping and holding the outer diameter portion of the pressing portion;
a spring member provided inside the outer wall portion for biasing and maintaining the push-down portion at a predetermined position; a light-emitting portion having a substrate on which a light source for irradiating the inside of the push-down portion is mounted; A button unit including at least a detection unit for detecting a target portion,
A plurality of light sources are mounted on the substrate of the light emitting unit, and a plurality of types of light emission patterns are implemented by the plurality of light sources,
Among the light emission patterns executed during a predetermined game time, the plurality of light sources are characterized by having the highest rate of execution with the same light emission pattern.
As an effect, when a defect occurs due to the destruction of the light source, it can be easily found when the adjacent light source and the light emission pattern are the same. Therefore, if the same light emission pattern as that of the adjacent light source is frequently emitted, the defect of the light source can be found early.

(Part 7) Regarding the problem of the effect input button described above, the configuration for solving the problem is summarized as follows.
a pressing surface that can be slidably moved by a player's operation and that can be directly contacted by the player; a pressing portion that has at least an outer diameter portion and a detection target portion;
an outer wall portion having at least an inner diameter portion for enveloping and holding the outer diameter portion of the pressing portion;
a spring member provided inside the outer wall portion for biasing and maintaining the push-down portion at a predetermined position; a light-emitting portion having a substrate on which a light source for irradiating the inside of the push-down portion is mounted; A button unit including at least a detection unit for detecting a target portion,
A plurality of light sources are mounted on the substrate of the light emitting unit, and the light irradiation ranges of the plurality of light sources are mounted so as to always overlap adjacent light sources.
As an effect, if a problem occurs due to the destruction of a light source, by overlapping the light irradiation range of the light source where the problem occurred and the adjacent light source, when all lights are lit, part of the light irradiation area will be dark. can be reduced.
<Sixth embodiment>

Next, the mechanism for transmitting vibration generated from the vibrating device provided for the effect button in the pachinko game machine will be described.

In the pachinko game machine, a configuration capable of executing button effects will be described in detail below. Here, the button effect in a pachinko game machine means that an operation prompting image is displayed to prompt the player to operate the effect button at a predetermined timing during pattern variation, and the button effective period during which the operation prompting image is being displayed is displayed. Predetermined operation on the production button (single press operation to turn ON → OFF within 0.3 seconds, long press operation to turn ON → OFF for 0.3 seconds or more, multiple ON → OFF within 0.3 seconds By executing a series of repeated hits, etc.), a series of effects that will be executed after the operation (such as the effect that suggests the degree of expectation for a big hit with the content of the character's lines and the color of the characters) will be performed. It is called It should be noted that if the button valid period expires without executing a predetermined operation on the effect button during the button valid period, the post-operation effect may not be executed, or at the end timing of the button valid period may be configured to execute the post-operation production. Further, the button valid period may be set even during the period in which the operation prompting image is not displayed (a button effect in which the operation prompting image is not displayed may be executed).

Here, in the predetermined button effect described in detail in this example, the effect button vibrates while the operation promotion image is being displayed (or during the button valid period), and the operation of the effect button is valid for the player. It is a production mode that notifies that. Incidentally, the predetermined button effect is referred to as effect A in this embodiment.

In this embodiment, even if the operation of the effect button is accepted, the vibration of the effect button continues for a certain period of time. The magnitude of vibration is determined by the magnitude of vibration displacement (displacement width), vibration speed, and acceleration of vibration displacement. We shall only refer to how the magnitude of the displacement of the degree vibration is transmitted. Note that the magnitude of displacement is, for example, the width between the highest position and the lowest position when the presentation A is executed and the presentation button vibrates up and down. Note that the direction of vibration is not limited to the vertical direction, and the maximum width in any linear direction may be taken as the magnitude of displacement.

In this embodiment, the effect button vibrates when the effect A is executed, and the displacement of the vibration of the effect button is 1 cm.

When playing a game on a pachinko machine, the player touches the handle while playing the game. is affected, the game ball is shot with an unintended shooting strength, and there is a possibility of suffering an unexpected loss.

In FIG. 67, the parts that connect the effect buttons and the handle operated by the player are connected by one part (front member).
Furthermore, when viewing the pachinko game machine from the front, in the straight line from the effect button to the handle, there is a substantially right angle and a substantially curved line between the place where the effect button of the front member is connected and the place where the handle is connected. It does not contain any shape and can transmit vibrations in a straight line.

When the effect A is selected and executed, the effect button vibrates first. The displacement of the performance button at this time is 1 cm as described above.
After that, the vibration is transmitted from the production button to the front member, which is a member different from the production button, and the vibration is transmitted between different parts, so the vibration is attenuated, and the displacement of the vibration in the front member is 0.9 cm. Become.
After that, the vibration is transmitted from the front member to the handle, which is a member different from the front member, and the vibration is transmitted between different parts, so that the vibration is attenuated and the displacement of the vibration at the handle becomes 0.8 cm.
In this way, when the vibration of the production button passes through only one part from the production button to the handle, a large vibration is transmitted. Therefore, in this example, the configuration of the gaming machine in which the vibration generated in the effect button is difficult to be transmitted to the handle will be described in detail below.

In FIG. 68, the parts that connect the production buttons and the handle operated by the player are connected by a plurality of parts (upper plate, upper member, lower member), and the upper member and the lower member are connected by screws. .
When the pachinko game machine is viewed from the front, the upper plate, the upper member, and the lower member do not include substantially right-angled or substantially curved shapes in the straight line from the performance button to the handle.

When the production A is selected and executed, the production button vibrates first. At this time, the displacement of the effect button is 1 cm.
After that, the vibration is transmitted from the effect button to the upper plate, which is a member different from the effect button, and the vibration is transmitted between different parts, so the vibration is attenuated and the displacement of the vibration at the upper plate is 0.9 cm. Become.
After that, the vibration is transmitted from the upper plate to the upper member, which is a member different from the upper plate. Since the vibration is transmitted between different parts, the vibration is attenuated, and the displacement of the vibration in the upper member is 0.7 cm. Become.

After that, the vibration is transmitted from the upper member to the lower member, which is different from the upper member, and the vibration is transmitted between different parts. Attenuated, the displacement of the vibration in the lower member is 0.3 cm. Here, when two different members are connected with screws like the upper member and the lower member in the figure, the vibration is also damped by the screws. can also dampen vibrations. It should be noted that, as in the case of the upper plate and the upper member in the same figure, when no reference is made to the method of connecting two different members, it is assumed that they are joined at a linear joining portion.

After that, the vibration is transmitted from the lower member to the handle, which is a member different from the lower member. Since the vibration is transmitted between different parts, the vibration is attenuated and the displacement of the vibration at the handle becomes 0.2 cm.

Thus, in the case where a plurality of parts are interposed between the effect button and the handle, the displacement of the vibration transmitted to the handle can be made smaller than when only one part is interposed between the effect button and the handle. can.
If the vibration transmitted to the handle is small, it is possible to create a game machine that hardly affects the player's shooting operation and that the strength of the handle is hardly changed due to the execution of the button presentation. .

In FIG. 69, the parts that connect the production buttons and the handle operated by the player are connected by a plurality of parts (upper plate, upper member, lower member), and the upper member and the lower member are connected by fitting. there is A snap-in type means that at least a part of the joined member is a snap-in type so that the joining of two different members is not released even if a force is applied in one direction, as described in the dotted circle in the figure. is.
When the pachinko game machine is viewed from the front, the upper plate, the upper member, and the lower member do not include substantially right-angled or substantially curved shapes in the straight line from the performance button to the handle.

When the effect A is selected and executed, the effect button vibrates first. At this time, the displacement of the effect button is 1 cm.
After that, the vibration is transmitted from the effect button to the upper plate, which is a member different from the effect button, and the vibration is transmitted between different parts, so the vibration is attenuated, and the displacement of the vibration at the upper plate is 0.9 cm. Become.
After that, the vibration is transmitted from the upper plate to the upper member, which is a member different from the upper plate. Since the vibration is transmitted between different parts, the vibration is attenuated, and the displacement of the vibration in the upper member is 0.7 cm. Become.

After that, the vibration is transmitted from the upper member to the lower member, which is a member different from the upper member, and the vibration is transmitted between different parts. is attenuated and the vibration displacement in the lower member is 0.2 cm. Here, when two different members are connected by a snap-in type like the upper member and the lower member in FIG. In addition, vibrations are damped, so vibrations can be damped more than when two different members are joined together (where the joint is straight).

After that, the vibration is transmitted from the lower member to the handle, which is a member different from the lower member. Since the vibration is transmitted between different parts, the vibration is attenuated and the displacement of the vibration at the handle becomes 0.1 cm.

Thus, in the case where a plurality of parts are interposed between the effect button and the handle, the displacement of the vibration transmitted to the handle can be made smaller than when only one part is interposed between the effect button and the handle. can.
If the vibration transmitted to the handle is small, it is possible to create a game machine that hardly affects the player's shooting operation and that the strength of the handle is hardly changed due to the execution of the button presentation. .

In FIG. 70, the parts connecting the production buttons and the handle operated by the player are connected by a plurality of parts (upper plate, upper member, lower member), and the upper member and the lower member are connected by screws. .
When viewed from the front of the pachinko game machine, in the straight line from the performance button to the handle, the upper plate and the upper member do not include substantially right-angled or substantially curved shapes, and the lower member includes a substantially right-angled shape. .

When the effect A is selected and executed, the effect button vibrates first. At this time, the displacement of the effect button is 1 cm.
After that, the vibration is transmitted from the effect button to the upper plate, which is a member different from the effect button, and the vibration is transmitted between different parts, so the vibration is attenuated, and the displacement of the vibration at the upper plate is 0.9 cm. Become.
After that, the vibration is transmitted from the upper plate to the upper member, which is a member different from the upper plate. Since the vibration is transmitted between different parts, the vibration is attenuated, and the displacement of the vibration in the upper member is 0.7 cm. Become.

After that, the vibration is transmitted from the upper member to the lower member, which is different from the upper member, and the vibration is transmitted between different parts. Attenuated, the displacement of the vibration in the lower member is 0.3 cm. Here, when two different members are connected with screws like the upper member and the lower member in the figure, the vibration is also damped by the screws. can also dampen vibrations.

After that, the vibration is transmitted from the lower member to the handle, which is a member different from the lower member, and the vibration is transmitted between different parts. , the vibration is more attenuated and the vibration displacement at the handle is 0.15 cm than when it cannot be transmitted in a straight line and can be transmitted in a straight line.

Thus, in the case where a plurality of parts are interposed between the effect button and the handle, the displacement of the vibration transmitted to the handle can be made smaller than when only one part is interposed between the effect button and the handle. can.
If the vibration transmitted to the handle is small, it is possible to create a game machine that hardly affects the player's shooting operation and that the strength of the handle is hardly changed due to the execution of the button presentation. .

In FIG. 71, the parts connecting the performance buttons and the handle operated by the player are connected by a plurality of parts (upper plate, upper member, lower member), and the upper member and the lower member are connected by screws. .
When viewed from the front of the pachinko game machine, in the straight line from the performance button to the handle, the upper plate and upper member do not include substantially right-angled or substantially curved shapes, and the lower member includes a substantially curved shape. .

When the production A is selected and executed, the production button vibrates first. At this time, the displacement of the effect button is 1 cm.
After that, the vibration is transmitted from the effect button to the upper plate, which is a member different from the effect button, and the vibration is transmitted between different parts, so the vibration is attenuated and the displacement of the vibration at the upper plate is 0.9 cm. Become.
After that, the vibration is transmitted from the upper plate to the upper member, which is a member different from the upper plate. Since the vibration is transmitted between different parts, the vibration is attenuated, and the displacement of the vibration in the upper member is 0.7 cm. Become.

After that, the vibration is transmitted from the upper member to the lower member, which is different from the upper member, and the vibration is transmitted between different parts. Attenuated, the displacement of the vibration in the lower member is 0.3 cm. Here, when two different members are connected with screws like the upper member and the lower member in the figure, the vibration is also damped by the screws. can also dampen vibrations.

After that, the vibration is transmitted from the lower member to the handle, which is a member different from the lower member, and the vibration is transmitted between different parts. The vibrations are more damped and the vibration displacement at the handle is 0.12 cm than without the .

In this way, when a plurality of parts are interposed from the effect button to the handle, the displacement of the vibration transmitted to the handle can be made smaller than when only one part is interposed from the effect button to the handle. can.
If the vibration transmitted to the handle is small, it is possible to create a game machine that hardly affects the shooting operation of the player and that the strength of the handle is hardly changed due to the execution of the button presentation. .

It should be noted that another configuration for damping vibration (damping vibration displacement) is not shown, but a component made of different material (metal, etc.) is provided between the production button and the handle operated by the player. If there is, the vibration is further damped. As an example, the production button vibrates and the production button is connected to the handle with plastic, metal, and plastic parts, rather than the production button is connected to the handle with plastic, plastic, and plastic parts. The vibration transmitted to is weak. That is, by forming one or more of the plurality of different parts from different materials such as metal, the vibration transmitted to the handle can be further damped. Furthermore, by making one or a plurality of parts between the performance button and the handle metal, electromagnetic waves can be prevented, and the influence of electromagnetic waves on various substrates can be reduced.

Vibration is transmitted to the handle during the performance of vibrating the performance button, and if the strength of the handle fluctuates, the ball to be hit will be shaken and the player will be disadvantaged.
Although it is possible to attach a vibration absorbing device to a device that vibrates the effect button, the cost is high and the structure may be large.
In the present invention, the structure of the performance button is not enlarged, the vibration is hardly transmitted to the handle, and the maximum performance is achieved without giving disadvantage to the player.

FIG. 72 is a table summarizing values of vibration displacement when one or a plurality of configurations capable of damping transmission of vibration displacement are employed. The value of the vibration displacement is shown in the figure, and the following configurations are conceivable as a method of damping the transmission of the vibration displacement. , may be combined as appropriate.

<Configuration for Damping Vibration Displacement>
(1) The shape of the joint part: Screwing, fitting (2) Increasing the number of parts from the production button to the handle (3) The shape of the member: Partly approximately right angle, partly approximately curved (4) Material such as metal <Seventh Embodiment>

Next, a description will be given of a mechanism for transmitting vibration generated from a vibrating device provided in the performance button of the slot machine.

In the sixth embodiment, the structure of the pachinko game machine capable of executing the effect A involving the vibration of the effect button as the button effect has been described in detail. Here, the button effect in a reel-type gaming machine means displaying an operation prompting image prompting the player to operate the effect button at a predetermined timing during reel rotation or when the reels are stopped, and displaying the operation prompting image. Predetermined operations on the production button during the middle button effective period (single press operation to turn ON→OFF within 0.3 seconds, long press operation to turn ON→OFF for 0.3 seconds or more, within 0.3 seconds By executing a continuous hit operation that turns ON → OFF multiple times, etc.), the effect after the operation (with the content of the character's dialogue and the color of the letters, that the bonus is won, AT is executed, and ART A series of effects in which a production that suggests a degree of expectation such as being executed) is executed is called a button production. In addition, when the button effective period ends without executing a predetermined operation on the effect button during the button effective period (for example, when the stop button operation, the bet button operation, or the start lever operation is accepted) Alternatively, the post-operation effect may be executed at the end timing of the button effective period. Further, the button valid period may be set even during the period in which the operation prompting image is not displayed (a button effect in which the operation prompting image is not displayed may be executed).

Here, in the predetermined button effect described in detail in this example, the effect button vibrates while the operation promotion image is being displayed (or during the button valid period), and the operation of the effect button is valid for the player. It is a production mode that notifies that. Incidentally, the predetermined button effect is referred to as effect A in this embodiment.

In this embodiment, even if the operation of the effect button is accepted, the vibration of the effect button continues for a certain period of time. The magnitude of vibration is determined by the magnitude of vibration displacement (displacement width), vibration speed, and acceleration of vibration displacement. We shall only refer to how the magnitude of the displacement of the degree vibration is transmitted. Note that the magnitude of displacement is, for example, the width between the highest position and the lowest position when the presentation A is executed and the presentation button vibrates up and down. Note that the direction of vibration is not limited to the vertical direction, and the maximum width in any linear direction may be taken as the magnitude of displacement.

In this embodiment, the effect button vibrates when the effect A is executed, and the displacement of the vibration of the effect button is 1 cm.

When playing a game on the reel-type game machine, the player operates a stop button to stop the reels. In addition, since the stop position of the reel may differ depending on the timing at which the operation of the stop button is accepted, if the displacement of the vibration of the effect button is transmitted to the stop button without being damped, the stop operation of the player will be affected. As a result, the operation of the stop button is accepted at an unintended timing, and there is a possibility of suffering an unexpected loss. Note that any stop button may be used as the stop button in the configuration illustrated below, but the configuration of the left stop button will be exemplified as an example.

In FIG. 73, the part that connects the effect button and the stop button operated by the player is connected by one part (front mask).
Furthermore, when the reel-type game machine is viewed from the front, in the straight line from the performance button to the stop button, the location where the performance button of the front mask is connected and the location where the stop button is connected are substantially perpendicular to each other. and substantially curved shapes are not included, and vibrations can be transmitted in a straight line.

When the effect A is selected and executed, the effect button vibrates first. The displacement of the performance button at this time is 1 cm as described above.
After that, the vibration is transmitted from the effect button to the front mask, which is a member different from the effect button, and the vibration is transmitted between different parts, so the vibration is attenuated and the displacement of the vibration at the front mask is 0.9 cm. Become.
After that, the vibration is transmitted from the front mask to the stop button, which is a member different from the front mask. Since the vibration is transmitted between different parts, the vibration is attenuated, and the vibration displacement at the stop button is 0.8 cm. Become.
In this way, when the vibration of the effect button passes through only one component from the effect button to the stop button, a large vibration is transmitted. Therefore, in this example, the configuration of the gaming machine in which the vibration generated in the effect button is difficult to be transmitted to the stop button will be described in detail below.

In FIG. 74, the parts that connect the effect button and the stop button operated by the player are connected by a plurality of parts (control panel, inside the front mask, stop button unit), and the control panel and inside the front mask are connected by screws. It is connected.
When the reel-type game machine is viewed from the front, the control panel, the inside of the front mask, and the stop button unit do not include substantially right-angled or substantially curved shapes in the straight line from the performance button to the stop button.

When the effect A is selected and executed, the effect button vibrates first. At this time, the displacement of the effect button is 1 cm.
After that, the vibration is transmitted from the effect button to the control panel, which is a member different from the effect button, and the vibration is transmitted between different parts, so the vibration is attenuated, and the vibration displacement at the control panel is 0.9 cm. Become.
After that, the vibration is transmitted from the control panel to the inside of the front mask, which is a member different from the control panel, and the vibration is transmitted between different parts. , the vibration is damped and the vibration displacement in the front mask is 0.7 cm. Here, when two different members are connected with screws like the front mask middle and the stop button unit in the same figure, the screws also attenuate the vibration, so the two different members are joined together. Vibration can be damped more than the case. It should be noted that, unless a method of connecting two different members is mentioned, it is assumed that they are joined at a linear joining portion.

After that, the vibration is transmitted from the inside of the front mask to the stop button unit, which is a member different from the inside of the front mask. 0.6 cm.

After that, the vibration is transmitted from the stop button unit to the stop button, which is a member different from the stop button unit. Since the vibration is transmitted between different parts, the vibration is attenuated and the displacement of the vibration at the stop button is 0. 5 cm.

In this way, when a plurality of parts are interposed from the effect button to the stop button, the displacement of the vibration transmitted to the stop button is smaller than when only one part is interposed from the effect button to the stop button. can do.
If the vibration transmitted to the stop button is small, the player's stop operation is less likely to be affected, and the timing of receiving the stop button stop operation is less likely to be shifted due to the execution of the button performance. can be created.

In FIG. 75, the parts that connect the effect button and the stop button operated by the player are connected by a plurality of parts (control panel, front mask middle, stop button unit), and the control panel and front mask middle are fitted together. connected. A snap-in type means that at least a part of the joined member is a snap-in type so that the joining of two different members is not released even if a force is applied in one direction, as described in the dotted circle in the figure. is.
When the reel-type game machine is viewed from the front, the control panel, the inside of the front mask, and the stop button unit do not include substantially right-angled or substantially curved shapes in the straight line from the performance button to the stop button.

When the effect A is selected and executed, the effect button vibrates first. At this time, the displacement of the effect button is 1 cm.
After that, the vibration is transmitted from the effect button to the control panel, which is a member different from the effect button, and the vibration is transmitted between different parts, so the vibration is attenuated, and the vibration displacement at the control panel is 0.9 cm. Become.
After that, the vibration is transmitted from the control panel to the inside of the front mask, which is a member different from the control panel, and the vibration is transmitted between different parts. , the vibration is damped and the vibration displacement in the front mask is 0.65 cm. Here, when two different parts are connected by a telescoping type, as in the control panel and the front mask in the same figure, the vibrations are further damped by the telescoping joint compared to the straight joint. Therefore, vibration can be damped more than when two different members are joined together (where the joint is straight).

After that, the vibration is transmitted from the inside of the front mask to the stop button unit, which is a member different from the inside of the front mask. 0.55 cm.

After that, the vibration is transmitted from the stop button unit to the stop button, which is a member different from the stop button unit. Since the vibration is transmitted between different parts, the vibration is attenuated and the displacement of the vibration at the stop button is 0. 45 cm.

In this way, when a plurality of parts are interposed from the effect button to the stop button, the displacement of the vibration transmitted to the stop button is smaller than when only one part is interposed from the effect button to the stop button. can do.
If the vibration transmitted to the stop button is small, the player's stop operation is less likely to be affected, and the timing of receiving the stop button stop operation is less likely to be shifted due to the execution of the button performance. can be created.

In FIG. 76, the parts that connect the effect button and the stop button operated by the player are connected by a plurality of parts (control panel, front mask middle, stop button unit), and the control panel and front mask middle are connected by screws. It is connected.
When the reel-type game machine is viewed from the front, the linear shape from the effect button to the stop button does not include any substantially right angle or substantially curved shape in the control panel and the front mask,
The stop button unit includes a generally right-angled shape.

When the effect A is selected and executed, the effect button vibrates first. At this time, the displacement of the effect button is 1 cm.
After that, the vibration is transmitted from the effect button to the control panel, which is a member different from the effect button, and the vibration is transmitted between different parts, so the vibration is attenuated, and the vibration displacement at the control panel is 0.9 cm. Become.
After that, the vibration is transmitted from the control panel to the inside of the front mask, which is a member different from the control panel, and the vibration is transmitted between different parts. , the vibration is damped and the vibration displacement in the front mask is 0.7 cm. Here, when two different members are connected with screws like the front mask middle and the stop button unit in the same figure, the screws also attenuate the vibration, so the two different members are joined together. Vibration can be damped more than the case. It should be noted that, unless a method of connecting two different members is mentioned, it is assumed that they are joined at a linear joining portion.

After that, the vibration is transmitted from the inside of the front mask to the stop button unit, which is a member different from the inside of the front mask, and the vibration is transmitted between different parts. , when vibration is transmitted through the front mask, it cannot be transmitted in a straight line, and the vibration is damped more than when it can be transmitted in a straight line, and the displacement of the vibration in the stop button unit becomes 0.5 cm.

After that, the vibration is transmitted from the stop button unit to the stop button, which is a member different from the stop button unit. Since the vibration is transmitted between different parts, the vibration is attenuated and the displacement of the vibration at the stop button is 0. 4 cm.

In this way, when a plurality of parts are interposed from the effect button to the stop button, the displacement of the vibration transmitted to the stop button is smaller than when only one part is interposed from the effect button to the stop button. can do.
If the vibration transmitted to the stop button is small, the player's stop operation is less likely to be affected, and the timing of receiving the stop button stop operation is less likely to be shifted due to the execution of the button performance. can be created.

In FIG. 77, the parts that connect the effect button and the stop button operated by the player are connected by a plurality of parts (control panel, inside the front mask, stop button unit), and the control panel and inside the front mask are connected by screws. It is connected.
When the reel-type game machine is viewed from the front, the linear shape from the effect button to the stop button does not include any substantially right angle or substantially curved shape in the control panel and the front mask,
The stop button unit includes a generally curved shape.

When the effect A is selected and executed, the effect button vibrates first. At this time, the displacement of the effect button is 1 cm.
After that, the vibration is transmitted from the effect button to the control panel, which is a member different from the effect button, and the vibration is transmitted between different parts, so the vibration is attenuated, and the vibration displacement at the control panel is 0.9 cm. Become.
After that, the vibration is transmitted from the control panel to the inside of the front mask, which is a member different from the control panel, and the vibration is transmitted between different parts. , the vibration is damped and the vibration displacement in the front mask is 0.7 cm. Here, when two different members are connected with screws like the front mask middle and the stop button unit in the same figure, the screws also attenuate the vibration, so the two different members are joined together. Vibration can be damped more than the case. It should be noted that, unless a method of connecting two different members is mentioned, it is assumed that they are joined at a linear joining portion.

After that, the vibration is transmitted from the inside of the front mask to the stop button unit, which is a member different from the inside of the front mask, and the vibration is transmitted between different parts. , the vibration is damped more than if it could be transmitted in a straight line, and the displacement of the vibration at the stop button unit is 0.48 cm.

After that, the vibration is transmitted from the stop button unit to the stop button, which is a member different from the stop button unit. Since the vibration is transmitted between different parts, the vibration is attenuated and the displacement of the vibration at the stop button is 0. 38 cm.

In this way, when a plurality of parts are interposed from the effect button to the stop button, the displacement of the vibration transmitted to the stop button is smaller than when only one part is interposed from the effect button to the stop button. can do.
If the vibration transmitted to the stop button is small, the player's stop operation is less likely to be affected, and the timing of receiving the stop button stop operation is less likely to be shifted due to the execution of the button performance. can be created.

In addition, although not shown, other components for damping vibration (damping vibration displacement) include parts made of different materials (such as metal) between the production button and the stop button operated by the player. , the vibration is further damped. As an example, it is better to connect the production button to the stop button with plastic, metal, and plastic parts than to vibrate the production button and connect the production button to the stop button with plastic, plastic, and plastic parts. , the vibration transmitted to the stop button is weak. That is, by forming one or more of the plurality of different parts from different materials such as metal, the vibration transmitted to the handle can be further damped. Furthermore, by making one or a plurality of parts between the performance button and the handle metal, electromagnetic waves can be prevented, and the influence of electromagnetic waves on various substrates can be reduced.

Vibration is transmitted to the stop button during the performance of vibrating the performance button by the performance, and if the timing of pressing the stop button is deviated, the stop position of the spinning drum will be displaced, giving a disadvantage to the player. put away.
Although it is possible to attach a vibration absorbing device to a device that vibrates the effect button, the cost is high and the structure may be large.
In the present application, the structure of the performance button is not enlarged, the vibration is hardly transmitted to the stop button, and the maximum performance is achieved without giving disadvantage to the player.

FIG. 78 is a table summarizing values of vibration displacement when one or a plurality of configurations capable of damping transmission of vibration displacement described above are employed. The value of the vibration displacement is shown in the figure, and the following configurations are conceivable as a method of damping the transmission of the vibration displacement. , may be combined as appropriate.

<Configuration for Damping Vibration Displacement>
(1) The shape of the joint part: Screwing, fitting (2) Increasing the number of parts from the production button to the stop button (3) The shape of the member: Partially approximately right angle, partially approximately curved (4) Metal, etc. Use material parts

<Additional remarks in the sixth and seventh embodiments>
There is a technique for suppressing transmitted vibration by using a cushioning material such as a rubber washer in order to absorb vibration when assembling each member (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-29853). The more cushioning material is provided, the less the impact on the durability of each member. However, by providing new members that are not originally required for the game machine, the development cost of the game machine tends to increase.

INDUSTRIAL APPLICABILITY The present invention can reduce the development cost of a game machine by suppressing the transmission of vibration based on the members constituting the game machine without providing a new member such as a cushioning material, thereby efficiently transmitting the vibration. can be suppressed.

<Eighth Embodiment>
Next, regarding the fact that the low active determination is used to determine the logic level when an input device used in a gaming machine that affects the outcome of a game is operated, the start switch of a slot machine is taken as an example of the input device below. explain.

A representative function executed by operating a start switch in a slot machine will be described. First, a winning combination is determined (an internal lottery is conducted). The type of symbol combination that can be displayed is determined according to the combination, and the start switch affects the result of the game, such as the right to acquire game medals, replays, and bonus games. Secondly, it is possible to fix the set value by operating the start switch while the setting change device is in operation (during the setting change mode). More specifically, in the setting change mode, the setting switch is operated to select a setting value candidate, and the start switch is operated to confirm the selected setting value. Note that the set value is designed such that the player plays the game a plurality of times, and the medal acquisition expected value of the payout number of game medals is generally determined from the number of game medals inserted in the game. For example, a gaming machine is generally designed to have a negative expected medal acquisition value (that is, decrease) at the setting value 1, and is designed to have a positive (that is, increase) value at the setting value 6.

As described above, the start switch is an input device that affects the outcome of the game, and is an input device of high importance to the gaming machine.

Here, the high-active determination, low-active determination, and chattering described in this embodiment will be described.

High active determination is also referred to as positive logic, and a high voltage level corresponds to 1, and a low voltage level corresponds to 0. Low active determination is also referred to as negative logic, and a low voltage level corresponds to 1. , refers to a method in which a high voltage level is associated with 0. It is intuitively easier to understand using the high active determination.

Chattering, which is also called noise, is a phenomenon in which contact and non-contact are repeatedly turned on and off at high speed in a short time at the moment when separated contacts are brought into contact when a mechanical switch is operated. In this embodiment, by operating the mechanical switch in the mechanism of the start switch, when the detection piece inside the mechanism passes the sensor light, it is generated by repeating contact and non-contact momentarily at high speed. I can.

Here, the mechanism for detecting whether or not the start switch has been turned on will be briefly described. When the start switch is operated and a hand is determined, a change in the light receiving or blocking state of the sensor occurs (FIGS. 79(a) and (b)), and the state change of the sensor occurs constantly. In order to determine that the start switch is operated, the voltage level crosses over the determination threshold value (in this embodiment, exceeding 60 for high active determination and less than 40 for low active determination), and Data indicating that the start switch has been operated is stored in a specific area of the RAM (FIG. 79(c)). In a general sensor detection structure, the detection piece detects that the start switch is turned on by shielding the sensor light from the sensor light receiving portion.

Here, chattering may occur when the detection piece starts to change the light receiving state of the sensor light receiving portion. A possible problem when chattering occurs is that there is a possibility that a uniform lottery result cannot be obtained when a winning combination is determined by operating the start switch. When selling a game machine, it is a rule that a mechanism that causes a bias in the appearance of the winning combination cannot be sold, and the player cannot play the game with peace of mind. In addition, there is a risk that the appearance frequency of the role may become unstable due to the occurrence of chattering.

In this example, in order to reduce the frequency of erroneous detection due to chattering, low active determination is adopted as the logic level determination used for detecting the start switch.

FIG. 80 and FIG. 81 are comparison diagrams of the case of adopting the high-active determination and the case of adopting the low-active determination.

When the high-active determination shown in FIG. 80 is adopted, the voltage level is increased by the light-shielding state of the sensor light-receiving section. It is determined that the start switch has been input when the voltage level exceeds 60, which is set as a threshold value, when the sensor light-receiving portion is in a light-shielded state. Here, although the threshold is set to 60, the threshold of the voltage level may be appropriately changed depending on the design. When the voltage level changes, there is a possibility that chattering may occur due to the mechanical design. In particular, when the light receiving state changes to the light blocking state, the chattering amplitude tends to increase, and the number of times the judgment threshold is exceeded tends to increase. It is in. If the threshold is unintentionally crossed multiple times due to the influence of chattering, the possibility of the timing of determining the winning combination becoming uncertain increases. Specifically, when the judgment threshold for high active judgment exceeds 60, one hand is decided by the hand determining means, but the condition for exceeding the judgment threshold is satisfied multiple times due to the occurrence of chattering. In such a case, there is a possibility that a result that is clearly different from the timing of the player's operation of the start switch and the sensing piece passing through the sensor may be generated, and a uniform lottery result is provided. I'm afraid I can't.

On the other hand, when the low-active determination shown in FIG. 81 is employed, the voltage level is lowered as the sensor light receiving portion enters the light receiving state. When the sensor light-receiving portion enters the light-receiving state and the voltage level becomes less than 40 set as a threshold value, it is determined that the start switch has been input. Here, the threshold is set to 40, but the threshold of the voltage level may be appropriately changed depending on the design. Due to the mechanical design, chattering may occur when the voltage level changes. There is a tendency for the frequency of falling below .

From the above, the input device that affects the result of the game such as the determination of the role (for example, the start switch described above) can derive a stable result by adopting the low active determination. uses low active judgment.

In the above description, the start switch of the slot machine was taken as an example, but the low-active determination may also be applied to input devices related to errors, setting key switches, and the like. Also, in a pachinko game machine, it is desirable to employ an input device that affects the outcome of a game, such as an RWM clear switch. In other words, both in slot machines and pachinko gaming machines, it is possible to employ low-active determination for input devices that affect the results of games.

<Additional remarks in the eighth embodiment>
As an example of filtering processing when chattering occurs, there is a technique of discarding data or copying previous data if the stored pattern is not normal (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-62317). Although the prior art describes positive logic (high-active determination), it does not describe the advantages of adopting low-active. In this embodiment, the input device that adopts negative logic (low active determination) is adopted as an input device that affects the progress of the game, thereby reducing the influence of chattering and affecting the game such as role lottery. You can reduce the blurring of the results you give.

As described above, the technical contents described in the modes for carrying out the invention may be appropriately combined.

P: pachinko machine,
P1: outer frame,
P2: front frame,
P3: glass frame,
P4: back set unit,
P5: game board,
P40: main control board,
P41: production control board,
P42: Image control board,
P43: payout control board,
P44: power board,
P47: Power switch,
P48: Ram clear switch,
P49: Setting key switch,
P50: main control display,
P51: First special symbol display device,
P52: Second special symbol display device,
P80: production display device,
P81: production operation means (P380: production operation unit, P381: production button, P382: lever, P383: cross key),
P82: production lamp (P350: frame lamp, P550: board lamp),
P83: Speaker (P141 panel speaker, P371 upper speaker)
P560: production accessories,
P710: first start winning device,
P720: Second start winning device,
P730: general winning device,
P740: Normal map operation gate device,
P750: Large winning mouth device P755: Special electric accessory,
P770: Ordinary electric accessory 1: Slot machine 2: Front panel 3: Cabinet 4: Display window 5: Lower panel 6: Reel unit 7: Reel base 8a: Left reel 8b: Middle reel 8c: Right reel 11: Operation panel 12 : Start switch 13a : Left stop switch 13b : Middle stop switch 13c : Right stop switch 17 : Medal slot 18 : MAX bet switch 19 : 1 bet switch 20 : Sub switch 21 : Sub cross key switch 22 : Eject switch 24a : Left Operation instruction lamp 24b : Middle operation instruction lamp 24c : Right operation instruction lamp 25 : Bet number display lamp 26 : Credit number display 27 : Acquired number display 28 : Receptacle 29 : Cigarette ashtray 30 : Seal storage section 32 : Display device 34: Medal selector 35: Medal channel 37: Setting key switch 38: Setting switch 39: Power supply device 40: Power switch 41: Main control board unit 42: Sub control board unit 43: Medal payout port 44: Hopper 45: Medal payout Part 46: auxiliary tank 47: external output terminal plate 48: door open detection switch 52: main ROM
53: Sub ROM
56: Main RAM
57: Sub RAM
60: Stop switching switch 62: Automatic adjustment switch 64: 7-segment display 66: Stepping motor 72: Movable object 100: Main control board 105: Main CPU
110: voltage monitoring circuit 112: setting change means 114: crystal oscillator 120: winning lottery means 122: random number generator 124: random number extraction means 126: random number generation means 128: random number determination means 130: reel control means 132: rotation control means 134 : Stop control means 138 : Operation order detection means 140 : Winning determination means 142 : Payout means 144 : Power interruption means 146 : Special role carrying over means 148 : Winning flag control means 151 : Special game control means 156 : Hopper motor drive means 158 : Bet number setting means 1000: Sub control board 1002: Effect output control means 1004: Rights control means 1005: Sub CPU
1006: notification output control means 1008: sub-input switch operation means 1010: movable object control means 1014: image control board 1018: BL board 1101: sub-control means 1110: effect control means 1120: game state notification means 1130: AT lottery means 1140 : AT management means 1150 : AT game number counting means 1160 : Notification means 1170 : Lottery means 1180 : AT notification means S : Speaker

Claims (1)

an input device that performs a predetermined effect by vibrating;
A part 1 that engages with an input device, a part 2 that engages with at least two other parts that engage with the part 1,
a door having a display window;
a reel including at least a reel tape, a reel base around which the reel tape is wound, a motor for rotating the reel base, and a motor fixing base to which the motor is fixed;
a reel unit in which a plurality of reels are fixed in parallel;
a plurality of locking parts (locking parts are screws) for respectively fixing the plurality of reels to the reel unit;
The part 2 is a stopping device for stopping the reel,
at least one of the part 1, the other part and the part 2 has at least one portion that engages without the use of a screw;
When the input device vibrates to perform a predetermined effect, the displacement of vibration in the component 2 is smaller than the displacement of vibration in the input device,
A predetermined reel among the plurality of reels and the reel unit are fixed above the reel tape constituting the predetermined reel by a predetermined locking member among the plurality of locking members,
The relationship between the length m in the longitudinal direction of the predetermined engaging part and the vertical distance n from the top of the reel tape constituting the predetermined reel to the upper inner wall of the reel unit is m>n. cage,
The relationship between the length m of the predetermined engaging part in the longitudinal direction and the shortest distance b between the foremost portion of the predetermined reel and the display window when the door is locked is m<b. A gaming machine characterized in that

Images